Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England





Three Boys in the Wild North Land

By Egerton Ryerson Young
________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

THREE BOYS IN THE WILD NORTH LAND

BY EGERTON RYERSON YOUNG



CHAPTER ONE.

WELCOME TO SAGASTA-WEEKEE--MR. ROSS, THEIR HOST--THE THREE BOYS--FRANK,
ALEC, SAM--THE "PRINCE ARTHUR"--THE VOYAGE--THE ESQUIMAUX--ARRIVAL AT
YORK FACTORY.

"Welcome to this Wild North Land! welcome to our happy home in the Land
of the North Wind!  Welcome, thrice welcome, all and each one of you!"

Thus excitedly and rapidly did Mr Ross address a trio of sunburnt,
happy boys, who, with all the assurance of a joyous welcome, had burst
in upon him in his comfortable, well-built home, or "hunting lodge," as
he preferred to call it, on the banks of the Nelson River.  This cozy
but isolated home was situated some hundreds of miles up in the interior
of the country from York Factory, on the Hudson Bay.

Mr Ross had named his house "Sa-gas-ta-wee-kee," a beautiful Indian
word which literally means a house full of sunshine.  Mr Ross had spent
many years as an official in the Hudson Bay Company's service, as had
his father before him.  A few years before this, being possessed of
abundance of means, he had retired from active work in the great fur-
trading company.  He had tried to settle down in an older, civilised
land, but had found it impossible to content himself away from those
regions where he had spent the best years of his life.  His wife and
family were of the same mind, and so, after some years of travel in
various lands, they returned to this northern country where they had
spent so many happy years.

Every year or so Mr Ross with some members of his family was in the
habit of visiting what he loved to call the mother country.  So full was
his life of varied and startling adventures, that he was often asked to
give addresses on some of the fascinating experiences, through which he
had passed.

Among the crowds who listened to him with intense interest, as he gave a
series of addresses in one of the great historic schools in the home
land, were the three boys who are to be the heroes of this book.
Although they were from different families and nationalities, yet they
were congenial spirits, and were equally filled with the love of sport
and spirit of exciting adventure.

For such boys Mr Ross's addresses about the Indians, the wild animals,
and the excitements of the hunt had the greatest fascination.  With Mr
Ross they had become personally acquainted, and had induced him to visit
their different towns, where he lectured, and to be the guest at their
homes, where his delightful stories had charmed every member of their
households.

In some way or other they had persuaded their parents to consent to
their spending a year or so in the wilds of the northern part of the
great Dominion of Canada under the guidance of Mr Ross, who most
importunately pleaded for this arrangement on behalf of the boys.  As it
was impossible for them to return with Mr Ross on account of their
studies, several months passed away ere it was possible for them to
begin their journey; so he had returned alone to his home, and had made
all preparations for entertaining them as members of his household for
an indefinite period.

Letters had been sent on in advance notifying Mr Ross of the probable
time of the arrival of the boys.  But, as often happened in that wild
country, where there was no postal service, the letters never arrived,
and so the first intimation Mr Ross had of the coming of the boys was
their bursting in upon him.  Abrupt as was their coming, of course they
were welcome.  In all new lands there is an open-hearted hospitality
that is very delightful, and this was emphatically so in the vast lonely
region of the Hudson Bay Territory, where the white men in those days
were so few and so widely scattered apart from each other.

And now that they are snugly ensconced in the home of their good friend
Mr Ross and his hospitable family, ere we begin to describe their many
sports and adventures let us find out something about our heroes, and
have them describe some of the exciting incidents of the long trip which
they had already made on their journey to this Wild North Land.

Frank, the eldest of the three, was the son of a Liverpool banker.  His
friends had vainly tried to divert his mind from wild adventure and
exciting sports, and persuade him to settle down to steady routine
office work.  Failing in this, they had listened to Mr Ross's pleadings
on his behalf, and had commented to let him have the year in the Wild
North Land, hoping that its trials and hardships would effectually cure
him of his love of adventure and cause him to cheerfully settle down at
his father's business.

Alec was from Scotland, a genuine son of "the mountain and the flood."
While a good student when at school, yet, when at home on his holidays,
his highest joy had ever been under the guidance of the faithful old
gillie to follow on the trail of the mountain deer.  For a wider field
than that offered by his native Highlands he had been so longing that
his friends yielded to his importunities, and so now here he is with his
comrades, full of eager anticipations.

Sam was from what his mother used to call "dear, dirty Dublin."  He was
full of life and fun; a jolly Irish boy of the finest type.  Storms and
privations might at times depress the spirits of the others; but Sam,
true to his nationality, never lost his spirits or his good nature.  So
rapid had been his progress in his studies that he had pushed himself
beyond his years, and so even his tutors had joined in his request that
he should have the year off, which, spent in the invigorating air and
healthful adventures in the Wild North Land, would doubtless be a
blessing to both mind and body:

In the good ship _Prince Arthur_, of the Hudson Bay Company, our three
young adventurers set sail in the month of May from the London docks.
They met with no adventures worth recording until after they had left
the Orkney Islands, where they had called for their last consignment of
supplies and the latest mails.  Here they also shipped some hardy Orkney
men and Highlanders, who were going out in the employment of the Hudson
Bay Company.

The _Prince Arthur_ was a stanch sailing vessel, built especially for
the Hudson Bay Company's trade.  She was employed in carrying out to
that country the outfit of goods required in the great fur trade.  Her
return cargoes were the valuable furs obtained in barter from the
Indians.  Her port was York Factory, on the western side of the Hudson
Bay.  Here her cargo was discharged and carried by scores of inland
boats and canoes to the various trading posts in the different parts of
that great country, which is larger than the whole continent of Europe.

So remote were some of those posts from the seaboard, and so difficult
and slow were the methods of transporting the goods, that several years
passed ere the fur secured from them reached the London markets, to
which they were all consigned and where they were carried each year in
the company's ships.

Although the _Prince Arthur_ was far from being a first-class passenger
ship, yet she was a good, seaworthy vessel, with plenty of room for the
few passengers who travelled by her each year.  These were principally
gentlemen of the Hudson Bay Company's service and their friends, or
missionaries going out or returning home.

Letters from influential friends secured for our three boys the
considerate attention of the captain and the ship's officers, and their
own bright ways won the friendship of all the sailors on board.  On the
whole they had a glorious passage.  Some fogs at times perplexed them,
and a few enormous icebergs were so near that careful tacking was
required, to prevent accidents.  The boys were filled with admiration at
these great mountains of ice; some of them seemed like great islands,
while others more closely resembled glorious cathedrals built in marble
and emerald.  At times, as the western sun shone upon them, they seemed
to take on in parts every colour of the rainbow.  With intense interest
were they watched as they slowly drifted beyond the southern horizon.

One of the most exciting incidents of the journey was a battle between a
great whale and a couple of swordfish.  The unwieldy monster seemed to
be no match for his nimble antagonists.  His sole weapon seemed to be
his enormous tail; but vain were his efforts to strike his quicker
enemies.  As far as could be judged from the deck of the ship, the
swordfish were masters of the situation, and the blood-stained waters
seemed to indicate that the battle would soon be over.

In the southern part of Davis Strait they encountered great fields of
floating ice, on which were many herds of seals.  The captain had the
ship hove to and three boats lowered.  In each one he permitted one of
the boys to go with the sailors on this seal-hunting expedition.  The
seals, which are so very active in water, where they can swim with such
grace and rapidity, are very helpless on land or ice, and so large
numbers were killed by the sailors.  While the boys were excited with
the sport, they could not but feel sorry for the poor, helpless
creatures as they looked at them out of their great eyes that seemed
almost human.  Some hundreds of skins were secured, much to the delight
of the captain and crew, as the profit coming to them from their sale
would be no inconsiderable item.

At the mouth of Hudson Strait the captain again had the ship hove to for
a day or so to trade with a number of Esquimaux, who had come in their
curious canoes, called kayaks, from along the coasts of Labrador.  Their
insatiable curiosity and peculiar fur clothing very much interested the
boys.  These Esquimaux were shrewd hands at a bargain, but their
principal desire seemed to be to obtain implements of iron in exchange
for their furs.  They cared nothing for flour, rice, tea, coffee, or
sugar.  They knew no other food than meat and oil, and so craved no
other things than those that could be utilised in improving their
weapons.  Guns were unknown among them, but they were very skillful in
the use of the harpoon and the spear.  When they are able to secure iron
from the white man they make their harpoon heads, spears, and knives out
of this metal, but when unable to secure it they manufacture their
weapons out of the horns of the reindeer or the tusks of the walrus or
narwhal.

They had among their other furs some splendid bear skins, and the boys
were very much interested in hearing them tell through an interpreter
how they, with their rude weapons, aided by their clever dogs, had been
able to kill these fierce animals.  All were very much delighted when
told by these friendly Esquimaux how that with two well-trained dogs
nipping at the hind legs of a great bear they could keep him turning
round and round from one to the other and thus get him so wild and
excited that in his efforts to catch hold of the nimble animals, which
were able to keep out of his grasp, he did not notice the arrival of the
hunters, who were able to approach so closely that they could easily
kill him.

The ship crossed the great Hudson Bay, which is about six hundred miles
in width, without any mishap, and safely dropped anchor in what the
Hudson Bay officers call "the six fathom hole," some distance out from
the rude primitive wharf.  The signal gun was fired, and soon a brigade
of boats came out, and the work of unloading the cargo began.

Our boys, eager as they were to land, were sorry after all to leave
their snug berths in the good ship, where they had had some very
delightful times during the thirty days that had elapsed since they had
left the docks in old England.

A few gifts were bestowed among their particular sailor friends, and
then, with the "God bless you" from all; they entered a small boat rowed
by Indians, and were soon on the land that skirts this great inland sea.
Great indeed was the change which they saw between the populous cities
of the home land and this quiet, lonely region upon whose shores they
had now landed.

Here the only inhabitants were the fur traders, with their employees,
and the dignified, stoical Indians.  The only signs of habitations were
the few civilised dwellings, called in courtesy the fort, where dwelt
and traded the officers and their families and servants of the great
fur-trading company, and not very far off was the Indian village of the
natives, where the most conspicuous buildings were the church and
parsonage of the missionary, who had been marvellously successful in
planting the cross in these northern regions, and in winning from a
degrading superstition, to the blessings of Christianity, some hundreds
of these red men, whose consistent lives showed the genuineness of the
work wrought among them.

This great region, stretching from the Atlantic to the Pacific, far
north of the fertile prairie region where millions will yet find happy
and prosperous homes, has well been called "The Wild North Land."  The
Indians call it Keewatin, "The Land of the North Wind."

It has not many attractions for the farmer or merchantman, but it is the
congenial home of the red man.  On its innumerable lakes and broad
rivers he glides along during the few bright summer months in his light
canoe.  Every waterfall or cataract has associated with it some legend
or tradition.  Its dense forests are the haunts of the bear and wolf, of
the moose and reindeer, and many other valuable animals, in the
excitement of hunting which he finds his chief delight.

To this land had come our three lads for sport and adventure, and we
shall see how fully all their expectations were realised.

Three Boys in the Wild North Land--Egerton Ryerson Young



CHAPTER TWO.

HUDSON BAY COMPANY--FRANK'S CANOE MISHAP--DUCK SHOOTING--CLEVER KOONA--
GOOSE HUNTING--QUEER BATTLES.

As our boys had come out to this great country for wild adventure and
exciting sport, they were rather pleased than otherwise at the contrast
it thus presented in comparison with the lands they had left behind.
The fact was, they were simply delighted with the absence of the
multitude, to whom they had been so accustomed, and were at once filled
with high expectations.  Sam's explanation seemed to be the sentiment of
them all when he exclaimed, "Sure if there are so few people in the
country, there will be the more bears and wolves for us all to kill!"

The work of unloading the ship was necessarily slow, and so some days
would elapse ere a brigade of boats could be prepared to take the first
cargo to Fort Garry, on the Red River.  The boys had been most cordially
welcomed by Mr McTavish, the principal officer in charge at the fort,
and by him they were all entertained most hospitably at his home.

Mr McTavish was an old sportsman himself, as nearly all the Hudson Bay
Company's officials are; and so, as soon as the boys had made the
acquaintance, as they call it, of their land legs; after the heaving and
rolling of the vessel, he had an old clever Indian hunter clean up some
guns and take the boys out in the birch canoe on their first wild
hunting expedition.  This first excursion was not to be a very
formidable one; it was only a canoe trip several miles up the coast, to
a place where the wild ducks and geese were numerous.  Like all white
people, on their first introduction to the birch canoe, they thought it
a frail, cranky boat, and were quite disgusted with it, and some of the
tricks it played upon them, on some of their first attempts to manage
it.  For example, Frank, who prided himself on his ability in pulling an
oar, and in managing the ordinary small skiffs or punts on his native
waters, seeing the light, buoyant canoe at the side of the little
launch, boldly sprang into it, as he would into an ordinary boat of its
size in the Mersey.

To his utter amazement, and the amusement of the others he suddenly
found himself overbalanced and struggling in the waves on the other
side.  Fortunately, the water was not more than four feet deep, and he,
being a good swimmer, was soon up and at once gave chase for the canoe,
which had now floated out several yards from the shore.  In this he was
encouraged by the laughter and shouts of his comrades and others, who,
seeing that no harm had come to him from his sudden spill out of the
light boat, were eager to observe how he would ultimately succeed.

Quickly did he catch up to the boat; but, instead of listening to the
Indian, who, in broken English, tried to tell him to get in over the end
of the canoe, he seized it by the side, and there attempted to climb in.
Vain were his efforts.  Very skillful indeed is the Indian who can in
this manner get into a birch-bark canoe, and of course it is out of the
question to expect an inexperienced white person to accomplish the feat.
So light is the canoe, that, when thus seized hold of, it yields to the
slightest pull, and often causes the person who thus takes hold of it to
tumble over ignominiously in the water.

Poor Frank was disgusted but not conquered, and so, amid the laughter of
those on shore, he now listened to the advice and direction of the wise
old Indian, who was the only one in the company who had not even smiled
at the boy's mishap.  At the Indian's advice he again caught hold of the
canoe, but this time by the end, and carefully bearing his weight upon
it he was at length enabled to work himself into it.  Cautiously
balancing himself, and seizing a paddle that happened to have been
fastened in it, he paddled himself ashore amid the cheers of the
onlookers.

"Well done, Frank!" said the old Indian.

He had done what some take months to accomplish.  He had conquered the
canoe in his first attempt, and never after in his many adventures was
he afraid of that bonny craft, in which he spent many happy hours, and
in the paddling of which, he became the equal of many a clever Indian.

Of course, there was some delay in the departure of the hunting party,
as Frank had to return to his quarters at the Post and get on a dry suit
of clothing.  This is, however, an operation that does not take a boy
full of eager excitement long to accomplish, and so it was not many
minutes ere the party set off on their promised excursion.

The Indian decided that they should first go where the ducks were
numerous, and to interest these young English lads they adopted a method
of hunting them that was most novel and successful.  Indeed, it is a
very rare method which was here successfully tried, on account of the
difficulty of getting a dog so trained as to correctly act his part.
But this old native, whose name was Ooseemeemou, had by great patience
and kindness so drilled his clever dog that he acted his part with
extraordinary cleverness and tact.  He called the little fellow Koona,
which is the Cree for "snow," and was very appropriate, as the animal
was of the purest white.

Taking the dog into the canoe with them, and giving all necessary
directions, they soon were gliding along the coast of the great bay.
Numerous flocks of ducks flew over their heads; and far away in the
distance the water seemed almost alive with the numbers of them on the
dancing, sparkling waves.  This latter sight seemed to be what the old
hunter was looking for, and so the canoe was quickly paddled ashore and
carried up on the beach.  There he carefully guided the party along.
They had to cautiously creep behind some low, dense willow bushes that
grew on the shore, with only a broad fringe of white sand between them
and the waters.

Each boy, with his gun and ammunition, was now assigned his post behind
a clump of bushes and given his final instructions.  They were full of
excitement and curiosity, and wondered how it was going to be possible
for them to reach with ordinary guns the ducks, which were carelessly
swimming in multitudes some hundreds of yards out from the shore.  But
they had not long to wait or conjecture.  When the old Indian had seen
that all were in their right places he gave a low whistle, which was
more like the call of a sea bird than a human voice.  So natural was it
to a bird call that no bird around was startled by it; but the well-
trained Koona, who had been left by the boat, fully knew its meaning,
and now began his sagacious work.  Like a little white arctic fox he
was, and like one be began his antics on the shore.  He frisked and
danced around along the sand playing all sorts of antics.  He walked on
his hind feet, turned somersaults in quick succession, and acted as
though possessed with perpetual motion, but not one yelp or bark or any
sound did he utter.

A stranger would have imagined that his appearance and actions would
have driven all the ducks that were near enough to the shore to observe
him and his antics farther out to sea.  But just the reverse happened.
A spirit of curiosity seemed to possess those nearest the shore, and as
they began to swim in closer and closer, their movements influenced
those farther out, until hundreds of splendid ducks were soon swimming
nearer and nearer the sandy beach, on which the cunning dog kept up his
unceasing and varied movements.  At first he had kept at some distance
from the sands, back of which grew the clumps of willows behind which
the hunters were hidden; but when he saw that his manoeuvres had
attracted the ducks near the shore, he gradually worked down the sandy
beach until he had them fairly opposite the muzzles of the guns.

A low bird cry from his master was the signal for his change of tactics,
and with loud, yelping, fox-like barking he sprang into the waves.

The ducks, thus suddenly alarmed, instantly rose up in hundreds, and the
simultaneous reports of the guns rang out, and between thirty and forty
ducks, dead and wounded, fell back into the waters.  Our hunters, both
the Indian and the three boys, sprang from their hiding places, and with
Koona's aid secured their splendid bag of game.  This was rare sport for
the boys, and gave them so much delight that old Ooseemeemou decided to
postpone the goose hunt until the next day, and give the boys another
opportunity of seeing the sagacity of Koona, the clever little dog that
had contributed so much to the success of the expedition.

They returned to their places, and were told to keep as much hidden as
possible, as the ducks, now alarmed by the reports of the guns, and the
death and wounding of so many of their numbers, would be shy and
excited; and would keep flying around for some time ere they would again
alight.  Koona in the meantime had curled himself up like a ball of
white wool, and was also quite hidden from the sight of the flying
ducks.

In about half an hour the ducks began to alight again in the water.
They were very alert and watchful, and seemed resolved not to be again
so easily caught napping.  But ducks are silly things and are easily
deceived, or have very short memories.  Anyway it was the case with
these.  When a goodly number of them were again seen swimming about, a
peculiar sound like the cry of a sea gull was heard, and soon Koona was
observed moving very cautiously out to a little point on the sandy
beach, just in front of the clump of bushes behind which his master was
hidden.  Here he curled himself up into a little white bundle and
remained perfectly still.  Soon after the boys were startled by the
sounds of the loud quacking of ducks over the very place where Koona lay
so still and quiet.  At first they were very much surprised at this, as
not a duck was now seen flying in that direction.  A little closer
investigation showed them that the quacking sounds were all proceeding
from the mouth of the old Indian, who, like many of his people, was able
to imitate so perfectly the cries and calls of the birds and beasts of
the lakes and forests that at times even the most experienced are
completely deceived.  In addition, this Indian was also a ventriloquist,
and was able to so correctly throw his voice that the quacking of the
ducks seems to be from the spot where the dog, now so motionless, was
lying.  The old Indian afterward explained that the calls were of ducks
that had found something of interest, and were invitations for other
ducks to come and see, and when he had induced some of the ducks to take
up the call they would go on repeating it until so many others took it
up, and all would then be anxious to see what the fuss was all about.

"Ducks," added the old man, "are like people, sometimes curious to see
when there is not much after all to look at."

So, because of the calls to come and look, the flocks kept flying or
swimming nearer and nearer, and all there was to see was only a ball of
something very white and still.  Not an hour before they were curious to
see the antics of a lively little white dog; now they were curious to
see him apparently motionless and dead.

By carefully peering through the dense bushes, the boys, with guns
loaded, were able to see the dog quivering with suppressed excitement,
as the many quackings of the ducks told him of the success of his ruse.
However, he was so well-trained that he would not move until the welcome
signal was given him, and then with a bound and a bark he was up, and
again, as the startled ducks rose up, the reports of all the guns rang
out, and nearly as many more fine ducks fell before the simultaneous
discharge.  This was capital sport for the boys.  Koona's sagacity, and
thorough training, in being thus able to bring the ducks within range of
the guns, first by his comical antics, and then by his perfect quiet,
very much delighted them.  Their only annoyance was that when they
wanted to pat and fondle him he resented their familiarity, and growled
at them most decidedly.  Indian dogs do not as a rule take to white
people at first, but kindness soon wins them, and they often become fast
friends.

The canoe was again launched, and the hunters proceeded a couple of
miles farther and had some more capital shooting.  Very proud and happy
were they with this, their first day of duck shooting, and often did
they in after days have much to say of the marvellous cleverness of the
spotless Koona.

As the brigades were not yet ready to leave for the interior with the
supplies for the trading posts, Mr McTavish readily consented to
another excursion, quietly observing that the return of a few such well-
loaded canoes would add materially to the fort's supply of food.

This second excursion was to be to a more distant place, where were some
favourite feeding grounds of wild geese.  They are very fond of a
jointed quill-like grass, and when once they have found where their
favourite food grows, there they resort in great numbers, and unless
very persistently hunted will keep in the neighbourhood until they have
about eaten it all.

As the distance was so great, it was decided to make an all day trip of
it, and so two canoes were requisitioned with two experienced Indians in
each, one of whom, of course, was Ooseemeemou.  To him the boys had
become very much attached, and, as he had some knowledge of English,
they were able to get a good deal of reliable information from him.
Some food and kettles were taken along with them, and old Ooseemeemou
put in the bottom of each canoe a good-sized oilcloth and a couple of
blankets, saying, as he did so, "Fine weather to-day, may not be so very
long."

Frank and Alec were given good places in one of the canoes, and Sam was
placed in charge of the other two Indians.  Each boy was furnished with
two guns and plenty of ammunition.  Being eager to get to the hunting
grounds, they each selected a paddle, and were found to be not
unskillful in the use of them, even in birch canoes, after a few lessons
from their Indian attendants.

With the best wishes of all who were not too busy to come down to the
launch to see them off, they started on their excursion under the
skillful, steady strokes of the Indians.  Aided by the boys, they were
able to make about seven miles an hour, and so in about three hours they
reached their destination.  The splendid exercise and the bracing air
gave them all good appetites, and so they pulled up in a secluded little
bay, where was to be found some dry wood.  Here a fire was kindled, the
kettles were filled with water and boiled, and soon a good, substantial
meal of the delicacies of the country were spread before them.  What the
bill of fare was we know not, except that the principal part consisted
of some of the ducks shot on the previous excursion.  The dinner thus
prepared and eaten on the rocks was much enjoyed by the boys; but they
were kept in a perpetual state of excitement by the numerous cries of
the wild geese that could be distinctly heard as well as seen, as they
kept flying in great lines or triangles to and from their feeding
grounds.

As this was a favourite resort for the Indian hunters, all preparations
had been made for the goose hunting.  Large nest-like piles of dry hay
with reeds and rushes had been gathered in certain favourite places.  In
each of these a hollow had been formed in the centre like a bird's nest,
large enough for two persons to cozily ensconce themselves, so low down
as only to be observed by the geese when flying directly overhead.
After dinner four of these big nest-like affairs were freshened up with
some bundles of dry old grass, which was cut in an old disused beaver
meadow.

A number of old decoys, made to look like geese when feeding, were
arranged in the right position, which always varies according to the
direction of the wind.  Then Ooseemeemou, taking Frank with him, gave
Alec and Sam each in charge of a clever Indian hunting companion.  One
Indian, whose name was Oostaseemou, had a nest to himself.  Thus
assorted, our party took possession of their four nests and awaited
developments.  The boys were greatly amused at the queer little white
cotton caps which each one had to put on.  Everything in the shape of
colour had to be carefully hidden.  Geese are not easily alarmed by
anything white, and will come quite near to persons thus dressed.

While now waiting for the arrival of the game, the boys were each
instructed how to act in case the geese should come within range.  They
generally fly down with the wind and arise facing it.  Since the decoys
are so arranged in the goose grass that the geese in coming down to join
those already there must, in availing themselves of the wind to help
them to alight, come within range of the nests in which are hidden the
hunters.  Then, when the firing of the guns alarm them, and those unhurt
rise to escape, they have to so use the wind to help them that they
again come within range, and thus receive a second volley.  When the
second volley is fired the dead and wounded are quickly secured by the
hunters, who jump out of the nests and make chase after them.  There is
lots of fun and some danger of ugly blows, for an old wounded goose
sometimes makes a good fight.

Fortunately for our young hunters, a good stiff breeze was blowing when
they took their places in these queer nests, and, with their two guns
apiece in position, patiently waited the arrival of the geese.  Several
flocks had been seen in the distance, and their strange cries were heard
on every side.  While the men were on the move getting things ready, of
course none of the wary birds came within range.  However, now that all
was quiet in the vicinity of the choicest feeding grounds, a few old
out-guards which appeared cautiously flying over, seemed to have
reported that nothing was to be seen but some patches of snow in the
nests.  The Indians say that the geese mistake them, when dressed in
white, for lumps of snow.  Soon after a great flock was seen coming with
the wind from the south directly toward them.

Old Ooseemeemou began to imitate the call of the geese, and throwing his
voice so that it seemed from the decoys, it appeared as if they in the
goose grass were saying, "Honk: Honk: Honk:" which the Indians say is
the goose language for "Food, food, food."

Ooseemeemou knew well how to imitate them, and so the great flock
understood it as the call from some of their fortunate companions, and
down they came with the wind passing in close range on the left-hand
side of the hunters.  Bang: bang: bang! rang out the guns of the three
boys and of the four Indians, and five or six great geese tumbled to the
ground, some of them dead and others badly wounded.  The startled,
frightened, surviving geese, that thought they were going to have such a
feast among their fellows, had only time to turn round and strive to
escape by rising up against the wind on the opposite sides of those dry
nests.  This was what the clever Indians knew they would do, and so, as
they came within range, struggling against the wind, each hunter, white
and Indian, now used his second gun, and nearly as many more plump geese
dropped to the ground dead and wounded.

Now the fun began.  There was a hasty springing out of the nests, and
every man and boy dashed off for his goose.  The Indians were wary and
experienced, and so knew how to act; but our enthusiastic boys, in the
excitement of securing their first wild goose, recklessly rushed in to
the attack.

Alec was the first to come to grief.  The old gander that he was
pursuing had a broken wing, but as his legs were all right he led him a
lively chase of several hundred yards.  Then, seeing that he was being
overtaken, he stopped suddenly and, turning the well wing toward the
boy, awaited his coming.  Alec, seeing him thus standing with one wing
hanging broken to the ground, anticipated nothing but an easy capture,
and so he thoughtlessly attempted to throw himself on the bird and
quickly capture him in his arms.

Poor fellow, when picked up he could hardly tell what had happened, only
that it seemed to him he had been pounded with sledge hammers and had
seen some thousands of stars.

What had really happened was this: the instant Alec sprang forward and
stooped to seize his game the goose with his unwounded wing had hit him
such a blow on the head as to quite stun him, and this had been followed
by several other blows in rapid succession.  Fortunately old Ooseemeemou
was not far off.  He rushed to Alec's rescue and speedily dispatched the
goose, and thus delivered the boy from the humiliating position of being
badly whipped by a wounded goose.  Poor fellow, he carried in the black
and blue marks on his body the effects of the fierce blows which had
been rained upon him.

Frank had conquered his without any mishap; but Sam, in reaching out to
seize hold of the one he was chasing, had received such a blow from a
wing on his elbow that he fairly howled with the pain, and was not able
to fire another shot during the rest of the day's sport.  It was news to
the boys when the Indians told them that an old goose with one blow of
his wing has been known to kill a large fox or to break the leg of a
man.  So the boys, while delighted with the success of their first goose
hunt, ever after had a much greater respect for the poor despised goose
than before.

With the veering of the wind the decoys were changed so as to bring the
geese down in the right direction in range of the guns, and sport
continued until evening.  Then, after a hasty supper on the rocks in the
glorious gloaming that exists for many hours in those high latitudes in
the summer months, the canoes were loaded, and three very tired but
happy boys who wanted to paddle went to sleep in the canoes long ere the
hospitable home of their host was reached.

The Indians are the kindest men in the world with whom to travel.
Hardly knowing how it happened, the boys were carefully helped to their
quarters in the fort.  Here their bruises were bathed, their suppers
eaten, their prayers said, and then there was the long nine hours'
dreamless sleep, "Tired nature's sweet restorer, balmy sleep."

When next morning the boys were discussing the, to them, glorious
adventures of the two preceding days, it was agreed among them that the
accidents and honours were about even--that while Alec and Sam had had
their laugh at Frank for his misadventure with the canoe, the tables
were completely turned on them in the incidents of the goose hunt.

Three Boys in the Wild North Land--by Egerton Ryerson Young



CHAPTER THREE.

WRITING JOURNALS--FUR-LADEN BRIGADES--VALUABLE FURS--HUNTING
PREPARATIONS--BIG TOM, THE FAMOUS GUIDE--THE START--FIRST CAMP ON THE
ROCKS.

Soon after breakfast and a glorious plunge bath in the cold waters of
Hudson Bay, the lads were informed by Mr McTavish that the ship's cargo
was now about unloaded, and that just as soon as the brigades, with the
last winter's catch of furs, which were looked for every hour, should
arrive she would with the first favourable wind begin the return
journey.  He suggested that instead of hunting that day they should
devote its hours to writing letters to their friends far away, as months
would elapse ere another opportunity would be theirs.  Of course this
kind suggestion was most gratefully accepted, and in an unused office in
one of the buildings Frank, Alec, and Sam were soon busily engaged in
this very interesting work.

Before leaving home they had been furnished with regulation journals,
and had been offered substantial rewards if they would write something
in their books every day.  Readily had they promised; but, alas! when
the Atlantic storms had for some days assailed them their good
resolutions, stimulated by the promised rewards, failed most signally.
During the first few days after starting they had so much to write
about, and had so filled up the pages, that they all regretted that
their books were not larger, or that they had not three or four pages
for each day.  This, however, had all changed.  The pages were now too
large, and it was a burden to write even a few sentences.

We need not stop here to give any detailed accounts of these letters;
suffice it to say they were just such as any of the bright, happy,
boyish readers of these pages would have written under similar
circumstances to their loved mothers and friends far away.  It was
noticed that while they were full of fun and laughter while writing to
their school chums and other young friends, yet when they came to the
writing of the letters to their mothers there was a quiet time among
them, and some tears dropped on the pages, and some throats had lumps in
them.  All right, boys; we think not the less but much the more of you,
because of the love and affection for your mothers, between whom and you
now rolls the wide Atlantic.  Months will elapse ere letters from home
will reach you, or you will have the opportunity of writing again; and
so now, while you have the chance, send loving letters to the precious
mothers, whose love excels all other earthly love.  Frank, Alec, and Sam
all have, as you have, good mothers.  They never gave bad advice, but
always the best counsel.  They never led the boys astray, but ever
stimulated to a noble life.  They always loved and were ever more
anxious to forgive and forget than the boys were to be forgiven.

Great was the noise and excitement at the fort next morning, and very
early were the boys astir to see what was the cause.  The long-expected
brigades of boats had arrived with the cargoes of furs.  As they were
all sorted in well-packed bales, weighing each about eighty or ninety
pounds, the work of transferring them to the ship did not take very
long.  One boat in running some wild and dangerous rapids had been
submerged and nearly lost, with all its crew, who escaped only because
they could swim like otters.  The cargo of furs had all gone under the
waves ere rescued, and so it was necessary to open all the bales of fur,
with which the boat had been loaded, and dry them in the bright sun as
quickly as possible.  This work very much interested the boys, and, as
the assortment of furs was a varied one, they had their first
opportunity of seeing what rich and valuable furs this wild country
could produce.

There were no less than six varieties of foxes, the most valuable being
the black and silver ones.  Then there were cross foxes, blue foxes, as
well as white and red ones.  The rich otters and splendid black beavers
very much interested them, and especially the prime bear and wolf skins.
And as they looked at them and many other kinds their mouths fairly
watered at the prospect of during the few months being engaged in the
exciting sport of capturing the comrades of these in their native
forests.

Yes, they would succeed in some instances, as our book will tell; but
now as they looked at these splendid skins lying so quiet and still they
little imagined the dangers and hardships which would be theirs ere the
fierce bears and savage wolves they were to assail would render up their
splendid robes.

Very much interested also were they in the hardy voyageurs, or trip men,
who constituted these brigades.  Dark and swarthy they were, with
beardless faces, and long black hair that rested on their shoulders.
From remote and different regions had they come.  Here were brigades
from the Assiniboine, Red River, Cumberland, and the Saskatchewan
region.  Many of the boatmen were of the Metis--half-French and Indian;
and they spoke a language that was a mixture of both, with some English
intermixed that was not always the most polite.

From the mighty Saskatchewan had come down that great river for a
thousand miles, and then onward for several hundred more, brigades that
had, in addition to the furs and robes of that land, large supplies of
dried meat and tallow, and many bags of the famous food called pemmican,
obtained from the great herds of buffalo that still, in those days, like
the cattle on a thousand hills, thundered through the land and grazed on
its rich pasturage and drank from its beautiful streams.  The men of
these Saskatchewan brigades were warriors who had often been in conflict
with hostile tribes, and could tell exciting stories of scalping
parties, and the fierce conflict for their lives when beleaguered by
some relentless foes.  Some of them bore on face or scalp the marks of
the wounds received in close tomahawk encounter, and, for the gift of a
pocketknife or gaudy handkerchief from our eager boys, rehearsed with
all due enlargement the story of the fierce encounter with superior
numbers of their bitterest enemies, how they had so gloriously
triumphed, but had not come off unscathed, as these great scars did
testify.

Thus excited and interested did the boys wander from one encampment of
these brigades to another.  The word had early gone out from the chief
factor, Mr McTavish, that these boys were his special friends, and as
such were to be treated with consideration by all.  This was quite
sufficient to insure them a welcome everywhere, and so they acquired a
good deal of general information, as they became acquainted with people
from places, of which they had heard but little, and from others of some
regions until then to them unknown.

In addition to those already referred to, there were brigades from Lac-
la-Puie, the Lake of the Woods, Cumberland House, Athabasca, and Swan
River, and other places many hundreds of miles away.

As each brigade arrived it formed its own encampment separate from the
others.  Here the fires of dry logs were built on the ground, and the
meals prepared and eaten.  When the day's work was over, the men
gathered around the fire's bright glow and smoked their pipes, laughed
and chatted, and then, each wrapping himself in a single blanket, they
lay down on the ground to sleep, with no roof above them but the stars.

As the goods brought from England in large bulk had to be made up into
bundles, called in the language of the country "pieces," each weighing
from eighty to one hundred pounds, that could be easily carried around
the portages by the Indians, several days must elapse ere the return
trip would be begun.  Very interesting were these days to the boys, as
from camp fire to camp fire they wandered, making friends everywhere
with the Indians by their hearty, manly ways.

At first the wildest and fiercest looking fellows most attracted them;
those wild warriors who could tell of scalping parties and horse-
stealing adventures among the warlike tribes of the great plains.  After
a while, however, they found themselves most interested in the brigades
that could travel fastest, that had the record of making the fastest
trip in the shortest time.  What at first was a surprise to them was
that the brigades that held these best records were the Christian ones,
who took time to say their prayers morning and evening and always rested
on the Sabbath.  This proved that these hard-working men, who rested one
day in seven, could do and did better and faster work than those who
knew no Sabbath, but pushed on from day to day without rest.  Man as a
working animal needs the day of rest, and with one off in seven will, as
has been here and in other places proved, do better work in the
remaining six than the one who takes no day of rest.

Soon after the arrival of the brigades with the furs, which were
estimated as being worth in London over three hundred thousand pounds,
they were all safely stowed away in the vessel, and a favourable wind
springing up from the south-west, the anchor was lifted, the sails
hoisted, and the good ship _Prince Arthur_ started on her return voyage
to the old land.  The boys waved their handkerchiefs and shouted their
farewells until the vessel was far out on the dancing waves like a thing
of life and beauty.

To Big Tom, of the Norway House Brigade, had been intrusted the
responsibility of safely taking the boys up from York Factory to the
residence of Mr Ross.  His Indian name was Mamanowatum, which means, "O
be joyful," but he had long been called Big Tom on account of his
gigantic size.

Ample resources had been sent with the boys to pay for all their
requirements.  Mr McTavish had an experienced clerk look after their
outfit and select for them everything needed, not only for the journey,
but for their requirements during the year of their stay in the country.
So they were here furnished with what was called the yearly supplies,
as York Factory is the best place, keeping as it does large reserve
supplies for all the interior trading posts.  The English boots were
discarded for moccasins; fringed leggings manufactured out of well-
tanned skins and various other articles of apparel more suitable to the
wild country were obtained.

Two good Hudson Bay blankets were purchased for each boy, and, as they
had come to rough it, it was thought best to give them no tent, but each
one had in his outfit a large piece of oiled canvas in case of a fierce
rainstorm assailing them.  They were given the usual rations of food,
with tea and sugar for so many days, and each lad was furnished with a
copper kettle, a tin cup, a tin plate, a knife, fork, and spoon.  As
luxuries they furnished themselves with towels, soap, brush, and comb.
In addition to these supplies for this first trip there were sent up all
that would be needed during the long months that they were to spend in
the country.  The boys were specially anxious that the supply of
ammunition should be most liberal.

For weapons they each had a good double-barrelled breech-loading gun--
then just beginning to come into use--which had been carefully selected
for them ere they left home.  In addition they each had a first-class
sheath knife with hilt, good for close hand-to-hand encounter with
animals, and also useful in skinning the game when killed or in cutting
kindling wood for a fire.  A first-class knife is an indispensable
requisite for a hunter in the North-west.  Indeed, there is a saying in
that country, "Give an Indian a knife and a string, and he will make his
living and his way anywhere."

A brigade in the Hudson Bay service consisted of from four to twenty
boats; each boat was supposed to carry from eighty to a hundred pieces
of goods or bales of fur in addition to the supplies for the men.  They
were made out of spruce or balsam, and were like large skiffs, sharp at
both ends.

They were manned by nine men.  The man in charge was called the
steersman; standing in the sharp angle of the stern, he steered the boat
either by a rudder or a long oar, which he handled with great skill.
The other eight men rowed the boat along with great oars, in the use of
which they were very clever.  Each boat was provided with a small mast
and a large square sail.  When there was no favourable wind the mast was
unstepped and lashed on the outside of the boat under the rowlocks.
Often for days together only the oars were used.  This was specially the
case in river routes.  However, in the great lakes whenever there was
any possibility of sailing the mast was stepped, the sail hoisted, and
the weary toilers at the oars had a welcome rest; and often did they
need it, for the work was most slavish and exhausting.

In each brigade there was a boss who had control of all the boats.  He
gave the word when to start in the morning and when to camp at night.
His word was absolute in all matters of dispute.  He had the privilege
of selecting the best boat in the brigade, and was supposed to always be
at the front when dangerous rapids had to be run, or death in any form
had to be faced; in storm or hurricane his boat had to be the first to
face the trying ordeal, and his hand to be on the helm.  Only the well-
tried old steersman of many years' experience could hope to reach to
this position, and when once it was obtained unceasing vigilance was the
price paid for the retention of the post.  One mistake in running the
rapids, or a single neglect to detect the coming of the storm in time to
get to shore and the furs securely covered over with the heavy
tarpaulins, with which each boat was supplied, was quite sufficient to
cause him to lose the much coveted position.  About the only liberty
taken with him was, if possible, when the boats were crossing a great
lake, with each big sail set, to try if possible by superior management
of the boat to get to the distant shore ahead of him.

The start was made about three o'clock in the afternoon, as is the
general custom of these brigades of boats; the idea being only to go a
few miles for the first day and thus find out if everything is in
thorough working order, and that nothing has been forgotten.

The camp was made on the bank of the river where dry wood was abundant,
and where there was some sheltered cove or harbour in which the boats
could safely be secured in case of violent storms coming up in the
night, which was not an infrequent occurrence.

Big Tom appointed one of the Indian oarsmen to look after the boys.  His
duties were to cook their meals and select for their beds as smooth and
soft a place as was possible to find on the granite rocks; or, if it
happened to be in a soft and swampy place where the boats stopped for
the night, he was expected to forage round and find some dry old grass
in the used-up beaver meadows, or to cut down some balsam boughs on
which the oilcloth would be spread, and then their blanket beds would be
made.  These boughs of the balsam or spruce, when broken up, make a
capital bed.  The boys, after a few nights' experiment with various
kinds of beds, became so much attached to those made of the spruce or
balsam that, unless very weary with some exciting sport during the day,
they generally took upon themselves the work of securing them at each
night's camping place.

Tables were considered unnecessary luxuries.  The dishes were arranged
on a smooth rock if one was to be found.  The food was served up by the
Indian attendant, and the three boys and Big Tom sat down and enjoyed
the plain but hearty meal.  It is generally the custom for the commodore
of the brigade to take his meals with any travellers he may have in
charge.  When they have dined, the Indian servant or attendant then sits
down and has his meal.  After supper the Indians who have more quickly
prepared and eaten their suppers, as they waste but little time in
details, gather round the splendid camp fire, and for an hour or so
engage in pleasant chat; and while having their evening smoke they show
to each other their various purchases secured at York Factory.  At this
post they are allowed to take up in goods half of their wages for their
services, and carry them along with them in their boats.

After a final visit was made by the different steersmen to their boats
to see that everything was snug and tight, and a consultation with Big
Tom as to the likelihood or not of a storm coming up, they all gathered
round the camp fire for evening prayers.  Big Tom took charge of the
evening service.  He first read from his Indian Testament, translated
into his own language and printed in the clear, beautiful syllabic
characters invented by one of the early missionaries.  After the
Scriptures were read Martin Papanekis, a sweet singer, led the company
in singing in their own language a beautiful translation of the "Evening
Hymn."  When this was sung they all reverently bowed while Big Tom
offered up an appropriate prayer.

Very sweetly sounded the voices of these Christian Indians as here amid
nature's solitudes arose from their lips and hearts the voice of prayer
and praise.  The effect on the boys was not only startling but helpful.
In their minds there had been associated very little of genuine
Christianity with the Indians, but just the reverse.  They expected to
meet them with tomahawks and scalping knives, but not with Bibles and
hymn books; they expected to hear war-whoops, but not the voice of
Christian song and earnest prayer.

As the boys lay that night in their blanket beds on the rocks they could
not but talk of the evening prayers, and perhaps that simple but
impressive service did more to bring vividly and helpfully before them
the memories of their happy Christian homes far away than anything else
that had occurred since they left them.

Three Boys in the Wild North Land--by Egerton Ryerson Young



CHAPTER FOUR.

THE EARLY CALL--THE PICTURESQUE ROUTE--THE TOILSOME PORTAGES--RIVAL
BRIGADES--FIRST BEAR--ALEC'S SUCCESSFUL SHOT.

So excited were the boys with their strange romantic surroundings that
the first night they lay down in their beds, thus prepared not far from
the camp fire on the rocks, they could hardly sleep.  It was indeed a
new experience to be able to look up and see the stars shining in the
heavens above them.  Then, when they looked around, on one side they saw
the Indians reclining there in picturesque attitudes, smoking their
pipes and engaged in quiet talk.  When they turned and looked on the
other side there was the dense dark forest peopled in their young
imaginations with all sorts of creatures, from the fierce wolf and
savage bear to the noisy "whisky jack," a pert, saucy bird, about the
size and colour of a turtle dove, that haunts the camp fires and with
any amount of assurance helps himself to pemmican and other articles of
food, if a bag is left open or the provisions exposed to his keen eye.
Still sounding in their ears were his strange, querulous notes, forming
not half so sweet a lullaby as the music of the waves that beat and
broke a few yards from where they lay.

But "tired nature's sweet restorer, balmy sleep," came after a time, and
in dreamless slumber soon were they wrapped, nor did they stir until
early next morning.  They were aroused by the musical voice of Big Tom,
from which rang out the boatman's well-known call:

"Leve, Leve, Leve!"

This is not Indian, but French, and has been taken by the Indians from
the early French voyageurs, who long years before this used to traverse
many parts of these wild regions to trade with the Indians.  Quite a
number of names still remain in the country as relics of these hardy
early French explorers.

This ringing call met with a prompt response from all.  No one dared to
remain for another nap.  At once all was hurry and activity.  The fires
were quickly rekindled, copper tea-kettles were speedily filled and
boiled, a hasty breakfast eaten, prayers offered, and then "All aboard!"
is the cry of Big Tom.  The kettles, blankets, and all the other things
used are hastily stowed away, and the journey is resumed.

If the wind is fair the sail is hoisted and merrily they travel on.  If
not, the heavy oars were brought out, and as they rose and fell in
unison the boats were propelled on at the rate of about six miles an
hour.  Three or four times a day did they go ashore, boil the kettles,
and have a meal, for the air of that land is bracing and the appetites
are always good.

The route used for so many years by the Hudson Bay Company to transport
their goods into the interior from York Factory is utterly unfit for
navigation, as we understand that word, as the rivers are full of wild,
dangerous rapids and falls.  Some of these rapids can be run at all
times during the summer, others only when the water is high.  Many of
them are utterly impassable at any time.  The result is that numerous
portages have to be made.  As the making of a portage was exceedingly
interesting to our boys, we will here describe one.

The boats were rowed up against the current as far as possible and then
headed for the shore.  Here at the landing place they were brought in
close to the rocks and every piece of cargo was taken out.  These pieces
were put on the men's shoulders, one piece being fastened at both sides
by a carrying strap, which in the middle is drawn across the forehead.
Then, using the first piece thus fastened, one or two more pieces are
piled upon it and the Indian starts with this heavy load along the rough
and rocky trail to the end of the portage.  This end is the place beyond
the rapids where safe navigation again commences.  In quick succession
the men are thus loaded until all the cargoes are thus transported from
one side to the other.

The boys were very eager to help.  So they quickly loaded themselves
with their guns and blankets, and, striking out into the trail along
which they saw the Indians were hurrying, they bravely endeavoured to
keep those in sight who had started just before them.  To their great
surprise they found this to be an utter impossibility.  The swinging jog
trot of an Indian does not seem to be a very rapid pace, but the white
man unaccustomed to it finds out very quickly that it takes long
practice for him to equal it.  At first the boys thought that it was
because they had loaded themselves too heavily, and so they quite
willingly took a rest on the way; dropping their blankets and guns, and
sitting down on a rock beside the trail, they watched with admiration
the Indians in single file speeding along with their heavy loads.  Many
of these men can carry on each trip three pieces, that is a load of from
two hundred and forty to three hundred pounds.

As Ayetum, the Indian who had charge of the white boys' cooking
arrangements, was passing them as they sat there in the portage he said,
in broken English:

"White boys leave guns and blankets, Ayetum come for them soon."

This was quite agreeable to the tired lads, and so they started up
again, Frank saying as they did so:

"Now we will show them that we can keep up to them."  Gallantly they
struck out, but to a white boy running over an Indian trail where rocks
and fallen trees and various other obstructions abound is a very
different thing from a smooth road in a civilised land.  For a time they
did well, but when hurrying along on a narrow ledge of rock an unnoticed
creeping root tripped up and sent Sam flying over the side of a steep
place, where he went floundering down twenty or thirty feet among the
bracken and underbrush.  Fortunately he was not much hurt, but he needed
the assistance of two Indians to get him up again.

Thus rapidly passed the days as the brigade hurried on.  Not an hour was
wasted.  It was necessary to move on as quickly as possible, as not
twenty-four hours would elapse ere the next brigade would be dispatched
from York Factory, and not only would it be a great disgrace to be
overtaken, but the rivalry and strife of the boats' crews in the
portages, in their efforts to see which could get their cargoes over
first, would be most intense; and sometimes there is bad blood and
quarrelling, especially if the brigades happen to be of rival tribes.

Hence it was ever the plan of the great company that employed them all
to keep them at least a day or two apart on these adventurous and
exciting journeys.  To Big Tom and his men had been given the post of
honour, and it was well-known that such was his skill as a leader, and
so well was he backed up by his well-trained, stalwart men, that unless
some great accident happened, no brigade following would have any chance
of catching up to him ere his journey was finished.

One day when passing through a lakelike expanse of the river they saw a
large black bear swimming as fast as he could directly ahead of them.
At length a cry was raised, "A bear! a bear!"  The men bent to their
oars and there was an exciting chase.

Fortunately for the pursuers, it was a wide open space and the bear was
far out from land.  Even in these heavy boats the men can row faster
than a bear can swim.  Knowing well the habits of the bear, the men's
first efforts were to cut him off from the mainland, and thus oblige him
to swim for one of the many islands which could be seen on ahead.  If
they could succeed in this, of course he would have a poor chance, as
the boats would speedily surround him there.  Bears know that they are
not safe on islands when hunted, and so cunningly endeavour to keep from
them; or, if so unfortunate as to be obliged to take refuge on one when
closely pursued, they do not seem able to keep quiet and try to lie
hidden and unseen, but just as soon as possible they make the attempt to
reach the mainland, and there hide themselves away from their pursuers
in the dense forest or underbrush.  This peculiarity of the bear is
well-known to the Indian hunters; so in this case the first object of
the men, as they would hardly be able to get near enough to this big
fellow to shoot him in the water, was to head him off from the mainland
and thus force him on an island.  In this they succeeded, as they
anticipated.

Frank, Alec, and Sam were, of course, intensely excited as the chase
advanced.  In their Zoological Gardens they had often seen and watched
various species of bears.  There, however, they were in captivity and
could do no harm.  Here, however, away ahead of them like a great
Newfoundland dog, was this big, fierce fellow, wild and free, making the
race of his life, to escape from his relentless pursuers.

At first he struck out for the mainland, and made the most desperate
efforts to reach the shore; but when at length he saw one of the boats
surely crawling along so that it would soon be between him and the point
of land toward which he was swimming, he accepted the situation and
struck off for a large island that seemed to be densely covered with
trees and underbrush.

Nearer and nearer came the boats, propelled so vigorously by the
muscular, excited men, whose great oars rose and fell with all the
precision of clockwork, as they saw they were sure of gaining on their
prey.

As Big Tom's boat was at the front, he said to the excited boys, who
could hardly restrain themselves:

"You boys want to shoot him?"

Of course they did.  What boy under similar circumstances would not have
given almost anything for a shot at a bear in a position like this?

So the guns were quickly loaded, and under Tom's direction the boys were
given a position one after another in the stern of the boat.  Grandly
did the men row so as to bring the bear within range ere the island
should be reached.  When the bear was about two hundred feet from shore
Tom, who had had some difficulty in restraining the boys from firing,
now ordered the men to cease rowing, and, as had been arranged with the
boys, he gave the word to Sam to fire.  Quickly rang out the report of
his gun.

"Did you hit him?" said Big Tom.

"I think I did," was Sam's odd reply; "for see, he is swimming faster
than he did before I fired."

This quaint answer was met by shouts of laughter from all who understood
its comical meaning.

"Now, Frank, it is your turn," said Big Tom.

Carefully aiming for his head--and really there was not much of it to be
seen, for a bear swims low in the water--Frank fired, and a howl and a
vigorous shaking of the head told that he had been hit somewhere, but
not enough to stop his progress.  The boat, under the momentum it had
received from the oars, was still moving on about as fast as the bear
was able to swim.

"Now, Alec," said Big Tom, as the lad took his position in the stern of
the boat, "when he tries to run through the shallow water near those
rocks, your turn comes.  Hit him behind the shoulder, good young
Scotchman."

At the kindly mention of his nationality the blood of Alec suddenly
rose, and he felt his hand grip that gun and his eye strangely brighten,
and he resolved if possible he would make the shot of his life.
Steadying himself, he waited until the bear was exactly in the place and
position mentioned by the experienced old hunter, who stood just behind
him.  Then he fired.  As the report rang out there was also heard a dull
thud, that told that somewhere the fierce brute had been struck, but to
Alec's mortification he gave some desperate bounds and finally reached
the shore.  There among the rocks he suddenly dropped as in a heap.  A
few seconds after, some of the Indians jumped overboard and cautiously
waded toward him through the shallow water.  Their caution, however, was
altogether unnecessary.  Alec's bullet had done its work, and the bear
was stone dead.  The Indians found, when cutting up the body, that the
ball had gone completely through him.  The wonder was that the great
brute had been able to move at all after being so struck.  The bears
have an immense amount of vitality, as hunters who shoot them often find
out to their own cost.  So here was the first bear killed; Alec was the
hero of the hour.  While modestly he received the congratulations, he
naturally felt very proud over the accuracy of the shot that had brought
down a great black bear.

Speedily did some of the Indian hunters get out their knives and begin
skinning the great animal.  While doing this they made a discovery that
very much pleased Frank, and that was that his bullet had gone clean
through the ear of the bear, and had thus caused his howls and the angry
shakings of his head which had been observed by all after Frank had
fired.  As a bear's ear is very small, Frank's shot was an exceedingly
good one, when we take into consideration that he fired from a moving
boat at such a small object as the bear's head.

"First blood, anyway, for Frank," said Alec.

So it had turned out to be, although Alec's had been the shot that had
brought down the game.

The beautiful black robe and the meat were soon carried by the stalwart
men to the boats, and the journey was resumed.  That evening at the camp
fire all had abundance of bear's meat for their supper.  It was very
much enjoyed by all, as the meat of these animals is good, tasting
something like young pork, with a gamey flavour.

Three Boys in the Wild North Land--by Egerton Ryerson Young



CHAPTER FIVE.

ROBINSON'S PORTAGE--GUNPOWDER TRANSPORTATION--HOLE IN THE KEG--THE
FRIGHTFUL EXPLOSION--ENSCONCED AT HEADQUARTERS--DELIGHTFUL HOME IN THE
WILDERNESS--STURGEON FISHING--INVOLUNTARY PLUNGES.

At Robinson's Portage there occurred a startling accident of a most
unique character.  It caused much consternation both among the boys and
the Indians.

In one of the boats, which was most carefully guarded, were quite a
number of barrels of gunpowder for the different trading posts.  Large
quantities of this dangerous material are required for the Indians all
over the country.  The company is very particular in its transportation,
and only the most experienced men are allowed to have charge of the
powder boat.

When the brigade reached Robinson's Portage, which is a long one, some
men who had charge of the powder carefully rolled or dragged the barrels
across the portage, which has over its whole length a fairly good forest
road.  The rest of the men, with their carrying straps, conveyed, as
usual, the many "pieces," and piled them close to the landing stage.
Three boatloads of supplies, as well as the cargo of gunpowder, had been
taken across and piled up ready for reshipment.  Before bringing over
the other cargoes and dragging the great boats, which were as usual to
be dragged overland by the united strength of all the men, it was
resolved to have dinner at the end of the portage where they had landed,
and then go on with their work.  Wood was gathered and a fire was
kindled and dinner was prepared.

While the men were dining it was noticed that the fire had increased,
and had at length reached in the dry grass the place where the powder
kegs had been placed when they had been taken out of the boats, and from
which spot they had been carried to the other end of the portage.  Soon
the Indians and boys were interested in seeing a fuselike running of
fire spluttering and flashing on the trail.  On and on along the road it
sped, until at length it disappeared over the hill leading to the other
end of the portage, where the barrels of powder and bales of goods were
now piled.  For a moment or two the men continued their dinners; then
suddenly there was a report so loud and so deafening that those who were
standing were nearly thrown to the ground, and all were so shaken that
it seemed as though a small earthquake had occurred.

In an instant the cause was well surmised, and away they hurried as
rapidly as possible to the other end of the portage.  A strange sight,
indeed, met their gaze.  Some of the trees were badly shattered, and the
parts of those left standing, instead of being covered with green
foliage, were well decorated with coloured calicoes and ribbons,
tattered blankets, men's clothing, and many other things.  The well
piled up bundles and pieces had disappeared, and the contents seemed to
be anywhere within the radius of half a mile.  A large quantity had been
blown out into the river, and had gone floating down the stream.

Where stood the piles of powder kegs was an excavation in the ground,
but, alas! no powder was left.  All had gone to cause that great
explosion that had borne such a near approach to an earthquake.  Of
course, Big Tom and his men were a humiliated lot, as there is a great
deal of ambition among these hardy boatmen to deliver their cargoes in
as good condition to the Hudson Bay Company's officials as possible.
But here was a disaster.  Three boatloads of supplies, as well as a
cargo of gunpowder, were simply annihilated, or nearly so.

Quickly did they set to work to secure what was in the water, but it was
of little value.  Some of the most adventurous climbed the high trees
and managed to pull off a few of the garments there securely lodged, but
much was beyond their reach, and for several years the articles
fluttered in the winds of winter and of summer, and vividly reminded all
who passed over that portage of that singular disaster.

And how had it come about?

This was easily found out.  One of the powder barrels had a little
unnoticed hole in it, and from this had silted out a tiny little stream
of powder all along the whole length of the portage.  When the fire was
kindled at the other end, where the dinner was cooked, it touched the
beginning of this strangely laid fuse, which in running along had so
interested those who had seen it at the beginning, but who had had no
idea of there being any danger in it or of the damage it would inflict
upon the supplies.

"Well," said Big Tom, in his quiet way, "I am sorry for John Company to
lose so much property; but he is rich, and it will not hurt him.  I am
glad we did not do as is our general way--come over here and have our
dinner near our loads.  If we had done so perhaps some of our arms or
legs might be now hanging up there in the branches where those red
calicoes and other things are."

So, while all regretted the great misfortune, they were very thankful
that there had been no loss of life or anybody even wounded.  With a
will they set to work, and soon the other cargoes were carried over, and
then the boats were dragged across by the united crews.  Soon were they
launched and loaded, some with only half cargoes on account of the
disaster, and then the journey was resumed.

How Big Tom explained the story of the explosion to the Hudson Bay
officials, and what were their answers, we know not; suffice to say, Big
Tom was very glum for some time after, and was not anxious to have many
questions put to him in reference to the interview.

To the residence of Mr Ross the boys were escorted by a party of Hudson
Bay clerks, after they had dined at Norway House.  All their outfits,
which fortunately, like their owners, had escaped the explosion, were
brought over a few hours later by some of the servants of the company.

Of the hearty welcome which the boys received from Mr Ross and his
family at Sagasta-weekee we have already made mention.

During the evening the chief factor and some of the other officials of
the fort, who had had advices of the coming of our three young
gentlemen, Frank, Alec, and Sam, came over to meet them.  They most
cordially welcomed them to the country, stating at the same time that
they had received, by way of Montreal and Fort Garry, advance letters in
reference to them, and would gladly carry out the instructions received,
and do all they could to make the year's sojourn in the country as
pleasant and interesting as possible.

This was good news to the boys, and was especially welcome to Mr Ross,
who, now that he was no longer actively in the employ of the company,
was a little nervous about the reception which would be accorded to
these young hunters, who in this way had come into the country.

Strange as it may now appear, yet it is a well-known fact that persons
coming into these territories were not welcome unless they came on the
invitation and kept themselves completely under the company's direction
and guidance.  However, the old despotic rules were being relaxed, and
especially was it so in the case of our boys, as thoughtful friends at
home, who had influence with the London directors, had so arranged
matters that everything was most favourable for their having a
delightful time.  That they had it these pages will surely testify.

As we have stated, very cordially were they received and welcomed by Mr
Ross, whose home was on the mighty Nelson River, a few miles away from
Norway House Fort.  This great establishment of the Hudson Bay Company
was for a great many years the great distributing centre for the
supplies sent out from England to the many smaller posts throughout the
country.  The houses were very substantially built of hewn logs, boarded
over and painted white.  They occupied the four sides of a hollow
square, room only being left for two or three massive gateways.  The
interior was kept during the summer months beautifully green, and was
the favourite resort of officials, employees, and servants, and white
and Indian visitors.

The relations between Mr Ross and the officials from this large
establishment were most cordial, and visits were frequently
interchanged.

The house which Mr Ross had built was as good as the material of the
country afforded.  The walls were of squared logs, the interstices
between them being made as nearly frost-tight as possible.  The outsides
were well boarded, and so was the interior.  As there is no limestone in
that part of the country, the partitions dividing the rooms were all
made of timber.

In the fall of the year, ere the ground freezes up, the house was banked
up to the lower edges of the windows.  Double sashes were placed in
every window.  As there is no coal in that part of the country, wood is
used altogether in its place.  Great iron stoves are used, in which
roaring fires are kept burning incessantly from October until May.  In
this genuine native house the three boys were cordially welcomed, and
soon felt themselves to be as members of the delightful family.

Shortly after their arrival, of course, there were many conversations as
to the various excursions that could be made, and the different hunting
expeditions that would be possible.  While they expected to have some
good times hunting the bears, beavers, wolves, reindeer, and other
animals that were within easy reaching distance of their present
headquarters, they were also ambitious enough to hope that they would
have time to reach the haunts of the buffalo on the great western
prairies, the musk ox in the far north, and even the grizzly bear in the
mountain ravines.

In the meantime they had much to interest and amuse themselves with in
studying the habits and customs of the Indians, who were constantly
coming to see Mr Ross, whom they found to be a universal favourite, and
the wise counsellor and adviser of all when in trouble or perplexity.
With the twelve or fifteen splendid dogs which were owned by their host
they soon became fast friends, and with them they had many a run, either
in the forests or along the shores of the great water stretches that
were near.  Each boy soon had his favourite dog, and naturally did all
he could to develop his intelligence and bring out all of his latent
sagacity.  While in a measure they succeeded in this, they also found,
in some instances, that in some dogs downright mischief and trickery
could be about as easily developed as the more noble qualities.

The canoes, of course, were tackled, and after a few laughable upsets
they all soon became experts in the use of them, and had many a glorious
trip and many an exciting adventure.  Often did they go in the company
of Mr Ross and with some experienced Indians to the place still
retaining the name of the Old Fort, although the buildings were
destroyed long ago.  There the accumulated waters of some scores of
rivers that pour into Lake Winnipeg rush out in one great volume to form
the mighty Nelson River.

Here in this picturesque region, rich in Indian legends, and the resort
of various kinds of game, and a favourite spot for the fishermen, many
happy days were spent by our young friends in fishing and hunting.
Then, when wearied with the varied sport, delightful hours were passed
away, as, gathered round the bright, blazing camp fires, they listened
to various reminiscences of the past as given by white or Indian.

These excursions often lasted for a number of days at a time.  The
party, which often consisted of from eight to a dozen persons, carried
with them in their canoes not only their guns and ammunition, but their
kettles and supplies and blankets.  When the day's hunting was ended the
supper was cooked at a fire made on the rocks, the principal item of
which was supposed to be some of the game shot or fish caught.

As the boys' dexterity in the use of the canoes increased, they became
more adventurous in their excursions, and one day they struck out, of
course in company with experienced Indians, from the Old Fort and went
as far as to the mouth of the great Saskatchewan River.  The long trip
across the north-west end of Lake Winnipeg was most exhilarating.  The
boys up to that time had no idea that birch canoes could ride in safety
such enormous waves, or be propelled along continuously with such
rapidity.

They camped on the shores of the great river, near the foot of the
rapids, which are the only ones to be found in it for a thousand miles.
Here they pitched their camp and lay down to sleep.  The music of the
rapids was a pleasant lullaby that soothed them into refreshing slumber.

Early the next morning they were visited by a number of friendly
Indians, who informed them that the sturgeon were very numerous in the
river at the foot of the rapids, and that excellent sport could be had
in killing some of them.

While the usual method of capturing the sturgeon is with large gill
nets, a more exciting way is by spearing them at the foot of the rapids,
where at times they gather in large numbers, or by shooting them as they
spring into the air.  To spear a large sturgeon from a birch canoe, and
not get an upset, is a difficult matter.  For a time the Indians alone
did the spearing; but after the boys had watched them at it they
imagined that it was not such a very difficult matter after all, and so
asked to be allowed to try for themselves.  The Indians at first
hesitated, as they well knew how really difficult it was, and thought
that the boys had better keep at the safer sport of trying to shoot
those that sprang, porpoise-like, out of the water.  This itself
afforded great amusement, and, while exciting, was not very successful,
as it is extremely difficult to strike a sturgeon in this way, so rapid
are its movements.

The boys had been fairly successful, and as the great fish, which were
from five to eight feet long, when shot, floated down the rapid current
some old Indian men and women, on the lookout in their canoes, were made
the richer and happier by being allowed to take possession of the
valuable fish as they came along.  This was the thought ever in the
minds of the boys, that, whenever possible, no matter what they caught
in the waters or shot in the forests, or elsewhere, if they could not
use it all themselves, to have it reach some old or feeble Indians, who
would be thankful for the gifts thus bestowed.  This conduct on the part
of the boys was most commendable, and everywhere secured them the good
will of the Indians, who are never jealous of those who, visiting their
lands for, sport and adventure, do not merely kill the animals for the
love of killing, but are also desirous that somebody may be benefited by
having for their use the fish or animals thus slaughtered.

As the boys were still anxious for an opportunity of trying their skill
in spearing, they at length induced the Indians to let them make the
attempt, even if they should not be very successful.

To be ready for any emergency, the cautious Indians arranged their
canoes so that if any accident should occur to these adventurous boys
they could prevent anything more serious than a good ducking taking
place.  In this method of capturing the sturgeon, the one using the
spear takes his position in the front of the canoe, while the other men
noiselessly paddle the boat against the current to the spot where
sturgeon are seen to be quietly resting or rooting in the gravelly
bottom of the shallow places in the current.

Alec was the first to make the attempt at this new and rather uncertain
sport.  In a good canoe manned by a couple of skilled Indians, he took
his position in the bow of the canoe, and with a good strong fishing
spear in his hands he steadied himself carefully in the cranky boat,
while the men silently paddled him to a spot where the occasional
appearance of part of a sturgeon above the water betrayed its presence.
The sun shining gloriously made the day delightful, but its very
brightness was the cause of Alec's discomfiture.

Nothing more quickly disturbs sturgeon than a sudden shadow thrown on
the water.  Alec, not knowing this, was being quietly paddled against
the current, thus facing toward the west.  As it was now about noon, the
bright sun was on his left.  In this position he ought only to have
attempted to spear the fish on the left side of his canoe, where he
would have thrown no shadow.  Ignorant of this, as soon as he observed a
large sturgeon not far ahead of him he quietly indicated by signs to the
canoemen which way he wished them to paddle, so as to bring him close
enough to spear the fish.  The men from their positions not being able
to see the sturgeon paddled as directed, and soon Alec was brought close
enough to make the attempt.  The sturgeon seemed to be an enormous one,
and so Alec, knowing that only a most desperate lunge would enable him
to drive the spear through the thick hide of the fish, which was just
now a little before him on the right, made the attempt with all the
strength that he could possibly muster.

But, alas, how different from what was expected!  As Alec threw himself
forward to plunge the sharp spear into the body of the fish, he found
that it met with no firmer substance than the water, and so, instead of
the spear being buried in the body of the fish, the momentum of his
great effort threw him out of the boat, and down he went head first into
the river.  Fortunately the water was not deep, and as the other canoes
were not far behind he was soon pulled into one of them, a bit
frightened, but none the worse for his involuntary plunge.

Nothing daunted, Sam was the next to volunteer to try his skill, and on
being informed that Alec's trouble was that he had raised his arm with
the spear so as to cast a shadow which had frightened the fish, he
resolved not to make a similar mistake.  Taking his position as directed
in the front of the canoe, his men paddled him where he would be able to
strike his fish without casting his shadow.  Soon the appearance of the
fins of a great sturgeon were seen, and noiselessly the Indians paddled
Sam's canoe close up to it.  He was resolved if possible to succeed
where Alec had signally failed.  When close enough to the large fish,
which seemed to be utterly unconscious of the canoe's presence, Sam,
taking the spear in both hands, plunged it well and true into the body
of the great sturgeon, that up to that instant seemed to have been sound
asleep.  However, there was a great awakening when it felt that spear
thrust.  Giving a great spring, so strong and sudden that it seemed to
fairly lift Sam, spear and all, out of the canoe, it started for the
great lake.  Sam let go of the spear when he found himself being dragged
over the side of the boat, but the Indians afterward declared that he
hung on for some time, and had a ride on the back of the great fish.

Like Alec had been before him, he was quickly picked up and dragged into
another canoe.

The Indians imagined that now that two of the boys had come to grief the
third would not wish to attempt this risky sport.  Those lads of ours
were not easily daunted, and so without any hesitancy Frank asked to be
allowed to see what he could do.  Frank had this advantage, that he had
observed what had caused Alec and Sam to fail in their attempts.  Arming
himself with a sharp spear, he took the position assigned to him, and
was paddled up to a place where the fish were numerous.  The spear that
he had selected, instead of being one of the three-pronged variety, was
more of a chisel shape, and exceedingly sharp.  With this in his hands,
he firmly braced himself in the narrow front of the canoe, while the now
intensely interested company watched his efforts.  Even Sam and Alec
refused to leave until Frank had made his attempt.  Some sturgeon were
observed very near, but Frank, even in the excitement of the moment, was
not to be diverted from his resolve, and so had the Indians paddle him
on and on until they brought him close to an enormous fellow, lying
quiet and still on the gravelly bottom.

With all his strength Frank struck him a blow, so quick and strong that
the first intimation of danger to the fish was the sharp spear crashing
through the strong bony scales, through flesh and vertebrae, into the
spinal cord, just behind the head.  So instantaneous was the death of
the great sturgeon under this fatal stroke that there was not even the
usual spasmodic spring.  Like as a log might have lain there on the
water, so did the great fish.  The only movement was, as is the case
with most large fish thus killed, he rolled over, and at once began to
float away on the current.

"Well done, Frank!" shouted the dripping boys, who had pluckily refused
to be taken ashore until Frank had made his attempt, in which he had so
well succeeded.  The Indians were delighted and, in their way, quite
demonstrative, and for long after, at many a camp fire, the story of
that strong, true, successful spear thrust had to be described and acted
out.

Thoroughly satisfied with these first adventures at sturgeon fishing,
the party went ashore, and at a large camp fire Alec and Sam dried their
garments as well as possible.  Changes, of course, they had not on such
an excursion.  However, they suffered but little inconvenience, and no
bad results followed from their submersions.

They spent another day or two at the mouth of the great Saskatchewan
River, and in the canoes of some of the experienced Indians, who there
reside, they several times ran the rapids.  This was wild and
exhilarating sport, and was vastly enjoyed by the boys.  During the
return trip nothing of very great importance occurred.  They shot a
number of wild ducks from the canoes as they paddled along, and in due
time reached Sagasta-weekee tired and bronzed, and full of the
adventures of their first outing from the home of their kind host.



CHAPTER SIX.

INDIAN IMPLEMENTS--CANOEING EXCURSION--GUNPOWDER VERSUS JACK FISH--LOON
SHOOTING--SAM'S SUCCESSFUL SHOT.

The Indians were originally very skillful in the manufacture of the few
essential articles that were absolutely necessary for their use.  The
style and curves of their graceful canoes, although only made of the
bark of the birch tree and strengthened by supple bands of cedar or
balsam, and made watertight by the gum of the pine or other resinous
trees, have never been improved in any boat builder's yard in
civilisation.  True, fancy canoes are being turned out for the pleasure
and enjoyment of canoeists in safe waters, but whenever the experiment
has been tried of using these canoes in the dangerous rivers of the
Indian country they are not found to be at all equal to those
manufactured by the natives.  In the manufacture of their paddles, and
in the spring and lightness of their oars, they have never been
surpassed; and, while often imitated, many a skillful white artisan has
had to admit that after all his efforts there was a something of
completeness and exact fitness for the work required about the Indians'
production that he felt was in some way lacking in his own handiwork.

To the Indian women and clever old men were left the duties of making
the canoes.  Our boys were very much interested in watching them at the
work of canoe building, but naturally annoyed at the spasmodic way in
which they carried on their operations, as while perhaps for some days
they would work incessantly from early dawn to dark, they would then lay
off for days and do nothing but lounge around and smoke.

As the weeks rolled on, and the boys became more and more acquainted
with the natives, and acclimated and accustomed to the methods of
travel, a more ambitious trip for their pleasure was arranged by Mr
Ross.

It was decided to go to the Old Fort, and after shooting and fishing
there in the vicinity of the place previously visited, then to push on
to Spider Islands, and after a short stay in order to enjoy the beauties
of that romantic place, then to push on across the north-eastern part of
the great Lake Winnipeg to Montreal Point, and there to hunt along the
coast as far south as Poplar Point, if the sport were good and the
necessary supplies of ammunition and other essentials held out.  The
boys were wild with delight at the prospect, and were anxious to do all
in their power to expedite the undertaking.

The Indians of all these regions, in which our boys were hunting, do not
now give much prominence to the old picturesque style of dress, with
which we have all been so familiar.  Feathers and paints are with them
now quite out of date; still their coats, pants, leggings, and moccasins
are principally made of the beautifully tanned skins of the moose and
reindeer, and handsomely ornamented with bead work, at which the Cree
women are most skillful.  Of course Frank, Alec, and Sam were speedily
fitted out in the dress of the country, and were quite proud of their
appearance.  They were also very anxious to have the natives give them
Indian names, as is quite customary.  The Indians, however, after some
councilling, in which a large quantity of tobacco was smoked, decided
that as the boys were to remain some time in the country they had better
wait for the development of some strong peculiarities in them, or until
some great event occurred that would suggest some expressive name.
While disappointed with this decision of the council, the boys had to
rest content.

At first they found the use of the soft, pliable moccasin very strange,
after the heavy boots of civilisation, and for a little while complained
of a soreness in the soles of their feet.  These, however, soon
hardened, and then they much preferred the soft Indian shoes to all
others.

On the contemplated trip Mr Ross decided that, in addition to some
younger Indians, he would take with him two old, experienced men, who
were perhaps the most famous hunters of their tribe.  One of these was
our old friend, Big Tom; the other was called Mustagan.  He was almost
as large as Big Tom, and had a wonderful record.  We shall hear much
about him as these pages advance, and will be delighted to have him with
us in many an exciting hour.

Three canoes were employed on this excursion.  Mr Ross had Mustagan,
another Indian, and one of the boys with him; while the other two
canoes, which were not quite so large as Mr Ross's, had in each two
Indians to paddle them, and one of the boys.  So when the party started
it consisted of ten persons.  Everyone was well supplied with guns and
ammunition.  The guns used were the muzzle-loaders of the country, as
after some experiments with the breech-loaders there was found to be a
good deal of difficulty in reference to the supplies of cartridges.  The
usual camping outfit and supplies for a month's outing were taken along
with them.

While passing through Play Green Lake, they amused themselves one day by
catching some very large jack fish, or pike, in the usual way.  It seems
very surprising that the mere concussion of the air caused by the firing
of blank charges of gunpowder could so stun or paralyse such enormous
fish.

As they journeyed on, a quiet "Hush!" from Mustagan caused them to look
toward the shore, and there, not far up from the sandy beach, were to be
seen four beautiful young deer.  As Mr Ross was anxious to get on, and
nothing specially was to be gained by hunting these beautiful young
creatures, they were not even disturbed or frightened.  The boys watched
them for some time, and were delighted with their graceful movements as
like young lambs they gambolled on the shore.  Genuine sport is not
butchery of inoffensive creatures that cannot be utilised for the
benefit of parties shooting them.

They had some rare sport in trying to shoot the great northern diver,
called in this country the loon.  It is a bird as large and heavy as the
wild goose.  Its feathers are so thick and close that they easily turn
aside ordinary shot.  Its bill is long and sharp, and with it in battle
can inflict a most ugly wound.  The feathers on its breast are of snowy
whiteness, while on the rest of the body they are of a dark brown colour
approaching to black flecked with white.  Its peculiar legs are wide and
thin; its webbed feet are so large that it can swim with amazing
rapidity.  On land it is a very awkward and ungainly bird, and can
hardly move along; but in the water it is a thing of beauty, and as a
diving bird it has, perhaps, no equal.  It has a strange mournful cry,
and seems to utter its melancholy notes more frequently before an
approaching storm than at any other time.  The Indians, who are most
excellent judges of the weather and quick to notice any change, have
great confidence in the varied cries of the loon.  It is a marvellous
diver, and is able to swim great distances under the water with amazing
rapidity, only coming up, when pursued, for an instant, at long
intervals to breathe.

The loon is very hard to kill.  A chance long-distance bullet or a shot
in the eye does occasionally knock one over, but as a general thing the
Indians, none too well supplied with ammunition, let them alone, as when
shot they are of but little worth.  Their flesh is tough and tasteless,
and the only thing at all prized is the beautiful skin, out of which the
Indian women manufacture some very picturesque fire-bags.

As several of these loons were seen swimming in Play Green Lake as our
party paddled along, Mr Ross decided to give the boys a chance to show
their skill and quickness in firing at them, although he hardly imagined
any of them would be struck.  The sportsman who would strike them must
have an alert eye and quick aim to fire the instant they are up, as they
are down again so suddenly, only to reappear again some hundreds of
yards off in the most unexpected place.

The three canoes were paddled to positions about a third of a mile
apart, like as at the points of an equilateral triangle.  In this large
space thus inclosed several loons were surrounded, and the work of
trying to shoot them began.  Before beginning to fire, the boys had been
warned never under any circumstance to pull a trigger if one of the
other boats should be in line, no matter how distant.  Bullets even from
an ordinary shotgun will sometimes so bound over the waves as to go an
immense distance, and very serious injuries have resulted.  As has been
stated, it is almost impossible to kill a loon even when struck with
ordinary shot, so it was decided here to use either buckshot or bullets
as the hunters preferred.

Part of the fun of loon hunting is in the absolute uncertainty as to the
spot where the bird, after diving, will next show itself.  It may appear
a quarter of a mile away, or it may suddenly push up its bright head and
look at you out of its brilliant eyes not five yards from the side of
your canoe.  It has, when hunted, a certain dogged stubbornness against
leaving the vicinity it was in when first assailed, and will remain in a
small area, even of a large lake, although repeatedly fired at.

Hardly had the canoe in which were Mr Ross and Frank with their two
canoemen taken its position, when a beautiful loon rose up about a
hundred yards away, and not having been frightened, as no gun had as yet
been fired, he sat there in all his beauty on the water watching them.

"Fire at him," said Mr Ross to Frank.

No sooner said than done, and away sped the bullet well and true on its
errand, and fairly and squarely hit the water exactly where the bird had
been, but no bird was there.  Quicker than could that bullet speed
across those hundred yards the bird had dived, and ere Frank could
recover from his chagrin its brilliant eyes were looking at him from a
spot not twenty yards away.  The loon had been facing the canoe when
fired at, and in diving had come on in a straight line toward them, and
now here he was, so close to them and looking so intently that he seemed
to say by his appearance, "I've come to see what all that noise was
about."

So sudden was his appearance that no one in the canoe was ready for him,
and ere a gun could be pointed he was down again and, swimming directly
under the boat, rose again on the other side, more than a hundred yards
away.  While this had been Frank's experience, the others had not been
idle.  As was quite natural, there was a good deal of good-natured
rivalry among them, as to which canoe would come, the honour of killing
the first loon.  Mustagan, who had charge of one of these canoes, was an
old hand at this work, and, as he was a keen hunter, had caught this
spirit of rivalry that had arisen.  He determined to put his long
experience with these birds against their cleverness, and it was
interesting to watch the contest between him and them.  For a time his
efforts met with complete failure, and the birds fairly outwitted him.

Mustagan, however, was not discouraged, and he resolved on one more
effort to succeed.  He had learned from observation that the loon with
its marvellously brilliant eye seemed to be able to see the flash of the
gun, and so quick were its movements that it could dive ere the bullets
or other missiles reached it.  Acting on this knowledge, he rigged up in
the canoe a kind of a barrier behind which Sam was seated, concealed
from the sharp-sighted bird.  For a time they were not able to get a
successful shot, although a great deal of ammunition was expended.

Alec, with Big Tom and his other Indian canoeman, was equally
unsuccessful.  The loons themselves seemed to have entered into the
spirit of the thing, and kept bobbing up here and there, at most
unexpected places, taking good care, however, that each time the bullets
struck the spot where they were, they were somewhere else when it
arrived.  It was at first strange to the boys that the bullets did not
follow them in the water, but went bounding off and skipping over the
surface often for great distances.

At length, when Mr Ross began to fear that the ammunition had suffered
enough, and the boys had had sufficient of this kind of shooting, which,
after all, was a most capital drill at quick firing, and was about to
stop the sport, Mustagan pleaded for time to try one more experiment.
He had been watching the movements of a splendid loon, that had saucily
and successfully challenged the guns from each boat in succession for
quite a time.  Mustagan's quick eye noticed that the bird was not quite
so vigilant as he had been, and resolved that he could be shot, and that
Sam should have that honour.  Strange as it may seem to those who have
not had the fun of trying to shoot loons, these birds get to know that
the hunters they are to watch are those who handle the guns.  Knowing
this, Mustagan had Sam well load his gun with buckshot and slugs.
Swinging the canoe so that Sam would be completely hid by the barrier
prepared, he with his gun rose up in a conspicuous manner flourishing
his weapon, and thus kept the eyes of the bird on himself every time he
arose.  This went on for some minutes, until at length, as Mustagan did
not fire, although brandishing his gun about, the loon seemed to lose
his caution, and remained up longer each time he came to the surface.

This was what the wily old Indian was expecting, and so, speaking to
Sam, he told him to be on the watch and soon he would have a successful
shot.  Sam, however, had to wait for quite a time, so erratic were the
loon's movements, and in such unexpected places did he suddenly come up.
However, success generally comes to those who have patience long enough
to wait, and so it was in this case.  The fortunate opportunity came at
last, for there right in front of the canoe not fifty yards away rose up
that beautiful bird, and the same instant from the unseen gun and lad,
behind that little barrier, rang out the report which followed the fatal
missiles that had done their work, for one of them had cut clean through
the neck of the loon, severing the vertebrae, and there he lay in the
water with the snowy-white breast uppermost.

A rousing cheer told of the successful shot, and at once when the bird
was secured the canoes were headed for the shore.  There a dinner was
quickly prepared, and in glorious picnic style it was enjoyed by all.
The loon was skinned by one of the Indian men, and subsequently was
tanned in native fashion, and a beautiful fire-bag was made from it of
which in after years Sam was very proud.

Three Boys in the Wild North Land, by Egerton R.  Young



CHAPTER SEVEN.

THE OLD FORT CAMP--SAM'S RACE WITH THE BEAR--INDIAN COMMENTS.

As the day was now advancing, and they had already had so much sport,
they decided not to try and reach the Old Fort on Lake Winnipeg, where
the Nelson River begins, that evening.  So they paddled their canoes to
the ashore and there formed a camp.  While the older members of the
party remained at the fire, some of the younger and more eager ones took
their guns and went off to see what they could shoot.

Frank succeeded in bringing down a great pelican that, with some others,
had been gorging itself with gold-eyes, a beautiful kind of fish,
similar in appearance to large herring, but with eyes so bright and
golden that the appropriateness of the name is at once evident to all
the first time they see it.  Frank carried to the camp his great bird,
but was disappointed when told that as an article of food it was about
worthless.  One of the Indians, however, pleased him when he said that a
very beautiful ornamental bag could be made of the great sac that hung
down from its enormous bill.

Alec was more successful, and returned soon after Frank with a number of
fine ducks, which he carried hanging around him with their heads crowded
under his belt in real Indian fashion.

The different Indians, who had also gone off hunting, returned one after
another, and so when supper was ready at the camp fire about sunset all
were returned but Sam.

Where was he?  Who had seen him last?

These were the questions put, but no one seemed able to give any
satisfactory answer.

As it was supposed he would return any minute, the supper, which
consisted principally of the fish they had caught and game shot, was
eaten and much enjoyed.

Still no signs of Sam.  Mr Ross began to feel uneasy, and now, as the
shadows of the coming night were beginning to fall around them, he
called Mustagan and some of the older Indians to him, and asked what had
better be done.  Promptly they responded that he must be found ere the
last glimmering light faded away and the auroras began to dance and play
in the northern sky.

"Let us at once get on his trail," said an old Indian, "and we will soon
find him."

So the question was again anxiously asked who had last seen him.

But there was little need for an answer, as Sam, pale, excited, and
panting for breath, suddenly dashed into their midst.

"What is the matter?" said Mr Ross, while all the rest, with intense
interest, waited for his answer.

All poor Sam could say was, "The bear! the bear!" as he lay panting on
the ground.

Mustagan, quick to read signs, was the first to see what had happened,
and so, hastily catching up his gun, and crowding down the barrel a
bullet on the top of the buckshot, with which it was already loaded, he
slipped out from the circle of light around the camp fire, in the
direction from which Sam had come.

Not five minutes was he gone ere the report of his gun rang out.  With
all the imperturbable nature of an Indian he returned, and when within
easy calling distance of the camp fire he asked for a couple of Indians
to join him.  Quickly they glided away in the darkness.  It was not for
a long time, however, that they were required.  Soon their voices were
heard asking that additional wood might be thrown upon the fire in order
that they might have a better light.  Why they needed it was soon
evident, as they shortly afterward appeared dragging into the camp a
splendid bear, the sight of which at first made Sam jump again, as
though he would continue the journey he had so abruptly ended when he
had dashed into their midst.

When Sam had quieted down he told the story of his exciting adventure.

Like the others, he had taken his gun and gone off to see what he could
shoot.  As at first he did not meet with much success he pushed on and
on until he reached a long stretch of sandy beach, on which he detected
the fresh footprints of a bear.  Putting a bullet into his gun, he
bravely started off to get that bear.  On and on he hurried, reckless
and excited, until at length he saw the fine fellow, not two hundred
yards away, sitting on a flat rock a little way out from the shore,
busily engaged in capturing fish.

Without any fear Sam pushed on until he was, as he thought, near enough
to kill the bear that was sitting on his haunches with his back toward
him, utterly unconscious of his presence.

Raising his gun he fired.  That he hit him he was sure, as he said he
saw the fur fly from a spot on his back.  The instant the bear felt the
wound he gave a roar of pain, and, turning around, without a moment's
hesitation dashed into the water and came for Sam.

"All at once," said Sam in a most comical manner, "as I saw what a big
fellow he was and his resolve to try and cultivate a closer
acquaintanceship, I thought I had had hunting enough, and would like to
go home and see my mother.  But, as this was impossible, I decided that
the next best thing was to get back to the camp as soon as I could.  So
I dropped my gun and started at a great rate.  However it did not take
the bear long to get across that bit of water, and then on he came.

"My! but he did run, and quickly did he gain upon me.  Then I dropped my
brightly coloured beaded Indian cap, hoping that that would delay him.

"But he only seemed to give it a sniff and a tear, and then on he came.
Finding he was still gaining on me, I pulled off my leather coat and
dropped it on the trail and hurried on.  Glancing behind me, I noticed
that that seemed to make him suspicious for a time, as he carefully
examined it.  This delay was fortunate for me, but soon, to my alarm, I
found he was once more coming on after me.

"It was now getting dark, but fortunately I knew the way, and so dashed
in upon you in the manner I did, just about used up."

The recital of Sam's adventure and narrow escape very much excited Frank
and Alec, and Mr Ross looked grave and anxious, and seemed to be
thinking of what would have been felt and said in the home land if,
during the first few weeks after the boys had arrived in the Wild North
Land, one of them had been killed by a bear.

The Indians smoked their pipes and listened in silence to Sam's story,
which was translated for those who did not understand English.  It was
evident by their clouded faces that they were not pleased.  Their
actions said, even before they uttered a word:

"The young white brave should not have run away from a bear.  Suppose
that the bear had not been killed, and after chasing the white hunter
into the protection of the camp fire had escaped and gone and told the
other bears of his success, what a rejoicing there would have been among
the other bears!  And how bold and saucy all the bears would have been
ever after!"

Thus the Indians thought, for they have queer ideas about bears.
Because of the handlike appearance of the paws of the bear they say
there is a good deal of the human in them.  So they talk about them as
holding councils and taking advice one from another.  And when they
attack them, especially the Indians of these great Algonquin tribes,
they always address them as Mr Bear, and apologise to them for being
under the necessity of killing them.

Thus these Indians at this camp fire were simply disgusted with Sam for
running away from that black bear.

So after a good smoke and much cogitation one of them, who was a paddler
in Sam's canoe, turned to him and said:

"You have a good knife?"

"Yes," said Sam, and he drew the keen, sharp, double-edged weapon from
its sheath in his leather belt, and handed it to him to examine.

The Indian took it, and, after carefully examining it, passed it on to
the other Indians, who all admired it.  But it was noticed that in their
low utterances among themselves there was much of sarcasm, and even
contempt, in some of their expressions.

After some more smoking another Indian turned to Sam, and said:

"No tree along the trail where the bear chase you?"

"O yes," said Sam, "plenty of them.  But I was afraid to take time
enough to try and climb up into one of them."

This answer, which Sam gave in all honesty, was too much for the
Indians, and the look of disgust that passed over their faces was a
study.  However, the one who had asked the question about the tree spoke
up and said:

"No good climbing a tree.  Bear better climber than any hunter.  Tree
only good for you to fight bear at the bottom.  Put back against tree.
Black bear rise up and come to hug you to death.  He then never bite or
tear.  Only hug.  He try to squeeze the life out of you.  So with good
knife, and your back against a tree, keep cool.  Let bear come, and when
he stand up on his hind legs and try to hug, you just give him your good
knife straight in the heart.  Bear fall over dead.  You not hurt at all.
All needed, keep cool all the time.  No brave white boy with good knife
and plenty trees must ever run away from black bear any more."

Thus he went on in his broken English to Sam's mortification, and he
found that in using his good legs, that had often carried him in first
in many a race at school, he had gone down very much in the estimation
of the Indians, who think it is simply foolishness, as well as
cowardice, if armed with anything like a decent knife, to refuse to give
battle to a bear from the trunk of the nearest tree.  Thus the boys were
getting points and learning lessons by experience in reference to
hunting.

Mr Ross did not chide the lad, but thought that it would have been
better if, when he discovered the fresh track of the bear, he had
immediately returned to the camp for assistance.  The fact is, Mr Ross
was very thankful that nothing worse had happened.

Frank and Alec listened with intense interest to Sam's account of his
race back to the camp with the bear at his heels, and both declared that
they would have done likewise.  Later on we will find that they were
able to successfully adopt the Indian methods, much to their delight.

Three Boys in the Wild North Land--by Egerton Ryerson Young



CHAPTER EIGHT.

PRESERVING MEAT--CUNNING PARTRIDGES--CELESTIAL PHENOMENON--THE FEARFUL
HURRICANE--CAUGHT IN THE STORM--DISASTER--THE MISCHIEVOUS WOLVERINE--
ALEC'S SHOT.

The sun was shining brightly next morning ere the musical "Koos-koos-
kah" rang out, calling them from their slumbers.  When the boys arose
they found the big bear already skinned, and some portions of his hams,
cut as steaks, were being broiled, while his spareribs were skidded on a
couple of sticks, and were being roasted a nice brown colour, in front
of the fire which burned so brightly on the rocks.  The savoury odour of
the cooking breakfast was welcome to the boys.

A hasty plunge in the fresh water of the lake was a refreshing bath, and
soon they were ready for their morning meal.  Indians, if they have the
chance, are not bad cooks, especially when working for those whom they
respect; and so here, under the eye of Mr Ross, whom they so loved,
they did their best.  With some of the supplies from home, added to the
fish, duck, bear steaks, and spareribs, they had a breakfast of which
any hunters might be proud.  The delicious bracing air, the wild
romantic surroundings, the congenial friendship, the picturesque,
attentive red men, gave to this meal on the rocks under the blue sky
such an exhilaration of spirits to the boys that they were fairly wild
with delight.

Even Sam had forgotten in some degree his exciting race and fright in
the rare enjoyment of the hour.  Soon after, preparations were begun for
continuing the journey.  The question was, what was to be done with all
the bear's meat, as there was too much to carry in their canoes, with
the other supplies considered more necessary.  So the Indian plan of
preserving meat fresh and sweet was adopted.  A hole was dug in the
fresh earth to a depth of three or four feet, and here the meat, well
wrapped up in the bear's skin, was deposited.  Meat will keep fresh and
good in this way for many days.  The hole was then carefully covered up
and packed down by the Indians.  Then on the top a large fire was
kindled, and then allowed to burn itself out.  This was done to destroy
the scent and thus save the "cache" from being discovered by prowling
wolves and wolverines that would in all probability visit the camp not
long after the hunters had left.

Nothing of much importance occurred during the trip to the Old Fort.
Their favourite camping ground was reached in due time, and the boys had
a couple of hours' duck and partridge shooting ere they sat down on the
rocks to dinner.  Each had something to say, but Frank most amused the
party by a description of an old partridge that kept tumbling down ahead
of him and acting in the queerest manner possible.  In fact, so amused
was he in the queer antics of the bird that he could not find it in his
heart to shoot her.  When Mr Ross heard Frank's story he said he was
delighted to hear that he had not tried to shoot that partridge, as it
was undoubtedly a mother bird with a brood of little ones not far off.
Then he went on to tell not only of the cleverness he had often
witnessed in the old mother birds themselves, but also how cunningly the
little ones acted when suddenly disturbed.  They would apparently make
themselves invisible.  Some would quickly disappear in little openings
or under leaves, others would cleverly catch up old brown leaves in
their mouths and suddenly turn over on their backs, and then lie still
and quiet thus hidden under the leaves.  Mr Ross said he had seen them
do this so quickly that he could hardly believe his eyes until he went
and picked up the brown leaf and the little partridge that had so
cleverly hid itself out of sight, and not until the little bird was in
his hands did it show any sign of life.  Then, indeed, it was wild
enough.

During the afternoon the sky became hazy and slightly overcast.  The
boys were treated to one of the peculiar phenomena not unfrequently seen
in those high latitudes.  First, a great circle surrounded the sun, and
at the east, west, and top and bottom in it were seen very vivid mock
suns.  Shortly after another ring appeared inside this first one, and
then another one on the outside of all, and in each circle there
appeared four mock suns, clear, distinct, and startling.  In all there
was the sun himself, in a beautiful halo in the centre, and around him
were visible no less than twelve mock suns.

While this sight very much interested the boys, the older Indians were
somewhat troubled, and at once proposed to Mr Ross the removal of their
camp to a sheltered spot where some dense forests of balsam and spruce
would be a barrier against the coming storm, which they said was not
more than an hour off.  Marvellously clever are these Indians in reading
these signs in the heavens, and very rarely do they make mistakes.

To the boys there was not in these beautiful visions in the heavens
anything that portended a storm, and they were somewhat disappointed
when told that in all probability there would be but little hunting for
perhaps some days.  While this was not pleasant news, they willingly
fell to work and did their share in removing to the place appointed.
They were very much interested to see how skillfully the Indians cut
poles, and, taking the oilcloths from the canoes, improvised a
watertight roof over a "lean-to," as they called it, against the storm
that they said would soon be on them from a certain point indicated.
Large dry logs were cut and rolled into position to make a fire in the
front of this improvised tent, under which they would have to find
shelter.  Kettles, food, and blankets were brought up to this camp, and
then the canoes were carried to a sheltered spot and turned over and
fastened down with heavy logs and stones.

Very busily were the men employed, and yet more rapid were the changes
that were taking place in the heavens above and around them.  One by one
the circles with the mock suns disappeared.  Dark clouds began to arise
up in the north-west horizon, and rapidly they came up in the heavens.
Vivid flashes of lightning were seen and the rumbling thunder was heard
from the rapidly darkening clouds all around.  The birds that had been
singing now seemed to fly off to dense coverts, and uttered only
frightened cries.  A dense, stuffy sensation seemed to be in the air,
and there for a few moments every sound was hushed, and a calm, the most
profound and ominous, seemed to fall upon the whole face of nature.  Not
a blade of grass or a tall reed in the marshy places near the shore made
the slightest movement.  Nature was absolutely still.  It was the dead,
weird quiet before the awful hurricane; the quietude of death before the
elemental war.

Only for a short time did it last, and to judge by the feverish haste
with which the Indians, under Mr Ross's stern orders, worked, it was
evident they knew the danger of this ominous calm, and what would
speedily follow.  Large logs were piled up as a barrier behind the
improvised tent, while every rope available was used to tie down the
poles which held up the roof of canvas and oilcloth.  Poles were lashed
across the top, and tied down with the fishing nets, which had to do as
substitutes for something better.  Guns were well wrapped up in the
oilcloth covers, and, with the axes, were placed at a distance from the
camp.

"Get under cover, and hold on to something fixed and strong!" shouted
Mustagan, who had been on the lookout, and saw that the storm was close
at hand.

And it _was_ a storm!  A strange greenish appearance came into the
north-west sky, and then suddenly there was heard and seen the oncoming
tornado.  The clouds that during the calm had apparently become
motionless in the heavens for a time suddenly became strangely broken
and twisted, and then, as though impelled by some irresistible impulse,
started with a speed that seemed incredible on their wild career.  There
seemed to roll up before them the strange green colour in the sky, which
now appeared like a great monster on the crest of the coming clouds.
Blacker, denser, and darker, on they came.  Far away the sound of the
storm could be heard, while now the forked lightnings and peals of
thunder were almost incessant.

Crouching under the shelter was our party.  Mr Ross and the three boys
were in the centre, while the stalwart Indians took the outside
positions, each man with a grip of iron upon the poles and canvas.

Very strange and very different were the sensations of the boys.  "This
is glorious!" said Alec, who had often, with his Highland friends, been
caught in storms amid the hills of his beloved Scotland.

"Wait until it is over," said the other boys, "and then we will tell you
whether it is `glorious' or not."

"Hold on!" shouted Mr Ross.  For, in almost an instant, a dark as like
as midnight was on them, broken only by a vivid flash of lightning,
while the very ground seemed to shake under the awful thunder.  Then the
storm in all its fury was upon them.  How they escaped seemed a miracle.
Great trees all around them were bent and twisted and broken, and went
down in scores, until the air seemed full of the falling trunks and
branches.  Large branches fell upon the frail roof under which they were
sheltered, but fortunately, while some holes were made, none of them
were large enough to break through or injure them, and those that did
fall on them were really a benefit, as they helped to hold down the
canvas over them.

Fortunately these tornadoes are not of long duration.  With a speed of
perhaps over a hundred miles an hour they sweep along with irresistible
power in their wild career.

Their fury is soon spent, and years may pass ere they occur again.  As a
very heavy fall of rain immediately followed this hurricane or tornado,
our party were obliged to remain under their frail tent, which, in spite
of the fury of the winds, thanks to the strong arms of the Indians,
skillfully directed by Mustagan, had been kept from being blown away.
However, some of the larger branches that had fallen upon it had pierced
the roof in some places, and now, like out of a huge funnel, about a
gallon of water suddenly struck Alec on the back of the neck, and caused
him to change his position, while he fairly howled from the suddenness
of the dousing.

"Is that sousing `glorious,' Alec?" asked Frank, who was doing his best
to dodge the little streams that through some other rents were trying to
reach him.

"Well, no, not exactly," was Alec's answer;--"this beats anything I ever
saw or heard of in the Highlands; and now that the worst is over I would
not have missed such a thing for a good deal."

"What do you think of it, Sam?" said Frank.

Sam had cuddled down between Mr Ross and Mustagan, and, at the advice
of the latter, had taken the precaution to double up a blanket like a
shawl and throw it over his head and shoulders.  Very little wet had
reached him, yet he had to confess that he had been terrified by this
storm, which had excelled any dozen ever witnessed before in his life.

"Think of it!" said, he; "faith, I have just been thinking which is the
worst, being chased by a fierce old bear or frightened out of a year's
growth by a tornado.  Next time, if I am to choose between the two, I'll
tackle the bear."

This answer caused a hearty laugh, and even the Indians, who had
remained so quiet, yet alert to watch for any change in the storm,
smiled at it and exchanged significant glances, and said that the boy
would yet redeem himself.

After a time the rain ceased, the blue sky appeared, and the sun shone
out again.  But what a change met their gaze as they came out from under
their quickly improvised tent and wandered about!  The beautiful forests
seemed about ruined.  In one direction, like as though a great reaper
had gone through a splendid meadow, and cut clean to the ground a great
swath of grass, so had this cyclone gone through the forest.  In the
centre of its path, not a tree had been left standing.  Every one had
gone down before this irresistible force.  Fortunately it had swerved a
little to the right as it passed by our friends, or they would not have
escaped so well.  As it was, great trees had fallen all around, and it
was a providential escape that had been theirs, and for this they were
more than grateful as they saw by investigation more and more of the
fury displayed by the effects of the tempest as it passed.  The spot
where the canoes had been hid away was, of course, one of the first to
which their steps were directed.  A great tree had fallen across one of
them, that had not been placed low enough in the hollow between the
rocks, and it was so crushed and broken as to be absolutely worthless.
The others, however, had escaped, and were none the worse of the storm,
although fallen trees were all around them.

Blankets, supplies, and other things were overhauled, and everything
that had caught the rain was soon drying in the warm sun, which was now
smiling serenely upon them.  The mock suns, or "sun dogs," as they were
commonly called, all disappeared with the storm of which they seemed to
have been the harbinger.  Beautiful as had been their appearance, the
boys all agreed that if their coming was to be so speedily followed by
such a storm they would gladly dispense with them in the future; nor did
they see them again until when, in the depth of winter, they showed up
in their weird splendour and heralded forth a blizzard storm which
played its wild pranks upon the boys most thoroughly.  But we must not
anticipate.

Mr Ross and the Indians quickly shifted the camp to a pleasant place.
A fire was kindled and a hot meal was cooked and eaten, and then there
was a consultation as to the future.  One canoe was destroyed; could the
whole party go in the other two, or had they better return to Sagasta-
weekee?  Mr Ross was anxious to hear whether the cyclone had done any
damage at home, although he had not much fear, for it had apparently
come from another direction.  However, it was eventually decided that
three of the Indians should return home, and bring along with them
another canoe, as well as news from the home.  They were also to call at
the camp to take home the bear's robe and meat, which had been cached in
the ground as we have described.  Very soon were they ready to start,
and, to the surprise of Mr Ross, Alec asked to be permitted to go with
them.  This request was readily granted, and soon in one canoe, with
their four paddles at work, they were speeding along at a great rate.

They pushed on without stopping, until they began to round the point of
a narrow tongue of land, which would bring them into full view of their
camp, although it was still some hundreds of yards away.  The instant
the point was turned and the distant camping place came into view the
Indian in the front of the canoe suddenly ducked down his head and
whispered a sharp, quick "Hist!" and at once arrested the forward
movement of the boat.  Noiselessly and quickly was the canoe paddled
back out of sight.

"What is the matter?" said Alec, who was surprised by the suddenness of
this quick retrograde movement and of the quiet, suppressed excitement
of the Indians.

"Wolverine!" was the only word he heard, which was whispered from one
Indian to the other.  The utterance of this one word made Alec no wiser
until one of the men, who understood a little English, said, "Wolverine
find the camp; smell the meat; dig him up; carry him away; we kill him."

This was no easy matter, as the wolverine is, without exception, the
most cunning animal in the woods.  He far outstrips in this respect the
fox or wolf or bear.  What these Indians were going to do must be done
quickly.  The first thing was to see that their guns were well-loaded
with bullets.  The next was to find out if his quick eyes had seen them
when for the few seconds they must have been visible when they rounded
the point.  The wind was in their favour, as it was blowing from him to
them.  The oldest of the crew was appointed the leader, the rest were to
follow his directions.  First of all he quietly went ashore, and,
noiselessly crawling through the underbrush across the point, he was
able to see that the wolverine was still at work.  It was evident that
he had not the slightest suspicion that his enemies, the hunters, were
near him.  Returning to the canoe from this inspection, the leader gave
orders that they were to paddle back into the deep bay so that there
would be a possibility of their landing and getting in behind him, as
their old camp which he was robbing was close to the shore.

Very noiselessly and yet rapidly did they hurry back, and then as
quietly as possible they landed at a suitable spot.  It was here decided
that three of them, with their guns, should try and get into the rear of
the camp, while Alec, who had not yet the ability to travel with the
speed and quietness here essential to success, was to take his place
just across the neck of land where, with his gun, he could command the
shore if the wolverine, disturbed by those in the rear, should attempt
to escape over the rocks in that direction.  Before leaving, the leader
said to Alec:

"Do not fire until you see the whites of his eyes, and then hit him, if
possible, between them; or, if it is a side shot, strike him behind the
foreshoulders."

Alec was excited, but he soon conquered his nervousness, and prepared to
play his part as well as possible.  His instructions were to wait for a
few minutes ere he began to crawl to his assigned position.  He thus had
an opportunity of witnessing the cleverness and alertness of the three
Indians starting on their critical work.  Making a deep detour, they
were soon out of sight in the forest, without making as much noise as
the breaking of a single twig beneath their moccasined feet.  More like
phantoms they seemed, as so quietly they flitted away.  When he thought
it was time for him to move he began, Indian-like, to advance to his
assigned position, imitating as far as possible the movements he had
witnessed in the Indians.  To his great satisfaction, he reached the
designated spot without any trouble.

Carefully looking over the rocks and through some underbrush, he was
able to see, through a pocket telescope which he fortunately had with
him, the busy wolverine still at work.  Very interesting it was to watch
him, even if it meant the destruction of all the meat.  The wolverine is
about as large as a first-class retriever dog.  His legs, though short,
are exceedingly muscular, and he has quite a bushy tail.  These animals
are very powerful, and in breaking into an Indian's "cache" can remove
logs and stones much larger and heavier than one man can lift.  They are
very destructive when they find a "cache" of this description.  They not
only have an enormous capacity for devouring the meat cached by the
Indians, but they will carry away, and cunningly hide, large quantities.
Over the whole they emit an odour so pungent and so disagreeable, that
neither hungry Indians nor starving dogs will touch it.  The Indians
simply detest the wolverine on account of its thievish propensities and
its great cunning.  There is always great rejoicing when one is killed.
As Alec, through his telescope, watched the mischievous, busy animal he
became very much interested in his movements.  He was amazed at the
strength which enabled him to dig out from the ground a hindquarter of
the bear and easily carry it away to another place, where he cunningly
hid it.  His next effort, which much amused Alec, was to take the bear's
skin in his mouth and attempt to climb up into a tree that he might hide
it among the branches.  It was laughable to see the skin slipping under
his feet, and thus causing him to lose his grip, so that, with it, he
fell heavily to the ground.  Failure, however, was not in his
vocabulary.  Again and again he seized the robe in his mouth, and
endeavoured to carry the awkward thing up that tree.  But, alas for him,
his very determination proved his destruction.  So absorbed had he
become in his efforts to succeed that he was, for once in his life,
caught off his guard.  The three Indians had succeeded in getting behind
him, and had thus cut off his retreat into the forest.  The first
consciousness he had of his enemies was when three simultaneous shouts,
from different parts of the forest behind him, told him of his danger.
Cunning as he was, the Indians had clearly outwitted him.  They knew
that the loud shouts from different parts at the same time was about the
only way by which he could be puzzled, and this plan they had
successfully adopted.

For an instant only he waited, and then, as rapidly as possible, he
started along the only route that seemed open to him, which was the one
from which no sound had come.  This was the way that led him exactly in
the direction where Alec was waiting for him.  This was what the Indians
were anticipating.  Their hope was that Alec would make the successful
shot; then, even if he failed, so narrow was the tongue of land on which
the wolverine was running that they felt that by spreading out they had
him so securely hedged in that it would be impossible for him to escape.

In the meantime Alec had been watching him through his glass, until
there fell upon his ears the shouts of the Indians.  When he saw the
effect upon the wolverine he was amused at the sudden change.  While
busy robbing the "cache" he seemed the monarch of all he surveyed, by
his saucy appearance.  Now he looked and acted as a craven coward, whose
one thought was in reference to his escape.  Alec, watching him, saw him
spring upon a fallen log, and for an instant look in different
directions toward the deep forest.  The prospect did not seem to satisfy
him, for, springing down, he at once began his journey directly toward
where Alec was in hiding.  When Alec saw this movement, he quickly put
up his telescope, and, seizing his gun, prepared for his opportunity.
It was fortunate that the distance over which the wolverine had to
travel was considerable, as it enabled Alec to get his nerves steady and
his hands firm.  When the wolverine had come about half the distance his
cunning suspiciousness seemed to return, and, fearing some danger ahead,
he stopped and acted as though he would like to retrace his steps and
try some other plan.  Fortunately for Alec, the wind was still blowing
toward him, and so the wolverine had not caught his scent.  While thus
halting and undecided about his movements he was startled by another
shout, which told him that his retreat was cut off, and so he quickly
resumed his journey.  Knowing the cleverness of these animals, Alec had
taken his position behind a rock, and there, with trigger drawn back, he
awaited his oncoming.

"Wait until you can see the white of his eyes," had been his
instructions, and faithfully did he obey.

With his strange, slouching gait, along came the treacherous, cunning
brute until he reached a point where he stood fairly exposed on the
lower one of some steplike rocks.  With eye keen and nerve firm, Alec
stepped out from behind his cover, and ere the animal could get over the
start of his sudden appearance the report of the gun rang out and the
wolverine fell dead, struck by the bullet fairly and squarely between
the eyes.

Alec's shout of triumph brought the Indians to him on the run, and they,
in their quiet way, congratulated him on doing what but few white
hunters have ever done--he had had the honour of shooting one of the
largest wolverines that had been killed in the country for a long time.

While one of the Indians hurried across the tongue of land for the canoe
and paddles it around to the camp, the rest of the party dragged the
dead wolverine back to the scene of his depredations.  Here they had an
opportunity of seeing the destructiveness of this animal.  Every pound
of meat had been removed from the "cache," and so cunningly hid away
that not one piece could be found except the one which Alec had seen him
hide as he watched him through his telescope, and this piece was so
permeated by the offensive odour that it was worthless.  Fortunately,
the bearskin was none the worse for its overhauling.  While waiting for
the coming of the canoe the men set to work and speedily skinned the
wolverine.  The fur is not very valuable, but, to encourage the Indians
to do all they can to destroy them, as they are so destructive on
hunters' traps as well as supplies, the Hudson Bay Company always gives
a good price for their pelts.

A few hours' paddling brought them to Sagasta-weekee.  Here they found
all well.  Fortunately, the cyclone had passed some miles to the west of
them, and so they had escaped its fury.  Hunters, however, had come in
who had been exposed to its power, and had some exciting tales to tell
of narrow escapes and strange adventures.

Mrs Ross had become alarmed when, from some Indians, she had learned
that the march of the cyclone, was in the direction, in which Mr Ross
and his party had gone.  She was pleased and delighted to welcome Alec,
and to hear from him and the Indians the story of their deliverance and
escape from accidents during the great storm.

The skins of the bear and wolverine were opened out and much admired,
and then handed over to some clever Indian women to carefully dress for
their home-going.  The story of Sam's race from the bear very much
amused them all.  Nothing, however, so much delighted the Indian hunters
who gathered in as the destruction of that old wolverine.  It seems that
same fellow had haunted that region of country for some years,
destroying traps, robbing fish scaffolds and meat "caches," and playing
with all the steel traps that the cleverest hunters could set for him.
Now, however, his reign was over, and here was his hide--and a big one
it was.  Alec was the hero, and, although he modestly disclaimed all the
honour except the first-class shot, the Indians were very proud of him,
and showed it in various expressive ways.

Three Boys in the Wild North Land--by Egerton Ryerson Young



CHAPTER NINE.

MONTREAL POINT--THE GOVERNOR AND THE IROQUOIS--THE HERD OF DEER--OMINOUS
SOUNDS--PACKS OF WOLVES--THE FIERCE BATTLE--WELCOME REINFORCEMENTS--THE
VICTORY--PLAYING "POSSUM".

As Mr Ross was anxious to get news from Sagasta-weekee and hear how his
family and home had fared during the cyclone, Alec and the Indians
started on their return trip early the next morning, taking with them a
new canoe to replace the one that had been destroyed by a falling tree.
They tarried not on the way, except to shoot a few ducks that were
directly in their route.  The result was they arrived early in the
forenoon at the Old Fort, and were glad to bring the good news that all
were well at Sagasta-weekee, and that the storm had passed by several
miles away from them.

Of course the story of the destruction of the cache by the wolverine,
and then his being killed, had to be told, much to the delight of Frank
and Sam, as well as to the satisfaction of the older members of the
party, who all rejoiced that at length that cunning fellow, that had so
long been a terror and a nuisance, had been destroyed.

As the storm had completely died away, and the weather seemed fine and
settled, it was decided to have an early dinner, then push on to Spider
Islands, and there camp for the night.  The rearrangement of their
outfit was soon completed and the journey commenced.

Lake Winnipeg is nearly three hundred miles long, and about eighty wide
in its northern part.  It is thus like a great inland sea.  Great storms
sweep over it at times with tremendous fury.  It has many shallows and
sunken rocks.

The result is, it requires careful navigation for vessels that need any
considerable depth of water.

There are some laughable stories afloat about the nervous, excitable
captain of the first schooner, who carefully came up to the northern end
of the lake from Manitoba and pushed on as far as Norway House.  He had
secured as a guide an old Hudson Bay voyageur, who had piloted many a
brigade of boats from Fort Garry to York Factory, on the Hudson Bay.  Of
course the small boats to which he was accustomed did not draw nearly as
many feet of water as this three-masted schooner.  Still he imagined he
knew where all the rocks and shoals were, and quickly accepted the
offered position as guide or pilot for the first schooner.

In spite of his skill and care several times the vessel bumped against a
rock, much to the terror and alarm of the captain, but all the
satisfaction he could get out of the imperturbable old native was, as
they repeatedly struck them:

"Ah, captain, I told you there were many rocks, and there is another of
them."

Fortunately these rocks are very smooth, and as the vessel was moving
along very slowly, she was not at all injured by the merely touching
them.  When, however, she had, in passing over some sunken ones, nearly
stranded on one or two, the peppery old captain could stand it no
longer, and so he shouted to the guide:

"Look here, old fellow, I'll not have my ship's bottom scratched any
more like this."

All the answer he could get from the stolid man was:

"Um, bottom all right, only a few more rocks."

And these few more rocks they managed to get over, much to the delight
and amazement of the Indians, who had never seen such a large vessel
before.

With birch canoes, our friends had no such troubles among the rocks.  As
the wind was fair the clever Indians fastened two paddles and improvised
a sail out of a blanket for each canoe, and they were able to sail along
at a great rate.  But it requires careful steering, as the canoe is a
cranky vessel at the best, and only those thoroughly accustomed to them
ought to try to sail them.

The trip across to the Spider Islands was safely accomplished.  The boys
were pleased with their run, which was most exhilarating.  Those who
travel on the water only in great ships miss much of the healthful
excitement and delight that is the portion of those who are brave and
adventurous enough to take some of these trips in the light canoes of
the Indians.

The boys were charmed with the few picturesque islands, and had a joyous
time of it, for the weather was most glorious.  Yet, as there was no
game, except some passing ducks that lit at times in the little
indentations that served as harbours, it was decided to push on to
Montreal Point, which is the first landing stage on the mainland on the
east side of Lake Winnipeg.  The point derived its name from the fact
that in the old days of long trips made by Sir George Simpson, in the
birch canoes manned by the famous Iroquois Indians, this was the first
stopping place from Norway House on their return voyage to Montreal,
some two thousand miles away.  Marvellous are the stories told of the
skill and endurance of those matchless crews of Indians.  Sir George
Simpson was a hard master, and pushed them to their very utmost.  No
dallying along the road was allowed when he was on board.  He would put
his hand over the side of the canoe into the water, and if with a swish
the water did not fly up perpendicularly before him he would reprove in
language that could not be misunderstood.

Very strange does it now appear when we read of those days, or talk to
old men who were participants in those events when the officials of the
fur-trading company, from the despotic governor himself down to the
lowest clerk, travelled over half the continent in birch canoes, manned
by Indians or half-breeds, looking after the interest of the greatest
fur-trading company the world has ever seen.  It is after all no wonder
that they worked in a hurry when the weather was favourable, as there
were times when storms swept over the lakes with such fury that, in
spite of all their skill and anxiety to push on, they were detained for
days and days together.  The wonder ever was that more lives were not
lost in the daring recklessness that was often displayed.  A
characteristic story of Sir George Simpson, so long the energetic
governor of the company, is still repeated at many a camp fire.

It seems that on one of his return voyages to Montreal from Norway House
he was, if possible, more arbitrary and domineering than ever, and
especially seemed to single out for his spleen a big burly fellow, a
half-French and half-Iroquois voyageur.  This half-breed, who was making
his first trip, stood all this abuse for time good-naturedly, and tried
to do his best; but one day at one of the camping places, where Sir
George had been unusually abusive and sarcastic, the big fellow turned
on him and gave him one of the handsomest thrashings a man ever
received.  The rest of the canoemen pretended to be so horror-stricken
that they could not, or would not, interfere until the thrashing had
been well administered to the governor, and then they made a noisy show
of delivering the tyrant out of the clutches of their enraged comrade.

When the governor recovered his voice, and was able to get the better of
his anger and indignation at the fact that he, the great Sir George
Simpson, had been treated with such indignity by a miserable voyageur,
he vented in not very polished French his threats upon his assailant.
He said:

"Just wait until we reach Montreal, and I will soon clap this villain
into prison, and have him kept there until the flesh rots off his
bones."

With this and other threats of what he would do, the governor worked off
his passion.  The imperturbable canoeman, having obtained his
satisfaction in the thrashing administered, returned to his duties, and
paid no more attention to the threats of Sir George.  What cared he?  It
would be many days ere Montreal was reached, and there were many rapids
to run and portages to cross, and so there was no need of worrying about
what was distant.  But the governor, although he had ceased to scold,
became very glum and distant, and the voyageur began to think that
perhaps it would go badly with him and he would have to suffer for his
doings.  His fears were not allayed or lessened any by his chums, who
conjured up all sorts of dire calamities that would befall him, and
invented any amount of stories of pains and penalties that had been
inflicted on others who had dared to resent his tyrannies.

Thus the days passed, and at length they reached Lachine, at the end of
the Ottawa River, not very far from Montreal.  Here the company had in
those days a large trading establishment.  Shortly after they landed,
and Sir George, who had been met by the officials of the company there
stationed, went with them into the principal building and was in close
consultation, while the feelings of the voyageur were not enviable.  As
was feared, the big men were not long in consultation ere his name was
called in a loud, stern voice.  There was nothing for him to do but
obey, and so he marched up into the building and met the officials and
Sir George.

To his surprise and astonishment Sir George reached out his hand and
there made a full apology for his hasty words and petulant temper, and
stated that the thrashing he had received he had richly deserved, and
that it had done him good, as it had opened his eyes to see that he had
grown tyrannical and overbearing and was expecting more than
possibilities of the men.  Then, to show the genuineness of his apology,
he ordered the clerk to give to this man the best outfit of clothing and
other handsome presents, and to charge the whole to his, Sir George's,
private personal account.

A couple of hours were quite sufficient to take the boys and Indians
across the wide open expanse of lake that lay between Spider Island and
Montreal Point on Lake Winnipeg.  When drawing near the coast they were
pleased to see some deer sporting on the shore.  It is a peculiarity of
some animals when on the edge of a lake, that while they are exceedingly
alert and watchful against surprises from the land, they seem to have no
idea of danger from the water side.  The result is, the experienced
Indians can, by cautious stalking, get quite near to them.

This is true of some of the deer tribe, and here the boys had an
illustration of it.  These deer are called in that country by the
Indians "wa-was-ka-sew."  They are very graceful in their movements and
full of play.  The canoes were halted two or three hundred yards from
the shore, and the movements of the small herd were watched with great
interest by the boys.  Then Mr Ross quietly passed the word that an
effort would be made to get a successful shot or two.  As the guns then
used were not to be depended upon to accurately carry a bullet more than
a hundred yards, it was decided to back up and make a long detour and
land some hunters ahead of the deer in a clump of timber toward which
they seemed to be moving.

Noiselessly the paddles were plied, and when they were several hundreds
of yards out they rapidly paddled on to the designated place, which was
perhaps half a mile ahead of the deer.  As Alec had had such a
successful time with the wolverine, it was decided that this was Frank
and Sam's opportunity, so they, with one of the younger Indians from
each boat, under the leadership of Mustagan, were cautiously landed,
each one with his gun, knife, and hunting hatchet.  Then the boats put
out again from the shore to watch the progress of events.

Not long were they kept waiting, for hardly had they reached a position
where they imagined their presence would not be observed before they saw
that the deer had become very much excited, and at first had all huddled
close together on the shore.  Mr Ross and the rest at first thought
that they must have observed the canoes or had caught the scent of those
who had landed.  A moment's observation revealed that this was not the
case.  The very position of the deer showed that the fears were caused
by enemies behind them, and they had not long to wait ere they were at
first heard and then seen.  Faintly coming on the wind were heard the
blood-curdling howls of a pack of wolves.

To judge by the movements of the herd of deer it looked as though the
beautiful creatures seemed to think of defence.  The bucks formed a
compact line, with their antlered heads down toward the point, from
which the rapidly increasing howls were coming, while the does and young
deer crowded in behind.  Not long did they there remain.  A louder
chorus of horrid sounds reached them, which seemed to tell of their
triumph at having struck the warm scent of their victims.  These
dreadful howlings were too much for the timid deer, and so with a rush
they were off with the speed of the wind, running directly toward the
point where Mustagan had placed the two boys and the Indians.  It was
very fortunate for them that in this hour of peril they had the cool-
headed and courageous Mustagan in command.

He had been watching the deer from his hiding place and had observed
their sudden fear and precipitate retreat.  His long experience at once
came to his help, and so, before his acute ear had caught the sound of
the distant howlings of the wolves, he was certain of their coming.
With a celerity most marvellous he gathered in the boys and Indians and
quickly explained how matters stood, and told them that their bullets
would probably be required for other game than deer.

Taking a hasty survey of the ground along which he was sure the deer
would fly, pursued by the wolves, he arranged his men, keeping the boys
with himself.

His instructions were to let the deer go by unharmed by them; then, as
the wolves followed, for each to pick out one and fire.  Then, if
attacked by the rest of the pack, they were to close in together and
fight them with their axes and their knives.  If, however, they were not
attacked after they had fired, they were to again load their guns as
quickly as possible.

"Down to your places!" sternly spoke Mustagan.

And hardly a moment passed ere the herd of deer flew by, some of them so
close to the hidden hunters that they could almost have touched them
with their guns.

"Steady, boys!" were Mustagan's whispered words to the white lads, who,
crouching down near him with their fingers on the triggers of their
guns, had caught his cool, brave spirit; and although the blood-curdling
howls of the wolves were now distinctly heard they flinched not in the
strain of those trying moments.

As Frank and Sam's guns were on this excursion only single-barrelled,
while the rest were double-barrelled, Mustagan said:

"When first wolf reach that stone, Frank, kill him.  Then Sam hit the
next one.  Then I kill some.  Then other Indians fire.  Perhaps other
wolves run away.  Perhaps not, so have axes handy."

This advice was not neglected, for each axe, keen-edged and serviceable,
was at the side of its owner.

"Now here they come!" shouted Mustagan.

Nothing can be more trying to brave hunters than was such a position as
this.  The travellers in Russia and elsewhere who have been assailed by
packs of these fierce wolves, sending out their merciless, blood-
curdling howlings, can appreciate the position of Frank and Sam.  Yet
they were true as steel, and when the word was given by the old Indian,
in whom they had such implicit confidence, the guns were raised, and
with nerves firm and strong they fired with unerring accuracy, and two
great grey wolves fell dead, pierced through by the death-dealing
bullets.

Then Mustagan fired.  He was too wise a hunter to waste a bullet on a
single wolf, if with it there was a possibility of killing two; and so,
as the two leaders who had been a little in advance of the pack had
fallen, he fired at two who were running side by side.  His bullet first
went through the body of the one nearer to him and then broke the back
of the second.

In a second or two there rang out the reports of the other guns, and as
many more of the wolves lay dead or dying on the ground.  Now was the
uncertainty of the battle.  Wolves are the most treacherous and erratic
animals to hunt.  Sometimes they are the most arrant cowards, and will
turn and run away at the slightest appearance of resistance or attack.
At other times they will continue to advance against all odds.  Their
courage and ferocity seem to increase with their numbers, and are of
course greatest when they are half-famished for food.  Gaunt and half-
starved those fierce ones seemed to be.  And so, when the guns suddenly
rang out and numbers of them fell, the others were at first somewhat
disconcerted; but the hot scent of the deer was close, and the fact that
their enemies were invisible made them determined not to yield at this
first alarm.

With a rush the survivors, perhaps about twenty in number, dashed into
the thicket, into which the deer had disappeared, and from which their
enemies had fired upon them.  Sudden as was this rush it was not quicker
than the movements of the hunters, who had closed in together, and with
axes in hand were ready for their wild, mad attack.  Mustagan and his
three Indians were in front, while the two boys were placed a little in
the rear.

As the pack came on some of them seemed disconcerted by the appearance
of the hunters, and especially by the loud shouts which, at Mustagan's
orders, they now made.  All wild animals seem to have a dread of the
human voice.  And thus it was on this occasion.  Some of the wolves were
startled and fell back, but numbers of them resolutely dashed on to the
attack.  Then it was axe against teeth, and one wolf after another fell
dead or badly wounded under the heavy, skillful blows.  Frank and Sam
each had the satisfaction of finishing off some of the wounded ones.

But the conflict was a fierce one; and how it would have gone with them
eventually is hard to say, but it was victoriously ended by a welcome
arrival of additional forces.  Mr Ross and the others in the canoe had
also been watching the deer, and had seen their startled movements and
sudden flight.  This had caused them to use their paddles as vigourously
as possible and make for the shore.  Ere they reached it the howling of
the wolves fell on their ears.  Then they had seen the rapid flight of
the herd, and soon after the wild rush of the wolves not far behind
them.  So, as speedily as possible, Mr Ross and the party had landed in
the rear and had hurried on.

The firing of the guns of Mustagan and his party plainly told them of
danger, and also indicated the position of their friends.  So they
cautiously hurried along, and were in good time to pour, from the side,
a volley into the wolves, that were now making a fierce attack on the
men and boys.

This second attack was too much for the wolves, and so with howls of
baffled rage they turned to the east, and soon disappeared in the
forest, to be seen no more.

Many and sincere were the congratulations of all at their success and
deliverance.

This was the largest pack of wolves that had been seen or heard of in
this part of the country for years.  The great northern wolves do not,
as a general thing, hunt in very large numbers, as do the smaller wolves
of the prairies or of the steppes of Russia, or as the brown wolf used
to do in the new settlements of Canada and in some parts of the United
States.  A pack of eight or ten of these big, fierce northern wolves was
considered by the Indians as many as generally hunted together; although
sometimes, when a few got on the trail of a large moose or reindeer,
that led them for a long time, they were apt to be joined by others
until they mustered quite a number.  So Mustagan's idea was that a
number of small, separate packs had been on the trail--it may have been
for days--of the different deer, which had at length gathered in this
herd.  All they could do, of course, was thus to conjecture; but here
was the startling fact--they had encountered the largest pack of great
northern wolves seen in that land for years at least.

There was still something to be done.  While a number of dead wolves lay
where they were shot, others badly wounded were making desperate efforts
to escape.  These had to be killed, and while some were being dispatched
with axes by the Indians, to the boys was given the pleasure of sending
the deadly bullets into others, and thus quickly putting them out of
misery.

"Be careful," said Mustagan, "as you move around among the apparently
dead ones.  Wolves are most treacherous brutes, and sometimes badly
wounded ones will feign to be dead when very far from it.  By doing this
they hope to escape the extra bullet or fatal blow of the axe that would
quickly finish them.  Then when the hunters are off their guard, or
night comes on, they hope to be able to skulk away."

This cunning feigning of death when wounded or captured is not confined
to wolves.  There are several other animals that often try to play
"possum" in this manner.

This warning advice of the old Indian did not come too soon, and
fortunate indeed it was for one of the party.

The skins of some fur-bearing animals are not considered _prime_ when
they are killed in the summer months; the bitter cold of winter very
much thickens and improves the fur.  However, sometimes the bears and
wolves are almost as good then as in the colder months, and bring nearly
as high a price in some foreign markets.  As soon as the work of killing
the wounded ones was apparently over, Mr Ross began feeling the fur of
them as they lay around, ere the Indians commenced the work of skinning
them.  To the boys, who were closely following him, he explained the
difference between what they called in the fur trade a _prime_ skin and
one of inferior value.  After several had been tested in this way, and
all signs of movements on the part of any of the wolves had ceased, they
happened to come to one very large fellow, settled out flat on his
belly, apparently stone dead.

"Here is the finest one we have seen thus far," said Mr Ross, as he
stooped down and began pulling at his dark grey fur, while the boys
stood around with their guns held by the barrels in their hands with the
butt resting on the ground.

While listening to Mr Ross's explanations in reference to the different
grades of skins, Sam's sharp eyes fancied they detected a slight quiver
in the eyelids of the fierce brute, that was apparently unconscious of
the thorough way in which Mr Ross was pulling his fur and testing it in
various places.  Not wishing to be laughed at, Sam said nothing about
his suspicions that life was still there, but he nevertheless, without
attracting attention, so changed the position of his loaded gun that it
would not take him long to fire if necessity arose.  And very soon the
occasion came.  As Mr Ross moved around to the front of the animal he
stooped down to feel the thickness of the fur that grows between the
short ears.  No sooner had he done this than with the fury of a demon
the wolf sprang up at him, and made a desperate attempt to seize him by
the throat.

Mr Ross was completely thrown off his guard, but fortunately as the
brute sprang at him he threw up his arm, and thus saved his throat.  But
the arm was pierced by the sharp teeth, that seemed to penetrate through
the clothing and flesh to the very bone.  However, that was his last
spring and his last bite, for before even Mustagan or anyone else could
seize a weapon the report of Sam's gun rang out, and the wolf fell, dead
enough this time.  Sam had put the muzzle within a yard of his side, and
the charge had fairly torn its way through him.

So savage had been the attack, and so viciously had the wolf fastened
onto the arm of Mr Ross, that, when the brute fell over dead, the jaws
remained set with the teeth in the flesh, and so Mr Ross fell or was
dragged to the ground by the weight of the animal.  Mustagan and the
others had to use the handle of an axe to force open the jaws before the
wounded arm could be released.

"Well done, Sam," was the chorus that rang out from all.  After Mr
Ross's arm had been stripped, and some decoction of Indian herbs, which
were quickly gathered, had been applied, Sam told of his suspicions when
the eyelids quivered, and of his precaution in getting his gun ready.
Of course it would have been better if he had mentioned it at the time,
but he feared to be laughed at, and he said that he thought at the time
that perhaps the wolf's eyelids had the same habit as a snake's tail, of
moving for some time after the animal is dead.

The dead wolf was examined for other wounds, and found to be shot
through the body, behind the ribs, where no vital organ had been
touched.  This shot had given it a momentary paralysis, which had caused
it to drop so flat upon the ground.  The Indians' idea was that it
recovered itself while they were all around it, and so it cunningly lay
still, hoping to get away when they left, but Mr Ross's handling was
too much of an insult to be ignored, and so it suddenly sprang at him as
described.

Of course this wounded arm must be promptly attended to more thoroughly
than it could be on this wild spot, and so every Indian was set to work
to skin the wolves, and then the home trip began.

Three Boys in the Wild North Land--by Egerton Ryerson Young



CHAPTER TEN.

ROMANTIC COURTSHIP--THE HAPPY FAMILY--A CANOE PICNIC--MUSTAGAN--A
PROWLING BEAR--A WOMAN'S SHOT.

When the full details of the battle with the wolves came out, and the
fact of the prominent part that Sam had played in the rescue of Mr
Ross, his family were at first very much excited at his narrow escape,
and then full of congratulations for Sam for his shrewdness, and the
promptitude with which he acted.

We have as yet said but little about this interesting family, and so we
will use some of the time while Mr Ross is recovering from his wounds
in giving a few details which we are sure will be most interesting, as
some of them partake most decidedly of the romantic.

Mr Ross, like many a Hudson Bay official, was rather late in life in
choosing his wife.  His busy life in the service, where on each
promotion he was removed from one post to another, made it almost
impossible to set up a home.  When he decided to do so his plan was very
romantic.  In those remote, lonely regions there are not many white
families from which the young gentlemen in the service can select wives.
The result is, many of them marry native women, or the daughters of
mixed marriages contracted by the older officials.  These women make
excellent wives and mothers, and, being ambitious to learn, they often
become as clever and bright as their white sisters, to many of whom they
are superior in personal appearance.  Into many a cozy home can the
adventurous tourist go, and never would he dream that the stately,
refined, cultured woman at the head of the home, honoured by her husband
and beloved by her children, if not of pure Indian blood, was at least
the daughter or granddaughter of a pure Indian.

Very romantic is the story of Mr Ross's love adventure, and here it is
given for the first time.  Long years before this, when Mr Ross was
comparatively a young man, he saw in one of the Indian villages a little
dark-eyed native girl, who looked to him as beautiful as a poet's dream.
Although she was only ten or twelve years old, and he approaching
thirty, he fell desperately in love with her, and said she must yet be
his wife.  He knew her language, and soon found that the bright and
beautiful child was willing some time in the future to be his bride.

So it was arranged that she should be sent to the old land to be
educated.  Fortunately good Bishop Anderson was returning to England in
connection with his work in the Red River Settlement, going by the
Hudson Bay Company's ship.  Wenonah was placed in charge of his family
on the voyage, and at the journey's end was sent to a first-class
school, called "The Nest."  Here at Mr Ross's expense she was kept for
several years, until she was not only highly educated as a student, but
loving, interested ladies taught her, in their kindness, the things
essential for a good housekeeper to know.

When she was about twenty years of age she returned to the Hudson Bay
territories, and was married by the missionary to Mr Ross, who had so
well-earned the skillful, loving wife she ever proved to be.  Over
twenty years of wedded life had been theirs before Mr Ross retired from
the service, and several more had passed ere our story opened.  Two sons
were away from home as clerks in the company's service at some remote
stations similar to those in which most of the officials had begun their
apprenticeship.

At home were two bright girls about ten and eight years of age, and a
younger brother hardly six, whose name was Roderick.  The names of the
girls were Minnehaha and Wenonah.  A delightful home was theirs, even if
in a place so remote from civilisation.  Mrs Ross had devoted much of
her time to the education of her children.  The house was furnished with
a splendid library, which Mr Ross himself had gathered with a great
deal of care.  For music, the piano and harp were their favourite
instruments, and several members of the family were able to play
exceedingly well.  So well cultured were they that they would be
considered a well-educated and intellectual family in any land.

There was for a time some anxiety about the wounds which Mr Ross had
received when the wolf so savagely sprang at him.  However, he was under
the careful treatment of Memotas, the Christian Indian doctor, whose
fame was in all the land, not only for his marvellous skill, but for his
noble, upright character.

During the days of Mr Ross's recovery, when it was thought best for him
to keep quiet, so that there might be the more rapid recovery, there
were no long excursions made by the boys.  The fact was, they had been
so surfeited with excitement that they were quite contented to remain at
Sagasta-weekee and revel in its library, where they found many an
interesting volume.

Of course this did not mean that they were not much out in the canoes
and among the wigwams of the Indians, who were camped about on the
various points within easy reaching distances.  The natives were always
delighted to see the boys, and utilised what little English they
possessed in order to impart to them as much information as possible.
The visits to Big Tom and Mustagan were always a great pleasure.  As
Mustagan talked English they were not obliged to have an interpreter,
and so enjoyed his company very much, and were always delighted when
they could get him talking on his arctic adventures and narrow escapes
in polar regions.  He was a man with a marvellous history, as he had
been employed in no less than five arctic expeditions.  He was with Sir
John Richardson and Dr Ray on their desperate expeditions, when they so
courageously and persistently endeavoured to make the sullen North
reveal the story of the destruction of Sir John Franklin and his gallant
comrades.  Some of his wonderful adventures we must have from his own
lips after a while.

Although Mrs Ross was, as has been stated, such a refined and cultured
woman, still she had all her nation's love for the canoe and outdoor
life.  The result was, many short excursions were undertaken by her and
her children to various beautiful and picturesque spots within a few
miles from home.

On these excursions one or two faithful well-armed old Indians were
always taken, as it might happen that a fierce old bear or prowling wolf
would unexpectedly make his appearance.  That this precaution was
necessary was clearly proved by an adventure that had occurred some time
before the arrival of the boys.  Mrs Ross, accompanied by her three
youngest children, had taken a large canoe, manned by a couple of
Indians, and had gone to spend the day at Playground Point, which was
ever, as its name would imply, a favourite spot for old and young,
Indians and whites.  They had with them a large basket of supplies, and
anticipated a very pleasant outing.  They reached their destination in
good time, and in various ways were intensely enjoying their holiday.
They had all wandered some distance from the spot where they had landed,
and where the canoe had been drawn up on the beach by the Indians.
These men, after seeing that everything was made right, and that there
were no signs of prowling wild beasts around, had, as Mrs Ross
suggested, taken their axes and penetrated some distance into the
interior of the forest, to see if they could find some large birch
trees, the bark of which would be suitable for a new canoe.

After the young folks had amused themselves for time with their sports
they began to think it was time for a raid upon the lunch basket, and so
Mrs Ross, who had been sitting on a rock reading, shut her book and
accompanied them back to the canoe, where they had left their supplies.
An abrupt turn in the path brought them in plain sight of the canoe,
which was about a hundred yards directly in front of them.  There was a
sight at which they had to laugh, although there was a spice of danger
mixed with it.  Seated up in the canoe, with a large hamper in his lap,
was a good-sized black bear deliberately helping himself to the
contents.  Gravely would he lift up in his handlike paws to his mouth
the sandwiches and cakes, and then he cleared out with great
satisfaction a large bowl of jelly, spilling, however, a good deal of it
on his face.

Mrs Ross would have endeavoured to have noiselessly retreated back with
the children, but the sight of their dinner disappearing down the bear's
throat was too much for them, and so ere the mother could check them, a
simultaneous shout from them alarmed the bear and quickly brought his
meal to a close.  The sudden shouting and the apparition of these people
were too much for him, and so, jamming what food he had at that instant
in his paws in his mouth, he sprang out of the canoe into the water, and
began swimming at a great rate toward a small island that was directly
out from the mainland.  Seeing him thus retreating, and wishing to keep
him at it, Mrs Ross and the children, with all the display and noise
they could make, rushed forward, and thus, if possible, caused him to
redouble his efforts to get away.  This was the wisest thing they could
have done.  A bear is quick to notice whether his presence causes alarm
or not.  A bold front will generally cause him to retreat, while on the
other hand, if he sees any signs of cowardice, or thinks he can terrify
his enemies and cause them to fly from him, he is not slow in being the
aggressor and making the attempt.

Mrs Ross, well knowing some of the characteristics of bears and their
habits, was not to be taken off her guard, and so she was resolved to be
prepared for every emergency.  Her first precaution was to take out one
of the guns and load it well with ball.  Then she explored the lunch
basket to find out the extent of the bear's raid upon it.  To the
children's sorrow they found that the best part of the contents, from
their standpoint, of the hamper was gone.  The cakes and most of the
jam, which in that country is such a luxury, being imported all the way
from England, were all gone.  However, there were some packages of bread
and butter and cold meats, and so they did not starve.

But what about the bear?  The island which he had now reached was not
more than a quarter of a mile away from them.  No other one was near,
and a frightened bear dislikes to be on an island.  He seems to be
conscious of the fact that he is at a disadvantage, and so he will
endeavour to leave it for the mainland as quickly as possible.  Mrs
Ross knew this, and so she felt, after she had thought it over, that, in
all probability, very soon after the bear had reached the island, and
observed its limited area and lack of dense forests, in which he could
hide himself, he would take it into his head for his own personal safety
to quickly return to the mainland.  With this knowledge of the bear's
habits, she resolved to be ready for him in case he made the attempt.
The first thing she did, however, was to endeavour to recall the men who
were at work in the forest.  This was done by taking the other gun from
the boat and heavily loading it with powder.  This when fired made a
very loud report.  Three times in quick succession did Mrs Ross thus
heavily load the gun and fire.  She well knew that if the men were
within hearing the sounds of these three reports, when there were only
two guns, would indicate that something was wrong, and that it was
necessary for them at once to return.

But while the reports were heard by the men and caused them to start on
their return at once, as was desired, they also startled the bear, and
so alarmed and frightened him that he immediately sprang into the water
and began swimming for the mainland.

The situation was exciting and decidedly interesting.  Here on the
mainland was a lady and three young children.

Their Indian protectors were a couple of miles or so away in the rear,
and directly in front, swimming toward them, was a great black bear.
When halfway across from the island he veered a little in order to reach
a point of rock that projected out a little from the mainland not two
hundred yards away from where were Mrs Ross and the children.  The
majority of people would gladly have let the animal escape.  Mrs Ross
and her children, however, were not of this opinion.  His skin would
make a beautiful robe, his flesh was good for food, and his fat was the
substitute for lard in that land, and was therefore valuable.  Then,
worst of all, had he not eaten the cakes, and especially the jam?  So,
of course, mother must shoot him when he comes near the shore, if the
Indians do not arrive in time.  Thus thought the children, anyway.

Mrs Ross first took the precaution to load both guns with bullets.
Then launching the canoe, she had her children get into it, and giving
the older two their paddles, which, young as they were, they could
handle like the Indian children, she gave them their orders.  She would
go to that point toward which the bear was swimming, keeping herself
well hid from his sight.  When he was near to the shore she would fire;
if she did not kill him with the two shots, or only badly wounded him,
she would, after firing, hurry to a spot where they were to wait for her
in the canoe, and then embarking with them they would all be safe on the
water, as they could paddle much faster than the bear could swim, even
if he should try to catch them.

These were wise precautions in case things did not go as were
anticipated.  Everything was soon arranged, and then Mrs Ross, taking
the guns, dropped back a little in the rear, and quietly and quickly
reached a good position behind a rock, not far from where it was now
evident the bear intended to land.  Carefully arranging her weapons, she
waited until the animal was about fifty or sixty yards away, when
resting one of the guns on the rock, she took deliberate aim at the spot
between the eyes and fired.

No second ball was necessary, for suddenly the head went down and a
lifeless body rose and fell on the shining waves.  The bear was stone
dead, and all danger was at once over.

A shout from the children caused her to look, and there she saw it was
caused by the arrival of the two Indians, who, almost breathless, had at
that moment come into view.

As though it were a matter of everyday occurrence, Mrs Ross said to her
men as they reached her:

"Please carry the guns back to the landing place; tell the children to
come ashore; and then you two take the canoe and go and bring in that
dead bear."

The anxiety that had been in the minds of these two Indians during the
last twenty minutes, while they had been running two or three miles,
quickly left them, and there was a gleam of pride in their dark eyes to
think that this cool, brave woman, whose unerring shot had thus killed
the bear, was of their own race and tribe.

Mrs Ross, although cultured and refined and the wife of a great white
man, was always the loving friend of her own people, and did very much
for their comfort and happiness.  Here was something done by her that
would, if possible, still more exalt her in their estimation; and so
this story, with various additions and startling situations added on,
long was a favourite one in many a wigwam, and at many a camp fire.

The bear was soon dragged ashore and skinned.  It was then cut up and
the meat packed away in the canoe.  And the children rejoiced that that
bear would never, never steal any more jam.



CHAPTER ELEVEN.

THE WONDERFUL STORY OF APETAK, THE GRATEFUL INDIAN, AND THE DESCRIPTION
OF THE TRIP TO AND VIEW OF THE SILVER CAVE, AS TOLD BY MR. ROSS AT
SAGASTA-WEEKEE.

"Tell us a true story to-night," said little Roderick, the youngest in
the family and the pet of all, as he climbed up on his father's knee.

"Yes, please, Mr Ross," said Sam, "tell us that wonderful story your
father told you about the old Indian and the silver cave."

It was a capital night for a good story.  The rain was pattering against
the window panes, while the winds, fierce and wild, were howling around
the buildings, making it vastly more pleasant to be inside than out,
even on a first-class hunting excursion.

As Sam's request was re-echoed by all, Mr Ross cheerfully consented,
and so, when they had gathered around him and taken their favourite
places, he began:

"My father was in the service of the Hudson Bay Company for many years.
He began as a junior clerk and worked his way up until he became a chief
factor, which is the highest position next to that of the governor.
During his long career in the service he was moved about a good deal
from one post to another.  The result was, he became acquainted with
various parts of the country and with different tribes of Indians.

"Many years ago, when he had been promoted to the charge of a fairly
good port, the incident I am about to tell you took place.  As master in
charge my father was, of course, as all Hudson Bay Company's officers
are, very anxious to make large returns of fur each year.  The dividends
were greatest when the sales were largest.

"Father had perhaps a hundred hunters at his port, who all were more or
less skillful and successful in this fur hunting.

"There was one old Indian whom we will call Apetak, who was, by all
odds, the most skillful hunter father had.  Not only was he successful
in bringing the greatest quantity of furs to the port, but he was most
fortunate in being able to capture more of the valuable black and silver
foxes and other of the richest fur-bearing animals.  His great success
as a hunter thus made him very much of a favourite with my father.  But,
in addition, he had many very excellent qualities which made him
respected and trusted by all, both whites and Indians.

"One winter, however, he nearly lost his life.  Shortly after the ice
had formed on one of the great lakes in his hunting grounds he shot at
and wounded a great moose.  The animal, mad with the pain of the wound,
dashed out of the forest and made for the lake, on which was but a
covering of thin ice.  He was only able to run on it a few yards ere it
broke under him and let him through into the water.  Apetak did not like
to lose the animal, as there was good meat enough on him to keep his pot
boiling for weeks; so he made a noose in a lasso and tried to get near
enough to throw it over the moose's head, and thus to burden him until
he could get help to get the body out.

"But unfortunately for him he ventured too far out on the poor ice and
broke in.  He managed to get out, but the day was bitterly cold and he
suffered very much.  A bad cold settled upon his lungs, and it seemed as
though he must die.  When my father heard of this he sent his own dog-
sled and plenty of blankets to Apetak's wigwam and brought him to the
trading post, and had him put into a warm, comfortable bed and well
cared for.  He kept him there all winter, and it was not until spring
that he was strong and well.  He had thus lost that winter's hunt, as he
had not been able to set a trap or fire a gun.  However, my father gave
him the necessary supplies in view of his past services, and for this he
was very grateful.

"With the bright spring weather he regained his usual health and once
more entered upon his work.  But he could never forget my father's
kindness, and was anxious in some way to show his gratitude.  Money
there was none then in the country, as everything in the way of trade
was done by barter.  He could not give a present of the rich and
valuable furs, as he well knew father would not be allowed to accept of
them, as the company had made a very strict law against anything of the
kind.  They demanded that all the furs should go into their sale shops,
and not one of their officials, from the governor to the lowest clerk,
dare accept as much as a beaver skin as a present from an Indian.

"Thus was Apetak troubled because he had no way of showing his
gratitude.  The spring passed away and the summer was about half gone
when one evening Apetak, who had not been seen around the trading post
for some weeks, suddenly returned.

"During the evening he asked for the privilege of having a few minutes'
talk with my father.  This, of course, was readily granted.  To my
father's great surprise he had a strange request to make, and it was
this: He wanted my father to allow him to blindfold his eyes, and in
that condition take him on a journey of several days' duration into the
more remote wilderness.  There would be travelling both by the canoe and
walking on land.  Then at the right time he would uncover his eyes and
show him a sight that would please him very much indeed.

"This was a very strange proposition, and for a time my father
hesitated; but knowing so well the reliable character of Apetak, and
having in his constitution a good deal of the spirit of adventure, he at
length consented.  Apetak imposed some conditions upon him that were
very stringent.  One was that he was under no circumstances to divulge
to anyone the fact that he was going away blindfolded.  Another was that
when the journey was completed, and he was safely back at home, he was
not to try and get there again.  And the last was that for so many years
he was never even to mention or refer to the matter to anyone, white or
Indian.  These seemed rather hard conditions, but as father's curiosity
had now been aroused he at length consented, and in a day or two he said
to his head clerk:--

"`I think I will go off on a bit of an excursion for a few days.'

"As these were of frequent occurrence, there was no stir or curiosity
excited.  So, leaving orders as to the business for a few days, he and
Apetak started off with their guns, blankets, and the usual outfit in a
birch canoe.  When away from the post Apetak got out the mask, with
which he blindfolded my father.  It was a most thorough one, not a ray
of light penetrating it.  When it was fastened on Apetak said:--

"`It will be all right, and you will not be sorry for this trip.'

"Taking up his paddle again, Apetak really began the journey.  At first
he paddled the canoe round and round, until my father was completely
bewildered and knew not the north from the south.  Then on and on the
strong Indian paddled for hours.  Of course he and my father talked to
each other, and they laughed and chatted away at a great rate.  They
landed at some portages, and Apetak helped father across, then he went
back for the canoe and supplies.  Thus on they went for several days.
At the camp fire long after the sun was down Apetak would remove the
mask that so blindfolded father, and leave it off until nearly daylight.
But he never took it off until he had so confused him that, when his
eyes were uncovered he could not tell which way they had come.  Early in
the afternoon of about the fourth day Apetak said:--

"`We are nearly at our journey's end.  Soon I will show you what I have
brought you so far to see.'

"This was good news to my father, who had begun to feel this travelling
so long with the close covering on his face very irksome.

"Shortly after, Apetak stopped paddling, and, after helping my father to
land, he lifted his canoe out of the water, and hid it carefully among
the bushes.  Then, placing a large bundle on his back, including his axe
and gun, he started on a land journey of some miles.  As my father was
led along, although he could see nothing, he knew by the rush of air,
and the way they went up and down hill, that they were in a very broken
country.

"`Here is the place,' said Apetak.  `Now very soon I will uncover your
eyes, but before I do it you must follow me into the earth.'

"Then he led my father into what seemed to be an opening on the side of
a great hill or mountain, and, entering first in, he told my father to
walk close behind him and keep his hand on him so that he would not be
lost.  Sometimes the opening was so low that they had to stoop down, and
in other places they had to squeeze through between the rocks.  After a
time they stopped.

"`Now,' said Apetak, `I will take off the covering from your face, but
you will see nothing till I make a light.'

"So it was just as Apetak said.  When the covering was removed from the
eyes so dense was the darkness that my father saw no better than he did
with it on.

"However, that great bundle on Apetak's back was composed of torches for
this place.  And so when the Indian struck a light with his flint and
steel, and lit up some of these torches, they both could see very well.
At first sight what my father saw was a great cave, like a large church
or cathedral, here in the hill or mountain.  Strangely broken was it in
places, and great columns, like stalactites, were very numerous.  There
were others that looked like filigree work.

"Said Apetak: `Look at these great things that look like old lead
bullets.'

"Said my father: `Sure enough, as my eyes became accustomed to the
place, lit up by these flaming torches, I discovered that a great deal
that I thought was native rock was really metal.  At first I thought it
was lead, as so long exposed there it looked like old lead pipes.  But
when I tried to scrape it with my knife I found it was too hard.  Then
Apetak used his axe, and managed to cut down a little for me, and to
scrape or hack it in some other places, and, lo, it was pure silver.

"`At this discovery,' said my father, `I was amazed, for here, visible
to the eye, were thousands of pounds of silver.'

"We both continued to look around and examine it until we had burnt all
but the last torch.  It seemed in some places as though the softer rocks
had gradually dissolved and left the silver here just as we found it.
In other parts it looked as though in some remote period intense fires
had melted it, and it had run down and then hardened in these strange
formations.  Anyway there it was in vast quantities and in various
forms.

"`How did you find it?' asked my father of Apetak.

"His answer was: `I was hunting in this part of the country, and I
caught a fine silver fox by one hind leg in a trap.  Just as I came up
he succeeded in cutting off his leg with his teeth and thus got away.
I, of course, ran after him, when he suddenly disappeared in the mouth
of this cave.  As his skin was so valuable I hurried and got some birch-
bark and balsam gum, and made a large torch, and tracked him by the
blood from his leg into this place.  My torch went out before I caught
him, and I was very much frightened for fear I would here die; but I
managed to find the opening, and got out.  Then I made plenty of torches
and came in again.  I had to search quite a while before I found my fox
and succeeded in killing him.  Then I looked around to see what kind of
a place it was into which the fox had led me.  For the first time I now
saw all this metal.  I first thought it was lead and would supply me
with bullets.  I tried to cut it with my knife and could not succeed.
Then I saw that it was good metal which you call silver, and I knew you
would be pleased to see it.  So that is the reason that I have brought
you here.'

"Soon after my father was again blindfolded and brought safely back to
his home.  He was very much pleased with his wonderful adventure, and
honourably carried out his part of the agreement.  He never in after
years attempted to find the cave, nor did he even speak about it for
many years.  But it is there, nevertheless, and some day the world will
be startled by the story of its discovery, and of the richness of its
hidden stores."

With intense interest the boys, as well as the others present, listened
to this wonderful story.  When it was concluded very many were their
questions and comments.

Then Sam, springing up on a chair, said:

"I move a hearty vote of thanks to Mr Ross for this splendid story
about the cave, and when it is discovered may I be on hand!"

Alec seconded the motion and added:

"With great pleasure I second this motion, and may I be a good second,
close at hand when Sam rediscovers the cave!"

Frank put the motion, and it was carried unanimously.

Mr Ross gracefully responded, and as the fierce storms were still
raging without, and they listened to the howling of the winds, their
thoughts went out to those who were upon the stormy seas, and so they
heartily sang the beautiful hymn wherein is the expressive prayer:

  "O hear us when we cry to Thee
  For those in peril on the sea."

Three Boys in the Wild North Land--by Egerton Ryerson Young



CHAPTER TWELVE.

NOVEL FISHING--GUNS AND GAFF HOOKS--FRANK'S PLUNGE--LIGHT-HEARTED SAM
AND HIS STORY--STRANGE BATTLE--PUGNACIOUS JACK FISH.

The boys were quite fascinated by the wonderful story, which is
undoubtedly true, of the silver cave.  Their imaginations were fired,
and they longed to start off to find those treasures of silver that in
that hidden cave somewhere in the foothills of the northern Rockies are
still hidden away from man's curious, greedy gaze.  Uncertain as are the
whereabouts of Captain Kidd's long-sought-for treasures is the locality
of the cave of silver.

Long years ago Apetak, the old Indian, died and carried with him to the
grave the knowledge of its whereabouts, and old Mr Ross, honourable man
that he was, made no attempt to find it; neither did he state his
impressions as to its locality beyond what is mentioned in his recital
of the story.  But it shows how a good Providence has his treasures of
wealth for the generations to come.  By and by, when it is needed, it
will be found and utilised, as will the vast resources of other mineral
wealth which this great new country has in reserve when the supplies in
older lands begin to be exhausted.

However, in a few short days the story of the silver cave was less and
less talked about, and the lads with Indian attendants were more or less
busily employed in various undertakings.

Sam, who was an enthusiastic fly fisherman, was quite amazed and
disappointed on finding that there was so little of his favourite kind
of fishing in this part of the country.  However, although there was a
lack of success in that kind of fishing, there were many other methods
that were very successful.  One plan that very much interested them was
fishing with a net attached to the small end of a pole.  This they used
in the water, in the same method in which they had been accustomed to
catch moths and butterflies, with their lighter and frailer nets.  They
felt quite elated when a large whitefish or lively trout was brought up
in the almost invisible net.

One day Mr Ross organised a fishing excursion for them, and equipped
three canoes, with a couple of Indians in each to paddle them.  He
placed one boy in charge of each of the canoes, and sent them off in
high spirits to see which canoe would return with the largest load of
fish.  To the boys alone was to be left the work of securing the fish.
The Indians were only to attend to the paddling, and as the men in the
canoe that succeeded in securing the greatest load were to receive, in
addition to their wages, a flannel shirt apiece they all keenly entered
into the spirit of the expedition.

All was needed in each boat for this kind of fishing was a good gun and
a gaff hook with a long handle.  The boys decided to go to Jack River,
which takes its name from the number of jack fish that used to swarm in
its waters.  Not many hours' paddling brought them to their destination,
and then the fun began.

To start even they drew up side by side, and then at the given word away
they all paddled toward a distant spot, where the Indians knew the fish
were likely to be found in large numbers.  So evenly matched were the
canoemen that they were not far apart when they arrived at the
designated locality.  So they widened the space between their canoes,
and noiselessly paddled up to where the disturbed waters, and many back
and tail fins told of the presence of the gamey fish.

For the first firing it was decided that it should be simultaneous, and
then after that it was each canoe for itself, and they were not to meet
till they reached Mr Ross's launch.

This method of fishing is very novel.  The guns, heavily loaded with
powder, are fired as nearly over the fish as it is possible to be done
from the canoe.  The concussion of the air seems to so stun them that
they stiffen out on their backs, and there lie apparently dead for a
minute or so.  The men hunting them, aware of this, the instant they
have fired immediately set to work with their long-handled gaff hooks,
and gather in as many as they can ere the fish return to consciousness,
and those not captured instantly swim off.

When all have been secured at that place as the result of that one heavy
discharge of the gun, the canoe is paddled away to another spot where it
is observed that the fish are plentiful near the surface and the process
is repeated.  So for this kind of fishing all that is necessary is the
gun, with a plentiful supply of powder, and the gaff hook.  A good deal
of skill is required for the efficient management of the hook in seizing
the fish so that it can be successfully landed over the side of the
canoe.

For a time the success of the boys was about equal, but they did not
capture after each shot anything like the number of fish that their
able-bodied, experienced Indians would have done.  It is no easy matter
to lift a twenty or thirty pound fish by a hook over the side of a
canoe.  The boat itself is so cranky, and the fish themselves are
generally so full of life and fight, that there is a good deal of risk
and excitement, after all, about this kind of sport.  It is no uncommon
thing for an upset to occur in the risk and glorious uncertainty of
capturing a large, gamy fellow who makes a stubborn fight.

The three canoes gradually separated, and to judge by the frequent
reports of the guns they were having a good deal of sport.  About eight
p.m. they were all back at Sagasta-weekee, and each had a different
story to tell.

Frank had over a score of very fine fish, and had had only one fall into
the water.  He had hooked in his gaff a large, vigorous fish, and was
making the most careful efforts to hang on to him and to lift him over
the side of the canoe.  Just as he had him nicely out of the water, the
fish, by a sudden furious struggle, wrenched himself off the hook and
fell back in the water.

Frank had been so firmly holding on that when the weight of the fish was
so suddenly gone he could not master his balance, and before an Indian
could seize hold of him he tumbled head first into the water on the
other side of the canoe, and the last the Indians saw of him for some
seconds were the bottoms of his moccasins.  Quickly did he reappear and
was soon helped into the canoe; but while he pluckily stuck to the sport
for some time, the prudent Indians persuaded him to allow them to early
paddle him home.  So he had been the first to arrive.

Sam's canoe arrived somewhat later; he also had a goodly supply of fish.
As he was saturated with water, the question was at once asked, what
had been his mishap.

At first he was a little glum about it, but the cry of "Tell us all
about it," had to be responded to.

It had been decided some time before that on their returning from these
different excursions each one was to fairly and squarely give the story
of his misadventures, blunders, and failures, as well as of his triumphs
and successes.  So Sam had to own up, and he began by the odd question:

"Have you any whales in these lakes or rivers?"

This odd question was met by a hearty laugh all round.

"Well, then, I'm after thinking you must have plenty porpoises, or the
likes of such things; for I am certain that it was one of such gentry I
struck to-day."

Happy, light-hearted Sam, bright and cheery he ever was, it was a joy to
hear him when, with a twinkle in his bright eye, he came out with his
quaint remarks.  His odd question only the more excited the curiosity of
his listeners, and so amid the laughter and call for the story of his
mishaps, he had to let them have it:

"Well, the fact is, we were having a good time, and at every discharge
of my gun I would stun quite a number and succeeded in getting some of
them into our canoe with the gaff hook all right.  Getting a little
careless with my success, I asked the Indian sitting before me to let me
get in the very front of the canoe.  At one place where I saw a big
beauty I stood up and reached out as far as I could, and getting the
gaff hook under him I gave him a great jerk to be sure and have it well
hooked into him, when, lo and behold, before I could say `Jack
Robinson,' I was out head first into the water hanging on to my end of
the pole, while the monster of a fish was at the other on his way to
York Factory, it seemed to me."

"Why didn't you let go?" said Alec.

"Let go!" he replied, with a comical look, "sure the creature didn't
give me time to let go; and then, when I came to my senses, didn't I
remember that the gaff hook, pole, and all belonged to Mr Ross, and how
could I face him and his gaff hook on its way to York Factory."

No one laughed more heartily than Mr Ross at the quaint answer.  He had
most thoroughly entered into the enjoyment of this odd adventure.

"Well, where is the gaff now?" he asked.

"Sure, it's in the boat, sir, and the fish, too," said Sam.  "Do you
think I'd have had the face to come home so early without it?"

This answer amused and more deeply interested all, and so Sam had to
give the full account of his doings after his sudden jerk over the front
of the canoe.

Some of these jack fish grow to be six feet in length, and are very
strong.  It seems it was one of the very largest that Sam had the good
or ill fortune to hook.

With a tremendous jerk he was fairly lifted out of the boat, and seemed
to skim along on the water with the fish like a small tug in front
towing him along.  Fortunately it was in a large, shallow place, where
the water was not more than four feet deep, and so the fish was unable
to dive and had to keep near the surface.  As rapidly as possible the
Indians used their paddles, and so were soon able to seize hold of Sam.
They found him holding on to the one end of the gaff hook, while on the
other the now about exhausted fish was still securely fastened.  This
was the Indian statement of the adventure.

Sam's account was that when he went out of that canoe so suddenly he
resolved to hang on to his end of that gaff hook as long as the fish did
at the other.  It was a new sensation, and he enjoyed it amazingly to be
thus ploughing along through the water towed by a fish.  Then he felt
sure that the fish could not keep it up very long and the canoe would
not be far off; so he resolved to hang on to his fish until the men
picked them both up.  After the first sensation of the ducking, he said
he much enjoyed the fun.  The water was warm, and he knew that if he had
to let go he could easily swim until the canoe came to his assistance.

Alec had had no accidents or adventures.  He had often gone out with
older people fishing in the streams of his native country, where he had
helped to land the spent salmon after they had been well played by the
fishermen, and this training had come to his help here; so he had the
greatest number of the finest fish and the largest, excepting, of
course, this one monster of Sam's that had played him such a trick.

Only for a short time in each summer can these jack fish be successfully
captured in this way.  So during the next few days the boys went out
several times and had some rare sport without any very startling
adventures.

One day, however, when resting on a high rock that overhung the deep
waters of the lake they were visiting, they were the spectators of a
battle between two fierce jack fish that fought and grappled and tore
each other with all the ferocity of bulldogs.

As such sights are extremely rare, we will give a description of this
marine battle.  A number of the female fish were first observed slowly
passing through the clear waters and depositing their roe on the
gravelly bottom.  Following in the rear were several of the male fish.
They were, as usual, extremely jealous of each other, but for a time
made no attempt at hostilities.

It is a well-known fact that a person situated some height directly over
water can see much farther down into it than those who are close to its
edge.  So in this case the boys could see the fish distinctly, and also
the gravelly bottom of the lake.  While interested in watching the
movements of the fish, suddenly there was a commotion among them, and
the boys were excited and amazed to see two of the largest of the jack
fish suddenly seize each other in their enormous jaws and make the most
determined efforts to conquer.  So securely locked together were their
jaws that in their struggles they several times rolled over and over in
the water.

After a minute or two of this desperate struggling they separated and
seemed to be in distress.  But their fury was not spent, and so after
circling around in the water a little they rushed at each other with the
greatest speed, almost like two fierce rams.  Then with open mouths
again they bit and tore each other, until once more locking their jaws
they each exerted all their strength to vanquish their opponent.  Thus
it went on until they had had several rounds in this fierce way.  How it
would have ended we know not.  As they fought they moved along the
coast, and in order to see them to advantage the boys had to shift their
position.  One of them unfortunately rose up so high that, the sun being
behind him in the heavens, his shadow was cast on the waters over the
two fierce combatants.  As quick as a flash they let go their grip on
each other and dashed off in opposite directions.

Very much disappointed were the boys that the battle came to such an
abrupt termination.  They would have liked to see such a strange
conflict fought out to the end.

Three Boys in the Wild North Land, by Egerton R.  Young



CHAPTER THIRTEEN.

MISSION VILLAGE--SELF-DENYING TOILERS--PLEASANT VISITS--FLOURISHING
SCHOOL--SYLLABIC CHARACTERS--COMPETITIVE SPORTS--ARCHERY--FOOT RACES--
WRESTLING--SWIMMING--CANOE RACES.

Not many miles from Sagasta-weekee was an Indian mission village.  There
a devoted missionary, Mr Evans, with his brave wife and a lady teacher,
Miss Adams, were nobly toiling and were not unsuccessful in their
efforts to Christianise and then to civilise the Indians.  They were
pursuing the right methods in trying to Christianise first, as it has
ever seemed an impossibility to get much of an abiding civilisation out
of a pagan Indian.  However, this devoted man with his helpers was not
toiling in vain.  It is true that there were not many encouragements in
their efforts to civilise in a land where hunting and fishing were
nearly the only way by which a livelihood could be obtained.

One day there came from the mission an invitation to all at Sagasta-
weekee who could come, to attend the annual examination of the village
school, and to observe the progress made by the Indian children in the
studies both in the Indian and English languages.

Mr Ross had taken, since the beginning of the mission, a great interest
in the school, and not only attended at these examinations, but donated
prizes for competition among the children.

Frank, Alec, and Sam were delighted to be included among the invited
ones, as their curiosity was aroused to see the Indian youngsters in the
school.  They had seen them at their sports, and had admired their
cleverness with their bows and arrows, and had almost envied the skill
and daring with which they could, in rapids or on stormy waters, manage
their light canoes.

When the morning arrived for the visit, Mr Ross sent on a canoe well-
loaded with supplies for a substantial lunch for the children when the
examinations were over, and he gave a hint to the boys that if they had
anything extra lying around that they did not specially need they would
doubtless have an opportunity to make some little dark-eyed, swarthy-
faced Indian children rejoice.  So the hint was taken, and in due time
they all embarked in their canoes, and, adding their own strokes to
those of the strong Indians who had been secured by Mr Ross, they were
at the mission village before nine o'clock.  They met with a very
cordial greeting from Mr and Mrs Evans, and also from Miss Adams.

It was a great pleasure to the boys to see the Indian children in the
school.  Very frequently when the weather was fine had Mr Ross brought
his family and guests to church on Sabbath mornings, but, as up to the
present time the young white gentlemen had not yet visited the mission
on a week day, all they saw now was novel and interesting.  It was
arranged that the school examinations should take place in the forenoon;
then, after they had partaken of the handsome lunch which Mr Ross had
prepared for them, they were to have the usual games and sports in the
afternoon.

A number of prizes were to be contended for by the young Indians.  It is
true that from a civilised standpoint these prizes would not be
considered of much value, but by these young Indians they were much
valued.  And then the honour of being the winner is just as much prized
by them as it has ever been in more highly favoured lands.

The missionary had the worthy idea in his mind that, as these native
races have so little literature in their own language, the sooner they
learned English the better for them.  The result was that all the
lessons were in the two languages, with a decided preference for the
English as their studies advanced.

This was the first opportunity the boys had had of seeing the methods,
by which Mr Evans's syllabic characters were taught to the Indians.
With a home-made blackboard, and a very white kind of clay as a
substitute for chalk, these syllabic characters were put down upon the
board like the alphabet, and there to be studied like the A, B, C's.  It
was committed to memory.  The peculiarity about it, as the name
"syllabic" implies, is that each character is a syllable, and so there
is really no spelling in the language.

These are phonetic in character, and so, when the thirty-six characters
are impressed upon the memory, all that remains to be done is to open
the book, be it Bible, Testament, hymn book, prayer book, or catechism,
and begin to read; no long, tedious efforts at learning to spell first
words of one syllable, then words of two syllables, and so on.  Each
character is a syllable, and thus the method of learning to read is so
simple that the intelligent boys and girls learn to read in their own
language in a few weeks.  Even many of the old people, when they
renounce their pagan life and become Christians, readily get to
understand these characters and learn to read.

With the mastery of English, and learning to read in the ordinary way,
the work is very much slower.  Still even here there is some progress,
and the visitors were all pleased with the intelligence and aptitude of
the scholars, both boys and girls.  Mr Ross, who understood their
language perfectly, at Mr Evans's request conducted the examinations,
and Mrs Ross presented the prizes.

After the hearty lunch, which was very much enjoyed by the youngsters--
for Indians have glorious appetites--the sports and competitions for
various prizes began.

The highest prize, a good gun, presented by Mr Ross for archery, was
won by a son of Mamanowatum, "Big Tom," and richly did he deserve it.
At a hundred yards he sent every arrow of his well-filled quiver
whizzing through a paper hoop not three feet in diameter.  For this
prize there were several competitors, and some of the lads did well; but
only the winner sent every arrow through, so this one was easily
decided.

The "many arrow" prize was not so easily decided, as there were many
competitors and they were evenly matched.  This was a competition among
them to see who could get the greatest number of arrows into the air at
the same time.  The method is this.  Only one competes at a time.  He
fills his quiver with arrows and places it on his back as he would to
carry it in hunting.  Then he steps out a few feet in front of the
crowd, who to escape accident from falling arrows are all behind him.
He is allowed to feather the first arrow in the bow string, and then at
a given signal he instantly shoots.  The object is to see how many
arrows he can shoot into the air before the first one fired reaches the
ground.  It is a very interesting sight to watch a contest of this kind.
The eye can hardly follow, not only the arrows, but the rapid movements
of the archer, as he draws the arrows and shoots them with all his might
up into the blue sky above.  Eight, ten, yes, sometimes even a dozen
arrows are thus sent with wondrous rapidity, sometimes following so
closely that it seems at times to the eye as though some succeeding
would catch up to the ones just on ahead.  The greater rapidity of the
arrow just leaving the bow than that of those some hundreds of feet up
adds to this delusion.

This was ever with the Indians, ere the introduction of guns, a very
favourite sport, not only in these forest regions, but among the wild,
warlike tribes of the prairies.  Exciting contests were numerous, and
sometimes rivals from different tribes contended for the honours in this
and other kinds of archery practice and feats of skill with the bow and
arrow.  Catlin's brush has given us one of these exciting scenes.

After the various kinds of archery competitions the foot races began.
The first was the long race over a course that had been marked out for
two miles of a shore and back.  It was not all an unbroken sandy beach.
Out in some places there were rock obstructions, and in others dense
underbrush.  It was a race over a course that could well be styled good,
bad, and indifferent.  It was one not only to test the endurance of the
lads, but to develop their judgment in the quickness of decision when in
a part full of difficulties.  About a dozen competitors entered for this
race, and there were three prizes that were well-earned.

Then there were races for shorter distances, which were well run.

When the half-mile race was about to be run, which was open to all
comers, Alec rather mischievously suggested to Sam that he ought to
enter for this, as his practice in that famous escapade with the bear,
where he ran with such marvellous rapidity, might have turned out a good
training for this occasion.  To the surprise of all, when Frank added
his banter to the others, Sam sprang up and asked permission from Mr
Ross, who was somewhat amused at this request, as he felt sure Sam would
be hopelessly beaten; but he readily granted Sam's desire.  Surprises
often come from unexpected quarters.  Sam quickly stripped off his outer
garments and, much to the Indians' delight, took his place among them.
Over twenty competitors started.  The race was a spurt from the
beginning.  To the surprise and delight of the whites, Sam came in
second, being only beaten by Emphasis, a noted runner, and whose name
means "the young deer."

Old Kapastick, the chief, was so delighted with Sam's success that he
presented to him a second prize, which was a pair of beautiful Indian
moccasins.

After these running races were the wrestling matches, and as Sam's
success had fired the ardour of both Alec and Frank, and had raised him
so much in the eyes of the Indians; they asked permission to try their
sturdy English and Scottish strength against the supple agility of these
lithe Indians.  For good reasons Mr Ross only permitted one of them to
enter into this competition, and as Frank had a school reputation among
his chums at home he was settled on to uphold the honour of the paleface
against the dark-skinned Indians.  Eight competitors entered the lists,
so there were four pairs of wrestlers, and the conquerors in each bout
would have to wrestle with each other, until eventually the prize winner
would have to throw three competitors.

At this time there was great interest in wrestling contests, but being
objected to by so many they have about disappeared in these later years
from the Indian mission schools.

The competitors were all placed in pairs upon the green, soft grass, and
warned not to get angry, but each to do the best he could to down his
opponent.  It was "catch as you can," and get your opponent down until
both of his shoulders at the same time touch the ground.

Face to face, and with their hands extended so that they just touched
their opponent's, they waited the "How" of the chief to begin the
exciting struggle.

Frank was matched against a splendid young fellow, lithe and supple as
an eel.  So quick was he that, as Frank afterward said, "Before he had
more than heard the word `go,' the fellow seemed to wind himself around
me and twist all over me."  But Frank had what boys know as the "power
to hold his feet," and so, in spite of the cyclonic attack, he stood
firm and solid merely on the defensive, until he got a home grip that
suited him, and then with one quick, skillful twist he laid out his
opponent so neatly on the grass that the crowd gave him quite a cheer, a
difficult thing for an Indian crowd to do.

The other three pairs of contestants being Indians, and up to all Indian
wiles, struggled much longer ere the victors were announced.  Now the
four conquerors in these struggles were again matched, two against two.

When Frank tried his favourite trick, which had won him his first
victory, he found that his second competitor had, although busy at the
time with his first opponent, observed it, and was not to be so easily
caught.  Then Frank, after they had each tried various schemes well-
known to good wrestlers, very suddenly seized him fair and square around
the waist as they stood face to face, and, by what the boys know as the
"back-hold," threw him neatly and cleverly on his back.  So Frank by
throwing the two had thus won the right to contend in the final struggle
for the prize with the victor who, like himself, had also thrown two
opponents.

Very excited yet very good-humoured were the people, whites and Indians.
There was no betting or anything else to make anyone mad or angry.  It
was a friendly tussle of strength between young lads under the eye of
the missionary, who was ever at the front in their sports, and hence his
marvellous influence over them for good.

The final struggle was a very close and continued one.  Each had his
clever tricks and plans, but they were well met by the other side.
After a time Frank thought he had a splendid back-hold, and suddenly
tried to finish the contest like he had the second one.  But he had a
different lad this time.  His supple _vis-a-vis_ so quickly turned
around in his grasp that, when Frank landed him on the ground, the
laughing Indian lad was fair on his face instead of on his shoulders.
Mr and Mrs Ross and the mission party led the crowd in the applause as
they witnessed the clever trick.  Up again and at it with varying
success.  There was one other method sometimes tried elsewhere that
Frank had in his mind when he had failed in his other plans.  He had
sometimes tried it, but had not often been successful in doing so, as
his white competitors were generally on their guard against it.  He
hesitated to try it here from the fact that his supple opponent was so
slightly clothed there was but little upon which to get much of a grip.
All these Indian lads had stripped to their moccasins, leggings, and
loin cloths, while Frank had only taken off his coat and vest.  However,
as Frank was not able to succeed in other ways he determined to try it,
but to insure success he must not let his opponent have any suspicion of
it.  So as they struggled in various ways Frank several times so gripped
him that he lifted him off his feet in a way that, after the first few
times, the Indian seemed to be amused at it.  This was just what Frank
wanted, and so he let him have his laugh, while, alert against any
surprise, he watched for the right instant, and then suddenly, when it
came, he gripped him by the loin cloth and so completely threw him over
his head that he had him on his back with both shoulders on the ground
ere the crowd, quick and watchful as they were, could realise how it had
been done.  A cheer greeted this well-earned victory, and Frank said he
had had enough for one day.

Frank was the idol of the Indian lads from that hour, and to many a one
had he to show how that clever feat had been performed, until they were
able to do it themselves, to the astonishment of Indian boys from other
villages with whom they competed.

As the spirit of emulation was up in every heart, Frank and his comrades
went in for the swimming contest, which took place in the beautiful bay
not far from the spot where stands the schoolhouse.

The white lads held their own for a time, but as the course marked out
was new to them and they were out of practice, while the Indian lads had
been in almost daily drill for the event, until they were as much at
home in the water as otters, they gradually forged ahead, and not being
so fleshy as their white competitors they nearly all of them came in as
victors.

However, our boys were glad to have had the glorious swim, and only
regretted that, amid the many other sports in which they had had such
pleasure since their arrival, they had not given more attention to
swimming.  Alec was not slow in saying that he believed, if they had
been in practice for a few days, they would not have all been at the
tail end of the string at the close of the race.

The closing contests were the canoe races.  For them the prizes were
given by the Hudson Bay Company's officials.  These gentlemen were
present at the previous contests, and had been very much interested.
First there were races where only one lad was in each canoe.  In
addition to paddling out to and around a certain island they were to
twice, out in deep water, upset their canoe and, unaided, get into it
again.  This was rare sport, and while to persons unacquainted with
these youngsters, who are as much at home in the water as beavers, it
would seem dangerous, such a thing as any of them coming to harm is
unknown.  The cleverness with which they would turn over and upset the
canoe and then get into it, never over the side but at the end, was
marvellous.

These various races, some with two, and others with four, Indian lads in
them, were well contested, and gave great pleasure to all the
spectators.

At the close the Indian boys, who perhaps were none too well satisfied
with the white lads for having carried off both a first and second
prize, went to Mr Ross, and through him challenged the white boys to a
canoe race.  This our lads promptly accepted, but, of course, demurred
against the canoe upsetting process and climbing in again.  This was
agreed to by the Indian boys, and it was decided the race was to be to a
large rocky island about a mile out and return.  They were, however,
both to paddle twice around the island ere they returned on the home
stretch.

Two canoes were selected; and the Hudson Bay chief Factor was appointed
the judge.  Ever since the arrival of the boys in the country they had
been learning how to manage the frail but beautiful birch canoe, and so
were no unworthy competitors to these young Indians, whose summer lives
were almost all spent in paddling their light canoes.  A good start was
made, and while the alert Indians secured the advantage the good, steady
paddling of the heavier white boys enabled them, ere the island was
reached, to have their canoe a good half-length ahead of their dusky
opponents.  But here at the island the long practice of the Indians in
the management of the canoe gave them a decided advantage.  While Alec,
who plied the stern paddle, and thus was responsible for the turning
round and round the island, was cautiously and safely doing his work,
the Indians with a flash and a laugh went round and round, cutting off
corners where he never dreamed there was sufficient depth of water, and
were away on the home stretch with so many lengths to their advantage
that, in spite of their magnificent finish, our boys were utterly unable
to catch up.

The Indians winning this race put everybody in the best of humour, and
when, after a hearty lunch at the Mission House, our party paddled home
in the long summer gloaming it was voted to have been one of the most
delightful of days.

Good resulted from this visit in various ways.  From that day forward
Frank and his comrades were very much more interested in mission work.
Although their families were members of different churches in the home
land, and all were interested in missionary operations for the genuine
benefit and uplifting of earth's millions who were in the darkness of
paganism, here for the first time the boys had the opportunity of seeing
for themselves something that was being done for these once degraded red
men, around whom such a halo of romantic interest has ever gathered.

Then it was instructive to these sturdy, active white boys to come in
contact with young Indians in their sports and hunting, and to observe
the points in which each excelled and to study the reasons why.

In the management of the canoe the white boys never learn to equal the
Indian lads, neither could it be expected that they could attain to the
accuracy with which they use their bows and arrows; but in all trials of
physical strength the Anglo-Saxon ever excels, and, surprising as it may
appear to some, in shooting contests with gun or rifle the pale faces
are ever able to hold their own.

Three Boys in the Wild North Land--by Egerton Ryerson Young



CHAPTER FOURTEEN.

CONJURERS--OLD TAPASTANUM--BOASTING--CHALLENGE ACCEPTED--MEDICINE MAN'S
TENT--BOGUS BULLET--DETECTED--CONJURER'S DEFEAT AND FALL.

Not long after the visit to the mission and the School Mr Ross was
visited by a number of old pagan medicine men and conjurers, the most
noted of them being old Tapastanum, who, having heard of the visit of
the young gentlemen from across the sea to the family of Sagasta-weekee,
was anxious to make them a visit of ceremony.  Tapastanum's principal
reason for a ceremonious visit was that he should not be eclipsed by
"the Black-coat Man with the Book."

Mr Ross, while receiving these old men as he received all Indians, in a
civil manner, was not at all kindly disposed toward them, as he knew
their influence was harmful and that they were a curse and a malediction
to the people.  Their very presence in an Indian village is a source of
terror and fear.  They never hunt or fish themselves as long as they can
frighten other people into being blackmailed by them.

The coming of these men very much excited Sam and Alec, who had heard
such extraordinary things about them.  Some firmly believe that they are
in league with the devil, and, by his direct assistance, are able to
perform all the wonderful things, of which they boast.  Others, however,
believe that they are rank impostors.  The boys, who had heard so many
conflicting things about these conjurers, tried to coax Mr Ross to get
them to show off some of their pretended power.

For a time Mr Ross, who considered them only as clever scoundrels or
unmitigated humbugs, objected, as he did not wish to seem in any way to
encourage them.  However, one day as they, from Mr Ross's reluctance to
put them to the test, became exceedingly boastful of their powers to do
such wonderful things it was decided to give them an opportunity.

"What do you say you can do?" asked Frank of old Tapastanum.

"Do," he replied, "I can so conjure that you cannot hit me with a
bullet, or tie me so that I cannot spring up loose; and fire will not
burn me, or water drown me."

"All right," said Frank, "one thing at a time.  We will try the first,
and see if we cannot hit you with a bullet."

"What you give?" was the request of the old fellow.

"O, indeed, that is what you are after; well, what do you want?"

At first his demands were very unreasonable, but after some dickering it
was decided that if he stood the ordeal he was to get an agreed amount
of flour, tea, sugar, and tobacco.  It was also settled that the ordeal
should come off the next day.  The conjurer said that he would spend the
night with his medicine drum and sacred medicine bag, to call back his
familiar spirit, who might be away hunting.  The boys discussed very
much the coming contest, and, of course, were profoundly interested.
They had learned much since their coming into the country about these
strange, wild, fearsome people, and this with what they had read in
other days filled them with great curiosity to see what would be the
outcome.

With Mr Ross and the family the matter was well talked over, and it was
determined--as Mr Ross considered the conjurer who was to go through
the ordeal an unmitigated fraud--that he should be taught a lesson that
he and his cronies would never forget.

When the morning arrived the old fellows were there in good time, and
the ordeal, which was to-day to be by bullet, was decided upon.

The conjurer selected for the ordeal had not proceeded far in his talk
before he asked to see laid down at his wife's feet his pay.  This was
brought out and measured to his satisfaction, with the understanding
that it was not to be his unless he succeeded.

His preparations were soon completed.  Aided by his comrades, a small
conjuring tent was made by sticking some long green limber poles in the
ground, and bending them over like bows until the other ends were also
made fast in the earth.  Then over these poles a skin tent, made by
sewing a number of dressed deerskins together, was thrown.  Taking his
medicine bag and magic drum into this tent, the conjurer disappeared.
Soon the monotonous drumming began.  In addition there were heard the
barks and howls and cries of nearly all the animals of the forest and
prairies.  The sounds were like that proceeding from a wild beast show
when all the animals are let louse and are uttering their discordant
notes.  The tent quivered as though in a cyclone.  Thus, for a time it
went on--the drum beating, the beasts howling, the tent quivering--until
it seemed utterly inexplicable how one man, could create such a din.

Among the boys, Sam was most excited at these strange proceedings.  Much
to the amusement of those around, he said:

"I'm thinking the safest place would be on the top of the house, if all
those reptiles should break loose."

The conjurer now began crying out in his own language: "To help me he is
coming, my own familiar spirit.  Soon the bullet cannot pierce me; soon
waters cannot drown me; soon fires cannot burn me.  To help me he is
coming! coming! coming!"

Thus on he went, while the drumming and howlings were almost incessant.

Mr Ross, who had resolved that there should be no nonsense, had asked
one of his servants, who was an unerring shot, to do the firing.  In the
meantime one of the conjurer's associates had asked to see the gun that
was to be used, and kindly offered to load it.  The suspicions of Mr
Ross were at once aroused by this request, but wishing to see through
the man's trick he did not oppose his request.  Soon after a good gun
was sent for, and also some powder and bullets.  Full measure of powder
was poured into the gun, and the usual wadding was well driven down upon
it.  When Mr Ross selected a bullet the friend of the conjurer, with a
great pretence of awe, asked to see it, and holding it in his hand said,
"This is the bullet that the familiar spirit will turn aside."

Mr Ross let him look at it, and saw him handling it with much apparent
reverence, but he also saw him quickly and deftly change it for another
bullet.

"That's your game, is it?" said Mr Ross but not out loud.  After a
little more humbuggery the bullet was handed back to be dropped into the
muzzle of the gun.

If Mr Ross's thoughts could have been heard they would have been
something like this:

"I have seen through that little trick, and will show you that two can
play at that game."

And so without exciting the suspicion of the Indian, whose trick he had
detected, he changed the bullet for another, and dropped it into the
gun.  When the wadding was driven in and placed upon it, the confederate
of the conjurer asked for the privilege of being allowed also to help
ram it down.  Mr Ross saw his meaning and cheerfully granted it.  The
weapon was now loaded and ready for use.  All this time the drumming and
the conjuring had continued with all their accompaniments of howls and
shrieks.

In a short time a shrill, low whistle, like the call of some bird, was
heard, and Mr Ross observed that it was from the lips of the old Indian
who had pretended to examine the bullet with such awe, but who had in
reality exchanged it for a perfectly harmless one.  He and the conjurer
were associates in their trickery.  The bullet had been made in this
way: A pair of bullet moulds had been heated quite hot, and then some
bear's fat, which is like lard, had been put inside of them.  Holding
the moulds shut, and placing them in very cold water, they kept turning
them around until the melted fat had hardened into a thin shell exactly
the size of a bullet.  Then a small puncture was made through this thin
casing of fat, and the interior carefully filled up with fine sand.  It
was not difficult then to stop up the orifice with a little fat.  It was
then carefully coloured like a bullet, and at a distance could hardly be
distinguished from one.  When put in a gun and well pounded with a
ramrod, of course, it would break all to pieces, and when fired at
anything like an ordinary distance for ball firing would be perfectly
harmless.

But Mr Ross's cleverness had been too much for the rogues, and so he
had changed the bogus affair for a genuine bullet of lead.  To his
servant, who was to fire, he explained exactly how matters were, and had
said to him:

"Do not kill the rascal, but give him a wound that will forever stop his
boastings, and break his power over the poor deluded hundreds, who
firmly believe he can do what he has so boastfully declared."

The low, shrill whistle call had made a great change upon the conjurer
in the tent.  He was now all boastfulness, and his cries were like the
shouts of triumph:

"Waters cannot drown me; bullets cannot pierce me; fires cannot burn
me."

"Are you sure you are ready?" said Mr Ross.

Shouting his defiance, the conjurer came out from the tent, and walking
to a place where he knew the fine sand in the bullet of bear's grease
would not hurt him, he boldly stood up, and stretching out his hands
defied the shooter to do his best.

"You are sure, are you, that bullets will not hurt you?" said Mr Ross.

Very haughty was the conjurer's reply.  Then said Mr Ross again; "If
you are hurt, no one will be to blame."

"No, indeed," was the conjurer's reply, "for I have given the challenge,
and my familiar spirit has told me that the bullets cannot pierce me."

"If you are struck, then you will give up your conjuring, and go and
hunt for your own living, like other people?"

He hesitated for a moment, but the low, shrill whistle was once more
heard, and so he fairly shouted out:

"If bullets can pierce me I will forever give up my conjuring, and
destroy my magic drum and medicine bag."

"All right," said Mr Ross; then, turning to his servant, he said, "Now,
Baptiste, fire!"

Taking deliberate aim, the man fired, and, as the report rang out, from
one of the uplifted hands of the conjurer who was standing about fifty
yards away--there fell a finger, as neatly cut off by the bullet as
though a surgeon's knife had done the work.

With a howl of rage and pain most decidedly un-Indian-like, the conjurer
began dancing about, much to the amusement of the boys, who a moment
before were pale with pent-up excitement; for it is rather trying to
look on and see in the hands of a skillful marksman a gun loaded with
ball and pointed at this boastful man, who was willing to put his magic
against the skill of the finest shot of the country.

Much to the surprise of all but Mr Ross and one or two others who saw
through the trick, the old fellow, with his wounded hand still profusely
bleeding, rushed over to his confederate and began abusing him most
thoroughly for having deceived him.  This attack the man resented, and a
first-class quarrel was the result.  Around them gathered numbers of
Indians, and in the mutual recriminations of these two the truth came
out, and the people saw that they had long been deluded by a pair of
impostors.  From that, day they were discredited men, and never after
regained any power or influence.

That evening Mr Ross explained to the boys the whole affair.  He showed
them the bogus bullet, and explained to them how it was made.  The boys
admitted that it was a clever trick, and were not satisfied until they
had made several of them in the manner described.

Thus ended their first and last experience with Indian conjurers, and it
thoroughly convinced them that they are only cunning impostors.



CHAPTER FIFTEEN.

OUTING--ALEC AND MUSTAGAN'S SHOOTING CONTEST, OR GUN VERSUS BOW AND
ARROW-SHOOTING THE SWANS--WAS SAM CROSS-EYED?--THE RETURN TRIP--THE
ESCAPE OF THE DOE AND FAWN FROM THE WOLF.

As Mr Ross had quite recovered, it was resolved to go again on an
extended trip to the country in the region of Montreal Point, and have
some hunting in that section of country.  Some Indian hunters had come
in from that place, and reported the entire absence of wolves.  This was
not to be wondered at, on account of the number that had been shot in
the fierce conflict which there took place.  It is also a fact well-
known to wolf hunters that when a pack has been severely defeated the
survivors at once retreat to some distant regions.

As the weather was very fine, Mrs Ross and the younger members of the
family accompanied them as far as to the Old Fort.  They travelled in a
large and roomy canoe especially made for them.  It was manned by four
Indians, who were very proud of their charge.  Frank and Sam, with an
Indian hunter, occupied another canoe, while Mr Ross had with him Alec
and Mustagan.

As the ducks and other gamy birds were numerous, they had some good
shooting from their canoes as they paddled along.  At times they were
able to fire into large flocks, then again they tried their skill on a
single bird as it rapidly flew by.

Said Mustagan to Alec: "You take gun, I take bow and arrow, and we see
who shoot best."

"All right," said Alec, "I'll try."

So it was decided that when the next duck flew over them Alec was to try
first.  If he missed, Mustagan was to shoot, and thus they would
alternately fire--first Alec, and then Mustagan; then Mustagan first,
and then Alec.  The one who killed five ducks or other game first was to
be considered victor.  Mr Ross, who entered heartily into the spirit of
the contest, took the steering paddle while the white lad and the old
Indian tried their skill.  It was a contest between gun and powder
_versus_ bow and arrow.

Soon a fine mallard duck came flying along.  Alec let drive at it, and
missed.  Quick as a flash Mustagan's bow was up and his arrow sighted
and sent after it with such accuracy that it caught it fairly under one
of the wings, killing it instantly.

"The best shot I ever saw!" shouted Alec, in genuine admiration.

The head of Mustagan's arrow was the thigh bone of the wild swan, which
is about solid, and makes a capital arrow head for duck shooting, as it
is heavy, and can be made so sharp as to easily pierce the body of the
game.

The next object was a solitary beaver sitting on a bank quite
unconcerned.  Mr Ross said afterward that in all probability it was an
old, sullen fellow that had been driven away by the others from some
distant beaver house, and had come and dug a burrow somewhere in that
bank and was there living alone.

As it was Mustagan's turn to shoot first, he carefully selected his
heaviest arrow, the head of which was a piece of barbed steel.  Having
examined the shaft to see that it was perfectly straight, he shot it
with all his strength.  No need for Alec to fire, for deep down into the
skull of the animal had the steel head gone, instantly killing him.
When it was lifted into the canoe Alec was surprised at the size of its
tail, and more than amazed when told that it was one of the luxuries of
the country.  It was one of the favourite dishes of the supper that
evening.  The other luxuries, Mr Ross added, were the bear's paws and
the moose's nose.

As they paddled on Mustagan suddenly shaded his eyes for a moment, then
quickly said:

"Wap-i-sew! wap-i-sew!"  ("Swans! swans!")

Word was quickly shouted to the other boats of their coming, and to try
and shoot some of them if possible.  Swans' feathers are much prized in
that land for beds.  Their meat, however, is not considered equal to
that of the wild goose.  As they fly with great rapidity they were not
long in coming within range.  There was a large flock of them, and they
were flying, as they usually do, in a straight line.  This flock must
have risen up very recently, as they were not more than fifty feet above
the water.

"I killed beaver.  Your turn first now," said Mustagan to Alec.  "But I
fire just after you."

Alec had at Mr Ross's suggestion dropped a half dozen big buckshot in
the barrel of his gun on the top of the charge of duckshot.  The instant
the first swan of the long straight line was in range he fired.  To his
amazement, while the first and second passed on unhurt, the third swan
dropped suddenly into the water; and a second or two after another,
about the twentieth in the line, also fell.  Soon reports from other
guns were heard, as the friends in the other canoes in the rear fired,
and Mrs Ross was delighted to have the feathers of six beautiful white
swans to take home with her when she returned.

The most perplexed one in the party for the time being was Alec.  Mr
Ross had observed it, and half suspecting the cause asked what it was
that was bothering him.  His answer was:

"I cannot understand how it should have happened that when I aimed and
fired at the first swan it and the second should pass on unhurt and the
third fall dead."

He was very much surprised when Mr Ross explained that he had not
calculated for the speed with which the wild swan flies.  Although such
a large and heavy bird, the swan flies with a rapidity excelled by very
few.  The wild ducks and geese are easily left behind by the beautiful
and graceful swans.

When the swans were picked up the journey was resumed, and the friendly
contest between Alec and Mustagan continued.  Soon a large flock of
ducks flew over them.  It being Mustagan's turn he fired, and as his
arrow returned it was in the heart of a splendid duck.  Alec, watching
his opportunity, fired where a number were flying close together, and
had the good fortune to bring down four at the one shot.  This, of
course, gave him the victory.  And no congratulations could have been
more kindly or sincere than were those of the big-hearted Mustagan.

In the meantime those in the other canoes had their own adventures and
excitements.  Sam had the good fortune to kill one of the swans,
although he said afterward that he thought he must have been cross-eyed
when he fired, as the one which fell was the third or fourth behind the
one at which he aimed.

In his amusing way Sam's irrepressible spirit was up, and, in a half-
moralising way at such erratic shooting, he said: "indeed, when I saw
that swan fall I began to think I must have been like the old
schoolmaster that my father used to tell about, in the old times when he
was a boy, that when he was angry would shout out, `Will that boy I am
looking at stand up?'  And do you believe it, ten or a dozen would rise
trembling to their feet in different parts of the schoolhouse."

The Old Fort was reached early in the afternoon, and at one of the
favourite camping places on the western side of the rushing waters of
the great river that comes pouring out of Lake Winnipeg they went
ashore.  The active Indians soon had an abundance of dry wood cut and
gathered.  The fires were soon brightly burning, and the meal was
prepared.  Around it clustered the happy hungry ones, and very much did
they enjoy their dinner out in the sunshine amid the beauties of this
romantic spot.

Mrs Ross and the children, escorted by Mr Ross and our three lads,
went for a long ramble through the woods, looking for some rare and
beautiful ferns which here abound.  They succeeded in getting quite a
number of fine specimens, which they carefully dug up to be planted in
the grounds around Sagasta-weekee.  Some beautiful wild flowers were
also found, and several small young mountain ash trees were carefully
dug up and carried home.

After this delightful ramble, which was without any exciting adventure,
they all returned to the camp, where they found that tea had already
been prepared for them by the thoughtful Indian canoemen.  When this was
partaken of, Mrs Ross and the young people embarked in their capacious
canoe for the return trip, and under the vigorous paddling of their four
canoemen reached Sagasta-weekee before midnight.

The only excitement they had on the way was the seeing a beautiful deer
and her young fawn swimming in the water a long way out from the shore.
They gave chase and caught up to the beautiful frightened creatures.
Mrs Ross would not allow the men to kill either of them, as she did not
want the children to be shocked by the death of such beautiful, timid
animals, especially as the solicitude manifested by the mother deer was
very interesting to observe.

At first even the experienced Indians were perplexed at the sight of the
deer with her young fawn in this broad water so far from land.
Generally while the fawns are so small the mother deer keeps them hid in
the deep, dark forests, only going to them when it is necessary for them
to suckle.

It was not very long before these Indians had an idea of the cause for
the unusual conduct of this deer.  So they began watching very carefully
the distant shore, from which the deer had come, and after a while one
who had been shading his eyes gave a start and whispered earnestly:

"Wolf! wolf!"

And sure enough there was, for trotting up and down on the shore was a
great, fierce, northern grey wolf, he must have got on the trail of the
deer and alarmed her, but not before she had time to rush from her
retreat with the fawn and spring into the water.  They must have got
quite a distance out from shore before the wolf reached the water, as
the Indians said, judging by the way the wolf ran up and down on the
beach, trying to find the trail; he had not seen them in the water.

Wolves do not take to water like bears.  It is true they can swim when
necessary, but they cannot make much of a fight in the water.  A full-
grown deer can easily drown a wolf that is rash enough to dare to attack
him in the deep water.  The Indians would have liked to have gone ashore
and made an effort to get in the rear of the wolf and had a shot at him,
but this was at present out of the question.  So they only paddled in
between the swimming deer and fawn and the shore from whence they had
come.  This enabled them to escape to the shore opposite from the wolf.
Shortly after, as the wolf, so angry at being baffled of his prey while
the scent was so hot on the shore, came running along in plain sight.
The Indians carefully fired a couple of bullets at him.  These, while
not killing him, went near enough to cause him to give a great jump of
surprise and alarm, and to suddenly disappear in the forest.

"Sometime soon we get that wolf," said one of the Indians.

How he did get it we will have him tell us some time later on.



CHAPTER SIXTEEN.

THE OLD FORT AGAIN--AURORA BOREALIS--UNEXPECTED ARRIVALS--FUR TRADERS--
HEAD WINDS--CAMP ANNOYANCES--CAMP FIRE YARNS.

We must now return to our other friends, whom we left at the Old Fort.
Some days were spent at this favourite old hunting ground.

With Mr Ross the boys visited the site of their former camp, where the
cyclone wrought such havoc, and where they had had such a narrow escape.
They were all amazed as they examined the trunks of the trees twisted
off, and saw how, like a swath of grass cut through a meadow, the
irresistible hurricane had swept through the dense forest.

Never had any of them seen anything to equal this, and they were very
grateful for providential deliverance.  They investigated the rocks and
boulders, and Mr Ross gave them his ideas as to the formation of the
great prairies of the West, over which he had so often wandered, and
where Sam, Alec, and Frank expected, in a year or so, to spend some
happy months.

To the boys the evening camp fire on the rocks, with the rippling waters
of lake or river at their feet and the dark back ground of unexplored
forest, was always intensely interesting, with its review of the day's
adventures, the picturesque Indians, and preparation for the evening
meal, enjoyed with such glorious appetites.  Then, after the sun had
gone down in splendour, and the long twilight began to fade away, the
stars came out of their hiding places, one by one, until the whole
heavens seemed aglow with them, for they shone with a radiance and
beauty that was simply indescribable.  Then, if not too tired to wait
for their arrival, how fascinating often were the auroral displays, the
mysterious "northern lights."  If they were sleepy and tired, when some
of these field night displays began, they soon forgot their weariness as
they gazed, at times fairly fascinated by the wondrous visions that were
theirs to witness.  Never did they see a glorious display exactly
repeated.  There was always a kaleidoscopic change; yet each was very
suggestive and beautiful.  Sometimes they mounted up and up from below
the horizon like vast arrays of soldiers, rank following rank in quick
succession, arranged in all the gorgeous hues of the rainbow.  They
advanced, they receded, they fought, they conquered, they retreated, and
they faded away into oblivion.  Then great arches of purest white
spanned the heavens, from which streamers red as blood hung quivering in
the sky.  Then, after other transformations, a corona filled the zenith
and became a perfect crown of dancing, flashing splendour that long hung
suspended there above them, a fit diadem, they thought, for the head of
Him who was the creator of all these indescribable glories.

Thus in the beauties of the night visions, and in other sights peculiar
to the North, there were compensations for some of the privations
incident to being so remote from the blessings of civilisation.  These
new scenes, both by night and by day, were sources of great pleasure to
the boys, as their tastes were fortunately such that these visions had a
peculiar charm for them.  Then, with their full program of delightful
sports, they were indeed having a most joyous holiday.

But our readers are not to understand that during all these months there
was nothing but continued enjoyment without some genuine hardships.
There were at times some very serious drawbacks, and the boys had to
muster up all their courage and face some annoyances that were
exasperating in the extreme.  And these hardships and trials were as
likely to meet them when they would have rejoiced in refreshing slumber
as during the weariness of a heavy day's marching on the trail of some
game.

One of the great drawbacks to quiet slumber during the sultry hours of
the hot summer nights were those intolerable pests, the mosquitoes.  At
times they were simply unendurable.  They came in such multitudes that
they were irresistible.  They presented their bills so importunately
that payment had to be made promptly in blood.  Some nights the boys
could hardly sleep at all.  Every expedient was tried to drive them off.
Smoke fires were kindled, and all other known remedies were tried, but
all in vain.  Blistered hands, swollen faces, eyes that would only half
open, some mornings told of the long-continued, unsuccessful battles
that during the nights past had been fought; and, to judge from
appearances, the lads had been most thoroughly defeated.  Said Sam one
morning, after a night of misery with the insatiable pests:

"I see now why the rascals are called pious animals--because they have
been singing over us and preying on us all the night; but in spite of
all their efforts I am sure I am none the better, but much the worse,
both in body and spirits."

"I say, Big Tom," said Alec, "what is the good of mosquitoes anyway?"

"To teach young white gentlemen patience, to see what stuff they are
made of," said the old man, while all were amused at his apt reply.

"We hardly notice them," continued Big Tom, in his slow, deliberate
manner; "and so it will be with you all after a time.  Mosquitoes are
peculiar, and have their likes and dislikes.  One of their likes is to
be fond of fresh blood, and so they go for the latest arrivals, and one
of their dislikes is not to care much for tough old Injun.  When you
have been here some time, and have been bitten by a great many, you will
not mind them so much."

"How many?" said Frank.

"About a million," replied Big Tom, "though I don't know how many that
is."

This answer was too much for Sam, so he sprang up in a hurry and, in a
semi-tragic manner, exclaimed:

"When does the next train start for home?  I want to see my mother."

This inquiry from the irrepressible Sam provoked roars of laughter, and
caused them to forget the mosquitoes and their bills.

When the boys arose one morning they were surprised to find a whole
brigade of boats drawn up on the shore, and the men at various camp
fires, busily preparing their breakfast.  They had slept so soundly that
they had not heard the slightest sound.

Mr Ross and the men were up quite a time, and had gone over to chat
with the two officers of the Hudson Bay Company who had charge of the
brigade, which was from the Cumberland House and Swan River district,
and was now on its way up from York Factory with its cargo of goods for
the next winter's trade.

As breakfast was now ready, Mr Ross invited the two officers of the
company, Mr Hamilton and Mr Bolanger, to eat with them.  This
invitation was gladly accepted, and to them were introduced Frank, Alec,
and Sam, who became very much interested in them, and in the recital of
various adventures and reminiscences of trading with the Indians in
various parts of the great country.

The officers, on their part, were very anxious to hear all about the
gunpowder explosion that had occurred at Robinson's Portage, as all
sorts of rumours had gone abroad throughout the country about it, and
especially a story that many persons were killed, among them some young
English gentlemen, who for a bit of a lark had laid the train of gun
powder which caused the general flare-up.  The boys were amazed and
indignant at first, then vastly amused as they saw by the twinkle in Mr
Ross's eye that he was well acquainted with fondness for banter, which
was a strong characteristic of some of those Hudson Bay gentlemen.

At first the boys hardly knew how to reply to this absurd reflection.
Sam was the first to thoroughly understand them, and so in the richest
brogue of his own green isle, which we will not try to produce in all
its perfection, he said:

"Och, thin, it's roight ye are, av course.  An' wasn't it too bad
intoirely, the spalpeen to the loikes of you, an' he too an Englishman!
Shure, thin, an' didn't he fire the powther through downright invy.  Do
ye believe me now, didn't he, an' Alec, the Scotchman, sitting there
foreninst ye, wish to blow John Company, body and breeches, all at wanst
into the Nelson River for your rascally chating the poor Injuns, that
they might be after starting a company thimselves."

This sally of Sam's created roars of laughter, and even the slap he gave
them about their close dealings with the Indians was much enjoyed.  Soon
all were on the best of terms, and it was a mutual pleasure, in that
lonely place, to meet and interchange the news of the country, as well
as to have the flashings of wit and fun and pleasant raillery.

Of course the men of the brigade were anxious to get on, as they still
had a journey before them.  They had only come from Norway house, a
distance of twenty miles, the previous day.  They had started, as was
customary, quite late in the afternoon.  The wind was anything but
favourable, and so they were obliged to remain where they had drawn up
their boats.  Their old guide, after scanning the heavens and watching
the movements of the different strata of clouds, declared that a fierce
south wind was brewing, and that if they dared to start they would soon
be driven back to that place.  This was bad news to all, especially to
the young officers, who were very anxious to get on.  They very much
dislike long delays in their journeys.  Then it is always in favour of
an officer seeking promotion in the service if it is known that he has a
good record for making speedy trips with his brigades.

Here, however, were reports from one whose word was law; so there was no
help for it, and thus they were here to remain until the wind changed.
As the indication was for high winds, with perhaps heavy rains, orders
were issued for the complete safety of the boats and cargoes.  In making
their preparations for a severe storm the crews of two or three of the
boats seized hold of the strong rope which was attached to the stem of
each boat, and by their united strength dragged them, one after another,
well up on the sand, out of the reach of the waves.  As there are no
tides in these great American lakes the boats have not to be shifted.
Heavy tarpaulins were carefully lashed down over the cargo, thus
preventing the rain from doing any damage.  These precautions turned out
to be quite unnecessary, as the threatened storm either did not appear
or passed round them.  Still the wind blew constantly from the south for
a number of days, and thus the brigade was obliged to remain.  So long,
indeed, was it detained that the officers had to order the removal of
the cargo from one of the boats and send it back to Norway House for an
additional supply of food.

This delay of the brigade was a glorious time for the boys, for among
the men were some remarkable characters from the great prairies and the
distant mountains.  Some of them were full of incidents of thrilling
adventures and wonderful stories; and so, while waiting during the long
days for the wind to either change or go down, many a capital story was
told at the pleasant camp fires.  Some of them were narrated with
wondrous dramatic power.  These Indians are true sons of nature, and,
while not taught in the schools of oratory, have in many instances a
kind of eloquence that is most effective, and a dramatic way of speaking
that is most telling.

There were stories of war parties and of scalping scenes, as well as of
thrilling horse-stealing escapades.  In addition there was the narration
of various kinds of hunting adventure from these bronzed old hunters,
who had frequently met in deadly conflict various kinds of fierce
animals, from the mountain lion to the grizzly bear.

Three Boys in the Wild North Land--by Egerton Ryerson Young



CHAPTER SEVENTEEN.

THE STORY OF PUKUMAKUNUN--LOOSING HIS TONGUE--HIS EARLY DAYS--EXCURSION
FOR BUFFALO--TREACHEROUS QUICKSANDS--SINKING MOTHER--SAGACIOUS HORSE--
SNEAKING WOLVES--RATTLESNAKE AND PRAIRIE DOG.

One old Indian with a splendid physique much excited their curiosity.
They were specially anxious to know the story of that fearful scar
across his face.  He was evidently getting up in years, and was treated
with much respect by his comrades.  However, he was so quiet, and at
times so reticent, that hardly a word could be got out of him.  That
there was some thrilling adventure associated with that scar the boys
were very confident.  The question among them was how to get him to tell
it.  They made friends with some of his Indian associates, and tried to
get from them his history.  But all the information they would impart
was:

"Yes, he has a great story.  It very much please you.  You get him tell
it."

This, of course, only increased their curiosity to hear his narrative.
For a time all their efforts met with poor success.  At length Alec, the
shrewd Scottish lad, said:

"I have an idea that I can break through his reserve and get him to
talk."

"Let us hear what your scheme is," said Frank.

"It is this," replied Alec.  "I have been watching him, and I have
noticed that the only two things he seems to have any love for are his
red-beaded leggings and his brilliant red neckerchief.  So I have been
thinking that if I offer him that red tartan shirt of mine it will so
please him that it will break through his reserve, and will get his
story."

"A capital plan!" shouted Sam; "and if you succeed in getting the
adventure from him we will gladly pay for the shirt."

The question now was how to find out if this plan would be successful.
Some of the Indians are very sensitive, and require careful handling.
However, Mustagan, the famous Indian guide, who had become so very
friendly with this Indian, undertook at the desire of the boys to
present their request and, as it were, incidentally to hint at the
present of the brilliant shirt.

The scheme worked admirably, and here is his interesting story:

His name was Pukumakun, which means a club or a hammer.  He was a
Kinistenaux Indian, and when he was a boy his family and people lived a
part of each year on the banks of the Assiniboine River.  Here he grew
up as other Indian lads, and was early taught the use of the bow and
arrows, and how to skillfully throw the lasso.  He had his share of
excitements and dangers, living in those days when warlike tribes were
not far away.  The war-whoop was no unusual sound, and so they lived in
a state of constant expectation of defence or attack.

Living on the prairies, he was, as soon as he was large enough, taught
how to ride the fiery native horses until he could manage the wildest of
them.  Living such a life, he naturally had many adventures.  The one
that is most vividly impressed on his mind, and the constant reminder of
which he carries in the great scar on his face, is the one that he here
gives the boys.

It was many years ago when, as a boy of about twelve years of age, he
was living with his father and mother in an Indian village not far from
the Assiniboine.  As game was not very plentiful that season in that
part of the country, it was decided that they should break camp and go
on a great buffalo hunt, which would last for several weeks.  While the
men went to kill the buffalo the women had to go also to dry and pack
the meat and to make pemmican.  The buffalo herds were far away, and so
it was many days' journey before they were found.

One day while they were travelling along over the prairies Pukumakun had
the misfortune to be bitten on his leg by a poisonous snake.  His
mother, having first killed the snake, then sucked the wound until she
had drawn out nearly all the poison.  By this brave act she undoubtedly
saved his life.  However, there was still enough of the poison left in
his system to make him very sick and cause his leg to swell greatly.
The result was he could not travel as fast as the buffalo hunters, who
were anxious to reach the herds.  So it was decided that he should be
left with his mother to follow as rapidly as they could.  So painful
became his leg from the exercise of the riding that at length he was
unable to mount his horse.  His brave mother stuck to him, and continued
to help him along for some days.  To make matters worse, one of their
two horses disappeared one night.  Still, on they pushed as well as they
could with the remaining one, and at length reached a river with many
sandbars.  Here the noble woman, in trying to carry him across, got into
the quicksands and began to sink.  In vain she tried to pull her feet
out of the treacherous sands.  When she would try to lift up one foot
the other only sank deeper and deeper.  Failing to succeed in this way,
she lifted him off her shoulders, and, placing him gently beside her,
tried again to struggle loose from the sands.  But it was all in vain.
She was held with too tight a grip.  Seeing this, and fearing that
Pukumakun might also begin to sink in the sands, she again put him upon
her shoulders, and then both of them shouted and called loudly for help.
But no help came.  No human beings were within many miles' distance.
Some prairie wolves heard their voices, and came to the river's bank to
see what it meant.  They found the bundle of meat there and quickly
devoured it, but they did not dare to attack the horse, that was eating
the grass not two hundred yards away.  When they had fought over and
devoured the food they came to the bank again, and their howls and yelps
seemed to mock the cries for help of the perishing ones, as deeper and
deeper they sank in the treacherous quicksands.  But that woman never
wept, for she was the daughter of a chief.  But we must let Pukumakun
tell the rest of the story, which fairly thrilled and fascinated the
boys:

"By and by my feet began to touch the water, which ran a few inches deep
over the bad sands, that had so caught hold of my mother, and into which
she was sunk now nearly up to her waist.  Still she cried not, but spake
brave words to me.  Hoping some Indians might be near, we called and
called, but the wolves only answered with their mocking howls.  Deeper
and deeper we sank, until the waters were up to my mother's neck, and my
feet were beginning to feel the grip of the treacherous sand.

"All at once I saw the horse coming down to the water to drink.  Around
his neck was tied the long Indian lariat made of braided deerskin, and
therefore very strong.  As I saw the horse, hope sprang up in my heart,
and I began to feel that we were going to be saved.  The water was now
close up to my mother's lips, but we both called to the horse, which had
been in our camp for years.  He raised up his head and seemed startled
at first, and then he plunged into the river.  It did not take him long
to get through the deep water, and then as his feet began to touch the
quicksands he seemed at once to know that it was not right, so he kept
lifting up his feet one after the other very rapidly.  Still on he came,
until he was so close that I was able to seize hold of the lariat.

"Then spake my mother: `My son, you will escape.  Tie the lariat quickly
around your waist, and the horse will be able to drag you out.  Here I
must die.  The spirits of my ancestors call me away to the happy hunting
grounds, and I must obey.  Remember your mother tried hard to save you,
and only failed with her life.  Tell my people how I perished, and give
my message to the avengers of blood, and tell them not to be angry
toward you.  Farewell.  Remember you are the grandson of a chief.'

"At first I wanted to die with my mother.  It seemed dreadful to leave
her alone, but she would not hear of it.  As the waters were coming into
her mouth she cried, `Obey me, my son; obey me, and do it quickly, for
the horse is impatient and knows the place is dangerous.'

"So I called sharply to the horse, and he sprang forward, and with a
great wrench jerked me from my mother's shoulders out of the quicksands,
and dashed through the water with me to the shore.

"As soon as I could loose myself from the lariat I turned round to look,
and there I saw my mother's head just sinking out of sight.  I was wild
with terror and sorrow, and bitterly chided myself for not having died
with her.  But I had the consolation that she herself had insisted on my
escaping when the strange chance offered itself.

"What was I to do now?  My father and other friends were far away; my
mother had perished; and here I was an almost helpless cripple on the
great prairies, and night was rapidly approaching.

"Fortunately my horse stuck to me, and I saw that I must keep him close
to me all night, or the wolves that were prowling around would, in the
darkness, make short work of me.  So, miserable and wet though I was, I
tied the loose end of the lariat around my waist, and selecting a spot
where the grass was good, I sat down in the middle of it, there to pass
the night.

"It was, indeed, of all nights the saddest and most miserable.  I could
not sleep.  I was full of sorrow.  If I tried to shut my eyes, there was
before me the sight of my mother, sinking, sinking down, down in that
treacherous quicksand.

"The wolves were very troublesome.  They would sit out in the gloom and
howl in their melancholy way.  Then they would arouse themselves and try
to get hold of me.  But my horse, well accustomed to fighting these
animals, would rush at them as far as the lariat would allow, and would
either strike at them with his fore feet, or, swinging around quickly,
would so vigorously lash out with his hind legs that the cowardly brutes
would quickly skulk back into the gloom.

"The long night ended at length, and the welcome morning came.  I found
that my poor leg, which had caused all the trouble, was much better.
Perhaps this was from having been so long in the water.  I was able to
ride, and so I hurried away from the sight of the river that had so
cruelly swallowed up my mother.  My faithful horse, that had already
been my deliverer, was very patient while, in my crippled state, I
managed to get up on his back.  I had eaten nothing since yesterday, but
I thought nothing of that; I only wanted to get my sinking mother out of
my eyes, and get away from that dreadful river which we had to cross.
Horses are very wise about these quicksands, and so I just held on to
the lariat, which I had made into a kind of a halter, and let him choose
his own course.  Very quickly and safely did he convey me across, and
soon did we find the trail along which my father and the other hunters
had travelled.  We hurried on very rapidly, until my horse was tired,
and then we stopped for a few hours in a ravine where we were well
sheltered from hostile Indians, if any should be lurking about.  The
grass was luxuriant and abundant, and my horse enjoyed it very much.

"When the hottest part of the day was over we again found the trail and
pushed on until sundown.  Where the grass was good I tethered my horse
with the lariat, and for the first time began to feel hungry.  But I had
nothing to eat, neither had I bow nor arrow.  However, I noticed that
the burrows of the prairie dogs were quite numerous where we had left
the trail.  So I took the strings of my moccasins, and making in the
ends of each a running noose I fastened them over the burrows that
seemed very fresh.  Returning to my horse, I there waited for a time,
and then went back to see if anything had been caught.  I was much
startled to find that in the first noose a great rattlesnake had been
caught.  He was lashing the ground at a great rate, while his rattles
kept up a constant buzz.  With a pole from some dried willows I soon
killed him, for I wanted the moccasin string with which he was caught.

"I was more fortunate with the other noose, for in it was caught by the
neck a fine young plump prairie dog.  Quickly killing him, I carried him
and the two strings back to the protection of my horse.  As I had my
knife, it did not take me long to skin the prairie dog, and as I had no
fire I had to eat him raw.  It tasted very good, for I was now feeling
very hungry.  As I had done the night before, I slept with my horse
close to me as a protection from the wolves."

Three Boys in the Wild North Land--by Egerton Ryerson Young



CHAPTER EIGHTEEN.

PUKUMAKUN'S STORY CONTINUED--SEARCHING FOR FRIENDS--PATHLESS PRAIRIE--
ANGRY RELATIONS--AVENGERS OF BLOOD UNAPPEASED--RACE FOR LIFE--
OVERTAKEN--FIRST CONFLICT--ARROW AGAINST TOMAHAWK--OPPORTUNE ARRIVAL.

"Thus I travelled on for some days.  At times it was I difficult for me
to keep the trail, but my horse was very wise, and somehow he seemed to
know that he was following-up his comrades.

"I was often very hungry, as I had nothing else to depend upon with
which to hunt except my two strings, and then I could only use them when
my horse was resting.  However, I caught a few more prairie dogs, and
one night I caught a prairie chicken, which was very good.

"One day, as I rode over a big swell like a hill in the prairie, I saw
not very far away a herd of buffaloes.  So I knew I must be near my
friends.  While I was pleased at the sight I began to feel very much
alarmed.  They would say at once, `Where is your mother?'  Then, if they
did not believe my story, what then?  So I was much troubled in my mind,
and, while looking for my people, I dreaded to meet them.  I felt that
my father would believe my story, but I was afraid of my mother's
brothers, the sons of the chief.  They had never had any love for me, or
I much for them.  Why this was so I found out one day when they were
upbraiding my mother in the wigwam for marrying my father, instead of a
chief of another village, to whom they had promised her.  They thought I
was asleep, or they would not have spoken as they did.  I remember that
my mother spoke up, and said that she was the daughter of a chief, who
had given her the right to choose her own husband; and that she was
contented and happy in her choice.  Just then their sharp eyes seemed to
know that I was not very sound asleep, and so their strong words ceased;
for Indian men and women do not let their children hear their quarrels.

"So I now remember their words, and was afraid.  Not long after I saw
some of the hunters, and when I met one whom I knew, I inquired for my
father.  He told me where I would find him, and so I rode on.  My father
was resting with some others after a great run, in which they had killed
many buffaloes.  When I drew near to him, although I was the grandson of
a chief, I lifted up my voice and wept.  At this he was very much
surprised and hurt, for as yet he knew not of our great loss.  Others
jeered and laughed at seeing a young Indian weeping.  Then my father
arose and led me away and began to upbraid me, for he knew not the cause
of my sorrow, but supposed my mother had joined the other women, who
were very busy cutting up and preserving the meat of the buffalo.  But I
could only continue my weeping, and at length was able to cry out: `My
mother! my mother!'

"At this my father quickly ceased his reproofs, and becoming alarmed
cried out: `tell me what is the matter.'

"So I told him all.  And as I saw his great sorrow as he listened to my
story I knew how great had been his love for my mother, who, in her love
for him, had preferred him to the chief whom her brothers wished her to
marry.  He was crushed to the ground and speechless with sorrow, and as
I saw him so overwhelmed with his grief I wished I had died with my
mother.

"For a time he thus remained, while I, the most miserable, could only
sit by and look at him.  No words or tears came from him, but the great
sorrow had taken such a hold upon him that he seemed as one who would
there have died.

"Suddenly, as voices were heard and we both knew that some persons were
coming near, he turned to me and with a great effort said:--

"`My son, you must flee at once.  Your mother's brothers, who love us
not, will not believe your story; and as they are the nearest of kin,
the avengers of blood, they will seek your life.  You have no witness to
your story, not even the body or a grave to show.  When they find your
mother has not arrived, their suspicions will be aroused.  I believe
your story, strange as it is.  When they demand of me the cause of your
mother's non-arrival I will tell them as you have told me; but they will
not believe it, and so you must not meet them, as in all probability
they will kill you, in spite of all that I can do.  So you must flee
away from the avengers.  You, my only son of your mother, must not fall
by the hands of her brothers.  Meet me here to-night when the moon is at
her brightest, and I will then have decided what you must do.  Flee
quickly.'

"It was indeed time for me to go, for hardly had I slipped away, and
hidden in the deep grass, ere I heard angry voices in reply to my
father's quiet words.  But I could make out nothing at the time of what
was said.  For hours I there remained.  The day passed on, and the night
followed, and yet I waited until the old moon came up to its brightest
point.  Then, returning to the appointed spot, there I found my father
waiting for me.  His great sorrow was still on him, his love for the son
of her whom he had loved so well had shown itself in his acts.  He had
with him a good horse and a warrior's bow and quiver of arrows.  In
addition he had a supply of food and some other necessary things.  He
embraced me more tenderly than I ever remember his having done before,
and then for an instant his strong Indian nature broke, and with one
convulsive sob he said, `Kah-se-ke-at' (`My beloved'), which was his pet
name for my mother.  But quickly he regained his composure, and,
pointing to the north star, he said I was to direct my course so much
west of that and try to reach the friendly band of Maskepetoon, the
great chief of the land of the Saskatchewan.  He commanded me to ride
fast, as he feared trouble, as my uncles, to whom he had told my story
in the presence of all the relatives, would not be pacified, but had
demanded that I be delivered up.  So I was armed and mounted, but ere my
father would let me go he drew me down to him and kissed me, and then
said:--

"`Be brave, my son; never begin a quarrel; but if the story of your
mother's death is true--and I believe you, for you have never deceived
me--then in your innocency, if you are followed and attacked, use your
weapons, and if you must die, fall bravely fighting, as does the true
warrior.'

"In the moonlight there I left him, and dashed away in the direction
pointed out.

"My horse was a good one, and carried me along without any stumbling,
although the prairie was rough and uneven.  It was well for me that he
was so steady and true, for I was only a boy, and so crushed by my great
sorrow that I was hardly able to care for myself.  With this good horse
I was able to get on rapidly.  However, in spite of all the progress I
had made, I discovered about the time the day-dawn was coming that I was
being followed.  My pursuers were my fierce uncles, who had never
forgiven my mother for marrying my father; and now that they had heard
that she was dead resolved to take vengeance on me, whom they had always
hated.  They knew that, as was the custom of our people, they as the
nearest relatives were the avengers of blood.  In vain had my father
pleaded for me, and that I was not guilty of her death.  They would not
be appeased, even though he had offered, as gifts, about all of his
possessions.  When, in anger and sorrow at their unrelenting spirit, he
left them, they cunningly watched him, that they might find where I was
hidden away.

"But my father was too quick for them, and so was able to get me off, as
I have mentioned, before they found my hiding place.  However, they were
soon on my trail, but they had to ride many a mile before they overtook
me, as I had sped on as rapidly as I could.  Although I was only a boy I
was able to see, when I detected them following after me, that they were
not coming as friends.  Then also my father's words had put me on my
guard.  They seemed so sure of being able to easily kill me that they
resorted to no trick or disguise to throw me off my guard.  So I
remembered my father, and being conscious that I was innocent of my
mother's death I was resolved to die as a warrior.  Carefully stringing
my bow, I fixed my quiver of arrows so that I could draw them easily as
I needed them.  Fortunately for me, my father had taught me the trick of
riding on the side of my horse and shooting back from under his neck.
Soon with the yells and warwhoops of my pursuers the arrows began to fly
around me.  One of their sharp arrows wounded my horse, but instead of
disabling him it put such life into him that for the next few miles we
were far ahead beyond their arrows.  But their horses were more enduring
than mine, and so they gradually gained on me once more.  I did not
shoot an arrow until I could hear the heavy breathings of their horses,
which, like mine, were feeling the effects of this fearful race.  Then,
swinging quickly to my horse's side, I caused him by the pressure of my
knee to swerve a little to the left, and then, drawing my bow with all
my might, I fired back from under his neck at the horse nearer to me.
Fortunately for me, my arrow struck him in the neck, and so cut some of
the great swollen veins that he was soon out of the race.  The uncle on
the other horse stopped for a moment to see if he could be of any
service, but, when he found that the wounded horse would soon bleed to
death, he sprang again upon his own and came on, if possible, more
furiously than ever.  His brief halt had given me time to get another
arrow fixed in my bow as on I hurried, but my horse was about exhausted,
and soon again the arrows began to sing about me.  One unfortunately
struck my horse in a mortal place and brought him down.  I could only
spring to the ground as he fell, and with my bow and arrow quickly turn
and face my pursuer.  Very sudden was the end.  He drew his tomahawk and
threw it with all the fury of his passionate nature.  I did not try to
dodge it, but facing him I drew my bow with all my strength and shot
straight into his face.  Our weapons must have crossed each other, for
while he fell dead with the arrow in his brain, I fell senseless with
the blade of the tomahawk, which, cutting clean through my bow, had
buried itself in my face.

"When I returned to consciousness my father was beside me.  He had sewed
up the wounds with sinew, and had succeeded in stopping the flowing of
the blood.  How he came there seemed strange to me.  He told me all
about it when I was better.  He had found out that the two uncles, well-
armed and on good horses, had discovered my trail and had started after
me.  He was not long in following, and as he had their trail in addition
to mine he was able to push on without any delay, and so caught up to
the one whose horse I had shot in the neck.

"They had no words with each other.  They knew that as they joined in
battle it was to be a fight unto the death.  My father killed my uncle
and came out of the battle unwounded.  Then he hurried on as quickly as
he could, and from a distance saw the fight between my uncle and me.
When he dashed up, at first he thought I was dead, but soon he
discovered that the life was still in me.  He at once set to work to
help me, but months passed away ere the great wound made by the tomahawk
healed up.

"This great scar remains with me to this day, and reminds me of that
fierce fight, and tells of how terrible in those days were some of the
doings of our people."

Three Boys in the Wild North Land--by Egerton Ryerson Young



CHAPTER NINETEEN.

"FAIR WIND!"--FISH SPEARING BY TORCHLIGHT--THE SHINING EYES--DEATH OF
THE DEER--ABUNDANCE OF GAME--ADDITIONAL EXCURSIONS--TRADITION OF
NANAHBOOZOO AND THE FLOOD--WAS NANAHBOOZOO NOAH?

The boys listened with absorbing interest to this thrilling story.  The
camp fire had partly burned down and the stars had come out in their
splendour, but none seemed to observe these things.

The dramatic power with which Pukumakun accompanied his narrative, his
genuine sorrow at the tragic death of his mother, and then his fierce
excitement as he described the last long race and its end, simply
fascinated our young friends, and they declared that it was the most
wonderful story they had ever heard.

Of course the bright tartan shirt, with some other gifts, was handed
over, and then all wrapped themselves in their blankets and lay down on
the rocks to sleep.

During the night the strong south wind veered around to the north-east,
and the alert Indians in charge were quick to observe the change.  Soon
the cry of "Meyoo nootin!"  ("Fair wind!") was heard, and, in a time so
brief that it would have seemed almost incredible to persons who have
not witnessed it, the boats were afloat, the masts stepped, the sails
hoisted, and the journey, so long delayed, was gladly resumed.  In the
earliest dawn the last of the sails were seen by Mr Ross and our
friends to be sinking below the horizon as they sped along toward the
mouth of the great Saskatchewan.  For the rest of the day they were
quite lonesome after the departure of the brigade, and, as the wind was
in a bad quarter for them, they decided to rest during the day and then
go out spearing fish during the coming night.  The Indians were set to
work preparing the inflammable torches which would be necessary for
their success.  These were made of various things.  The best were of the
fine resinous strips of spruce or balsam, taken from those parts that
are saturated with the resinous gum.  They were secured in handles which
prevented the hot melted pitch from running down and burning the hands
of those who held them.  Other torches were made of strips or rolls of
birch-bark saturated in the balsam gum, which is gathered by the Indians
and used so generally in keeping watertight their canoes.

The three-pronged barbed spears were fastened in long light handles, and
every other preparation was made for having a successful expedition.

On account of the long evening twilight they had to wait for some hours
after supper ere it was dark enough for them to hope for any measure of
success.  However, the experienced Indians knew when it was best to
start, and so, after the inevitable cup of tea and the additional pipe
for the smokers, the three canoes were carried down and carefully placed
in the water.  In each canoe was one of our boys, and they were of
course excited at the prospect of this nightly adventure.  It seemed so
weird to thus embark in this ghostly way and to leave the bright camp
fire on the rocks, with the few watchers who remained, Mr Ross being
one of them, and to embark in their canoes and go paddling out in the
gloom.

Their destination was in the western part of Playgreen lake, where they
expected to find abundance of fish of the varieties that afford
excellent sport when caught in this way.  After several miles of careful
paddling in the darkness, where rocks abounded and rapids were many,
they reached a place that seemed familiar to the Indians.  They easily
found a sheltered cove, where they went ashore, and, groping around in
the darkness, they soon gathered some dry wood and kindled a fire.
Fortunately the wind had nearly died away, and so they anticipated a
successful night's sport.

The inflammable torches were carefully arranged, and a couple of them
for each boat were ignited.  Then all again took their assigned
positions in their canoes, and noiselessly paddled to the places where
the fish were supposed to be abundant.

At first all the boys could see were dark, shadowlike objects in the
water that, after remaining under the glare of the lights, suddenly
dashed away in the gloom.

For fear of accident it was decided that the experienced Indians should
do the spearing, while the boys looked on and aided with the paddles or
helped to hold the torches.  The Indian spearmen stood up in the canoe,
and, gazing intently into the water where it was brilliantly lit up by
the blazing torches, were able to see the fish at a depth of several
feet beneath the surface.  Some varieties of fish are not attracted by
the light, and so are not to be caught in this way.  Other kinds,
however, seem quite fascinated by the bright light, and will remain
perfectly still in its glare, as though under some power they cannot
withstand.

The experienced spearmen, with a vigorous thrust, are generally very
successful in securing large numbers of them.  Still, in spite of all
their skill, many escape.  Apart from the excitement about this method
of fishing, it is not to be compared with the ordinary way of capturing
them with gill nets as regards the quantities obtained.  The spear
cruelly wounds many that escape, and so even the Indians only adopt this
plan for the sake of its exciting sport, and for the capture of some
varieties of fish that are not easily obtained in any other way.

After the boys had watched the successful operations of the Indians for
some time they made their first attempt.  For a time they could not
understand how it was that when they made a vigorous thrust with their
spear at a great big, quiet fish it seemed to strike some place a couple
of feet or so away from the fish.  So they found that the law of
refraction had to be considered, and after a few experiments they did
better.  Each was successful in securing some fine fish.  Some, indeed,
were so large that, after the boys had plunged their spears into them,
they required the help of the Indians to get them into the canoe.

When the torches burned down others were lighted, and thus the sport
continued until the boats began to feel the additional weight of the
fish thus secured.  The boys were loath to think of stopping, and no
wonder, for everything was so strange and weird.

The three canoes with their picturesque occupants, lit up by the blazing
torches, the waters so transparent under the light, and phosphorescent-
like on every wave, made a picture never to be forgotten.  Then so close
around was the dense deep darkness of the solitudes that stretched away
and away for miles in all directions.

No wonder the hearts of the lads were beating loudly, and in the
suppressed excitement of such surroundings no thoughts of sleep there
troubled them.

"O, if our friends could only see us here," said Frank, "wouldn't they
be pleased with the sight?"

"Ay," said Alec, "and what would not the boys of the old school give to
be here for a few hours with us?"

"Hush!  What is that?" said Sam, as he pointed his finger to a spot in
the dense dark forest of trees that hung down low to the water's edge,
not many yards from where they were slowly floating along on the stream.

That there was something was very evident, for there were to be seen two
great shining eyes that, owing to the dense darkness around them, seemed
to be strangely large and brilliant.

"Will-o'-the-wisp," said Frank.

"Jack-o'-lantern," said Alec.

"A banshee," said Sam.

"A big deer," said Mustagan.  "Keep still, and we will soon shoot him."

Quietly and quickly was a gun lifted up, and with a word to the men, to
steady, with their paddles, the canoe in which Mustagan was seated, he
fired, and the report was followed by the plunge of the body of a great
deer, as he fell headlong in the water not thirty yards away.  The sound
of the gun broke the deathlike solitudes and aroused a chorus; and for a
long time the cry of the bittern and the loon mingled with the quacking
of ducks and the wakeful calls of the sentinel wild goose.

More torches were lit, and the body of the deer was secured with a rope;
and, as the night was far spent, it was decided to go ashore, if they
could find a safe place, and there rest until morning, as it was utterly
impossible with the heavy load of fish to think of returning through the
darkness with the additional weight of this splendid deer.

As closely as possible the three canoes had kept together.  This made it
more sociable in the gloom, and was much enjoyed by the boys, as they
could thus freely chat with each other and watch each other's success or
failure.

As the locality was known to some of the Indians, a sheltered little
sandy beach was soon discovered, and here the now tired party drew up
and landed.  A fire was speedily built, and a kettle of tea and a lunch
were prepared and enjoyed by the hungry ones.  Then they quickly rolled
themselves up in their blankets, and were soon away in the land of
dreams.  Nothing softer had they under them than the rocks, and no roof
over them but the starry heavens, yet they slept in a way that thousands
of excited, weary, restless ones, tossing about in comfortable beds,
might well envy, but could not command.

Very early were the boys aroused for the home trip, but, early as they
were up, the Indians had already skinned and cut up the deer, and
divided it among the boats.  Part of the fish were given to some Indian
women and children who were encamped on some of the islands, near which
they passed on the route back to the camp.

Mr Ross was much pleased with the glowing accounts which the boys gave
of the night's adventures.  Much praise was given to Sam for having seen
the great luminous eyes of the deer, even before any of the Indians had
observed them.

Mr Ross, in answer to the boys' inquiries, explained how some deer,
like fish, seemed to be fascinated by a bright light, and will allow the
hunters to get very near, especially if they are on the water, ere they
will try to get away.

The weather proving favourable, the camp was struck, the canoes loaded,
and they all proceeded on the way to Montreal Point once more.  They
only stopped for an hour or so at Spider Islands to melt some pitch, and
mend a crack which had opened in the bottom of one of the canoes.

The boys, who in their own land had seen the great iron ships being
prepared in the dry docks, were quite amused and interested at the
primitive way in which these Indians made watertight their light canoes.
When this was done they were all soon under way again, and, not long
after, the shores of the mainland began to loom up plainly before them.

They all remembered the last visit, and the battle with the wolves.  So
they were naturally on the lookout for a herd of deer or the sound of
ravening wolves.  But not even a "whisky jack" was seen or heard.  The
desolate land seemed to be much more so by the apparent entire absence
of life.

Selecting a favourable spot, they all landed, and then, while some of
the Indians made a fire and prepared the supper, Mr Ross, with Frank,
Alec, Sam, and Mustagan, visited the scene of the great fight.  They
took the precaution to carry their guns with them, for who could tell
where the rest of those wolves might be, or what other game might not
suddenly appear in sight, even if the Indians had reported that the
wolves had all disappeared.

Sam and Frank took special pride in pointing out to Alec and Mr Ross
where they had stood when, under Mustagan's directions, they brought
down the two leading wolves in that memorable and exciting battle, and
then where they fought in the terrible hand-to-hand encounter, where it
was hunting-axe against teeth.  But little was left to tell of the fray.
A few whitened, well-picked bones were to be seen here and there, but
nothing more, so they returned to the camp fire, where the supper was
now prepared, and ready indeed were they for it.

As they had made such a long trip that day, Mr Ross, who was ever
mindful of the welfare of his canoemen, decided that there should be no
hunting that evening or night.  So they gathered round the camp fire,
and, with bright and pleasant chat, the happy hours passed away, one of
them being specially interesting as Mr Ross, who had made the gathering
up of Indian legends a favourite study or amusement when not absorbed in
heavier work, was requested by the boys to tell them an Indian legend or
story.

Yielding to this request, he cheerfully consented, and not only had he
the boys as interested listeners, but the Indians of the party gathered
round, curious to hear how well a white man was able to tell one of
their favourite stories.

"Before the general deluge," Mr Ross began, "there lived two enormous
creatures, each possessed of vast power.  One was an animal with a great
horn on his head, the other was a huge toad.  The latter had the whole
management of the waters, keeping them secure in his own body; and
emitting only a certain quantity when needed for the watering of the
earth.  Between these two creatures there arose a quarrel which
terminated in a great fight.  The toad in vain tried to swallow its
antagonist, but the latter rushed upon it, and with his horn pierced a
hole in its side, out of which the waters rushed in floods, and soon
overflowed the face of the earth.

"Nanahboozoo was living at this time on the earth.  Observing the water
rising higher and higher he fled to the loftiest mountain for refuge.
Perceiving that even this retreat would soon be inundated, he selected a
large cedar tree, which he purposed to ascend should the waters come up
to him.  Before the floods reached him he caught a number of animals and
fowls and put them into his bosom.  At length the waters covered the
mountain.  Nanahboozoo then ascended the cedar tree, and as he went up
he plucked its branches and stuck them in his belt, which girdled his
waist.

"When he reached the top of the tree he sang, and beat the tune with his
arrow upon his bow, and as he sang the tree grew, and kept pace with the
water for a long time.  At length he abandoned the idea of remaining any
longer on the tree.  So he took the branches he had plucked, and with
them constructed a raft, on which he placed himself with the animals and
fowls.  On this raft he floated about for a long time, till all the
mountains were covered and all the beasts of the earth and fowls of the
air, except those he had with him, had perished.

"At length Nanahboozoo thought of forming a new world, but how to
accomplish it without any materials he knew not.  At length the idea
occurred to him that if he could only obtain a little of the earth,
which was then under the water, he might succeed in making a new world
out of the old one.  He accordingly employed the different animals he
had with him that were accustomed to diving.  First, he sent the loon
down into the water in order to bring up some of the old earth; but it
was not able to reach the bottom, and, after remaining in the water some
time, came up dead.  Nanahboozoo then took it, blew upon it, and it came
to life again.  He next sent the otter, which, also failing to reach the
bottom, came up dead, and was restored to life in the same manner as the
loon.  He then tried the skill of the beaver, but without success.
Having failed with all these diving animals, he last of all took the
muskrat.  On account of the distance it had to go to reach the bottom it
was gone a long time, and came up dead; on taking it up Nanahboozoo
found, to his great joy, that it had reached the earth and had retained
some of the soil in each of its paws and mouth.  He then blew upon it,
and brought it to life again, at the same time pronouncing many
blessings on it.  He declared that as long as the world he was about to
make should endure, the muskrat should never become extinct.

"This prediction of Nanahboozoo is still spoken of by some Indians when
referring to the rapid increase of the muskrat.  Nanahboozoo then took
the earth which he found in the muskrat's paws and mouth, and having
rubbed it with his hands to fine dust he placed it on the waters and
blew upon it.  Very soon it began to grow larger and larger, until it
was beyond the reach of his eye.  Thus was spread out the new world
after the great flood.  In order to ascertain the size of this newly
created world, and the progress of its growth and expansion, he sent a
wolf to run to the end of it, measuring its extent by the time consumed
in the journey.  The first journey he performed in one day; the second
trip took him five days; the third consumed ten days; the fourth a
month; then a year; then five years.  Thus it went on until the world
became so large that Nanahboozoo sent a young wolf that could just run.
This animal died of old age before he could accomplish his journey.
Nanahboozoo then decided that the world was large enough, and commanded
it to cease from growing.

"Some time after this Nanahboozoo took a journey to view the new world
he had made, and as he travelled he created various animals suitable for
the different parts of the new world.  He then experimented in making
man.  The first one he burnt too black, and was not satisfied.  Then he
tried again, and was no better pleased, as this one was too white.  His
third attempt satisfied him, and he left him in this country, while the
first two he had made he placed far away.  He then gave to the men he
had created their various customs and habits and beliefs.

"Thus Nanahboozoo, having finished his work, now sits at the North Pole,
which the Indians used to consider the top of the earth.  There he sits
overlooking all the transactions and affairs of the people he has placed
on the earth.

"The northern tribes say that Nanahboozoo always sleeps during the
winter, but previous to his falling asleep he fills his great pipe and
smokes for several days, and that it is the smoke rising from the mouth
and pipe of Nanahboozoo which at that season of the year produces what
is called the Indian summer."

The boys listened to this Indian tradition of the flood with a great
deal of interest, and the next Sabbath they got out their Bibles and
tried to see the points of resemblance between the account given of Noah
and that given of Nanahboozoo.

They decided that Nanahboozoo was the Indian name for Noah, and the raft
was the substitute for the ark.  The sending out of the various animals
to discover and bring some earth stood for the sending forth of the
raven and the dove.  In some other conversations with Indians on the
different traditions about the flood, Mustagan told them that, in some
of the tribes he had visited, they had, in addition to what has here
been narrated, a story of a bird coming with a little twig, and sticking
it in the newly formed world of Nanahboozoo.  This little twig took root
and rapidly grew into a large tree, and from it all the other trees and
shrubs had come.

Three Boys in the Wild North Land--by Egerton Ryerson Young



CHAPTER TWENTY.

THE CALL OF THE MOOSE--PREPARATIONS FOR CAPTURE--MIDNIGHT MARCH--RIVAL
BULLS--A ROYAL BATTLE--FRANK'S SHOT--BIG TOM, THE SUCCESSFUL MOOSE
HUNTER--YOUNG MOOSE CALVES--THEIR CAPTURE--SAM'S AWKWARD PREDICAMENT.

In the morning the boys were informed that during the night the call of
a great moose bull was heard, and that an effort would be made the next
night to kill him if possible.

The moose is the largest animal that roams in these northern forests,
and is exceedingly difficult to kill.  His eyes are small and not very
good, but he has the most marvellous powers of hearing and smelling
given to almost any animal.  Then he is so cunning and watchful that
very few Indians are able, by fair stalking him in his tracks, to get a
shot at him.  He does not eat grass, but browses on the limbs and
branches of several kinds of trees.  His horns are often of enormous
proportions, but yet the speed and ease with which he can dash safely
through the dense forests is simply marvellous.

There are various ways of killing them in addition to the sportsmanlike
way of following on the trail, and thus by skill and endurance getting
within range of them.

In the winter, when the snow is deep, they have a poor chance against
the hunters, who, on their light snowshoes, can glide on the top of the
deep snow, while the great, heavy moose goes floundering in the drift.

They have a great weakness for the large, long roots of the water lily,
and so are often killed while they are out from the shore and wallowing
in the marshy places for these succulent dainties.  But the most
exciting sport is that which the Indians were here going to adopt in
trying to bring this big fellow, whose bellowings the night before had
so arrested the attention of those who had been awakened by him.

Mr Ross explained that the bellowings of the previous night were his
calls to his mates in the forest.  Perhaps they had been alarmed by some
hunters or chased by wolves, and had become widely separated.  So nature
has not only given to the moose of both sexes this wonderful power of
hearing, but to the males this great voice, which in the stillness of
the night in those northern solitudes can be heard for a number of
miles.  The reply call of the female moose is much softer, and the
Indians have a plan by which they can so successfully imitate it that
they can often call the old male moose close enough to them to be shot;
and cases are known where the infuriated beast, maddened by the
deception played upon him, has rushed upon his deceiver and made it
lively work for him to get beyond the reach of his great antlers.

For fear of driving the moose out of the neighbourhood, it was decided
that there was to be no firing of guns that day, as the Indians were
certain there had been no answer to the call of the male on the part of
the other sex, and judging from their knowledge of the habits of the
animal they decided that, if not alarmed, he would be within hearing
distance about ten o'clock that evening.

The question then was, "How are we to spend the day?"  This was speedily
answered when the Indians reported that there were any number of
sturgeon seen jumping in the shallows among the rocks not far out from
the shore.  The method of securing them was by spearing them from the
canoes.  A good deal of calculation was required in managing the canoes
so that they would not be upset in the excitement of the sport, and then
a great deal of strength had to be exerted to hold on to the spears when
once the great big sturgeon, from four to six feet long, was transfixed.

There were some amusing upsets, and the boys in turn came back to the
camp drenched, but happy with the varied adventures of the day.  Nearly
a score of fine sturgeon rewarded them for their efforts.  These the
Indians cut into flakes and dried, while the valuable oil was distilled
and put away in most ingeniously constructed vessels made out of the
skin of the sturgeon themselves.

But in spite of the fun and success of the sturgeon fishing the boys
were simply wild in anticipation of the events of the coming night.  The
very uncertainty and weirdness of it had a fascination for them that
made it impossible for them to shut their eyes and have a short sleep in
the early hours of the evening, as Mr Ross suggested.  The very idea of
sleeping seemed an utter impossibility.  So they kept awake, and were
alert and watchful on the movements of the Indians, who made their final
preparations to take advantage of the natural instincts of these great
animals to meet each other.

These preparations were not very many.  From the birch trees that grew
near they stripped off long rolls of new bark.  These they carefully
made into a horn-shaped instrument, the end of which was much wider than
the other.  Then they put on their darkest garments, as the appearance
of any thing white would alarm the wary game and frighten them away.

The evening was exceedingly favourable.  But little wind was blowing,
and that was from the land toward the lake; thus the scent would not be
carried toward the moose, if they appeared.

The next question was, who were to go and where had they better be
stationed?  So it was decided that as Mr Ross had caught the contagion
of the hour, he and Alec should take a position at a designated rock,
both well-armed, while out near the lake one of the clever Indians,
armed with one of these oddly constructed birch-bark horns, should be
placed.  The reason of this was the expectation that, if the old moose
heard the call, while perhaps too wary to come within range of the man
sounding it, he might be near enough for a good shot from Mr Ross and
Alec.  In the same manner Frank was stationed with Mustagan, and Sam
with Big Tom, while two other Indians, acting the part of trumpeters to
them, were stationed in the rear near the water's edge.

For a couple of hours very eerie and weird seemed everything to these
excited boys.  No moon was in the heavens, but the stars shone down upon
them with a splendour and a beauty unknown in a land of fogs and mists.
No conversation was allowed, as the hearing of the moose is most acute.
For a time the silence was almost oppressive.

After watching at their different stations for about half an hour or so,
there wailed out on the silent air a cry so wild, so startling, so
blood-curdling that it filled with terror and dismay the hearts of our
three boys, who had never heard anything like it.  Strung up as they
were to such tension by their surroundings out there in the gloom of
that quiet night, and then to be thus startled by such a cry, no wonder
each lad clutched his gun and instinctively crowded close to his
experienced companion in that trying hour.  Yet such was their
confidence in them that they remained silent, but were soon relieved
when they were told, in a whisper, that it was only the cry of the lynx,
and, blood-curdling though it was, it was really a good sign for them.
When this harsh, doleful sound had died away in the distance, from a
tree near them some great owls began their strange hootings, and the
Indians again said, "Good signs."

About midnight the first note of the sound for which they were listening
was heard.  It was far away in the forest directly east from them, with
the wind coming from the same direction.  The Indians remained perfectly
still until the roaring became somewhat louder, and then the boys were
somewhat startled at hearing, but in a much softer key, a sound very
similar in their rear.  This latter sound was made by the men through
these queer birch-bark horns they had been so industriously working at
during the day.  From long practice some of these Indians can so
perfectly imitate the sounds of the female moose that they can deceive
the males, and thus bring them toward them.  These artificial sounds
were not long unanswered.  Louder and louder still were the roarings
that came at intervals from the deep forest.  Soft and varied were the
responses as the Indian in the rear of Mr Ross and Alec blew his
inviting notes, but in the rear of the others there sounded out the
enticing strains.

"Listen," said Mr Ross, "there is the roar of another old moose, and we
are in for a battle."

Fortunately the wondrous auroras came shooting up from below the horizon
and flashing and dancing along the northern sky; they almost dispelled
the darkness, and lit up the landscape with a strange, weird light.
This necessitated a quick change of base on the part of the hunters, and
so, as soon as possible, they retired under the shadows of some dense
balsam trees.  Hardly were they well hidden from view before a great
moose showed himself in full sight in a wide opening, where the fire,
years before, had burned away the once dense forest.  In response to his
loud calls the three Indians with their horns replied, and this seemed
to greatly confuse him.  He would move first a little in one direction
and then in another, and then hesitated and sent out his great roar
again.  Quickly, and in a lower strain, did the Indians closely imitate
the female's call.  Before there could be the responsive answer on his
part to them there dashed into the open space from the forest, not many
hundreds of yards from him, another moose bull that roared out a
challenge that could not be mistaken.

The Indians with their birch horns again imitated the calls of the
female moose.  This they did with the purpose of bringing the bulls
within range before they engaged in battle.

It is a singular characteristic of many wild animals, that when the
rival males battle for the possession of the females, they like to do it
in the presence, of those for whom they fight.  Their presence seems to
be a stimulus to nerve them to greater courage.  So it is with the moose
and other deer species, and so by the light of the dancing auroras the
three boys and those with them watched these two great moose, each
standing at the foreshoulders over sixteen hands high, as they thus came
on toward the spot where Mr Ross and Alec were well hid from
observation, and behind whom the Indian kept now softly lowing like a
moose cow.

In their hurried movements they had gradually approached each other, and
so when not far from Mr Ross and Alec's hiding place they suddenly
appeared in a clear, elevated spot, and supposing they were now close to
their companions they turned suddenly and gave each other battle.  And a
royal battle it was!  A moose bull at the best is not handsome, but an
angry, infuriated moose bull, when his temper is up, is one of the most
hideous of monsters.  The long, coarse hair of his head and neck seems
to be all turned in the wrong direction, his small eyes have a most
wicked gleam in them, and, taking him altogether, we know of no picture
more likely to cause a person who sees him to have the next night the
nightmare.

With a roar they rushed at each other, and as their great antlered heads
met in the shock of battle it was a sight not often seen.  They each
seemed as though they were resolved to conquer in the first round, and
appeared surprised at not having been able to succeed.

It undoubtedly would have been interesting to some people to have
witnessed the battle between these two well-matched moose bulls to a
finish, but the practical Indians know a thing or two about their meat,
and one is that the meat of a moose that has been in battle for a couple
of hours or so is apt to be so soft and spongy and full of air bubbles
that a hungry dog will hardly eat it.  They also know, on the other
hand, that moose meat when in prime condition is the finest venison in
the world.  The Indians were also well aware that the bulls now engaged
in battle would take but little heed of any other foes.  They therefore
quickly gathered in with Frank and Sam to the spot where Mr Ross and
Alec were hidden, and there in quiet whispers arranged their plans for
the killing of the two great moose ere the fierce battle had much longer
continued.

The Indians were anxious that the boys should have the honour of killing
them, but Mr Ross hesitated to expose any one of them to the fierce
rush of an infuriated wounded moose bull in case the bullet had not done
its work.  The Indians, cautious though they are, however, saw here an
opportunity such as might not for a long time be theirs, and so pleaded
for them, and promised to so place themselves as to be ready with a
reserve fire if it should be necessary.

To Frank and Alec the honour of the first fire was given.  If this did
not immediately bring both of the moose down Mr Ross and Sam were to
fire next, while the Indians would be as a reserve in case of emergency.
Mustagan was given charge over all in case of any need arising.  After
a short survey of the fierce conflict it was decided that they must
quietly work round the combatants and fire at them from the forest side.
Under the guidance of Mustagan the single party quietly drew back a
little, and then, making a detour, were nearly in the rear of the
fighting animals when a quick, sharp word from Mustagan caused them all
to drop flat upon the ground, for there, clearly visible in the light of
the dancing auroras, not two hundred yards away, was a large moose cow
with two young calves at her side.  So intently was she watching the
battle that she had not the slightest suspicion of the presence of these
hunters.

This was a new complication.  What was to be done?  If possible she must
be killed.  The meat of a cow moose is very much superior to that of the
bull.  Gliding past the boys like a panther went Big Tom from the front
to consult with Mustagan, who was at the rear.  Soon it was settled that
Big Tom was to get that cow, while the bulls were to be killed as
arranged.

But a few seconds for consultation were needed between these two Indian
hunters, and then to the eyes of the boys it seemed as though Big Tom,
the largest man in the party, literally sank into the ground, so small
did he seem to make himself, as with his gun in the fickle light he
silently glided away.  Mustagan then, with the party close behind him,
moved on again to the scene of the battle, which was still fiercely
raging.  The ground was very uneven, and as every advantage was taken of
it the boys were able to secure a most advantageous position not more
than fifty yards from the combatants.

The fierce battle was a sight sufficient to try the nerves of much older
persons than our boys.  The bulls seemed simply wild with rage, and as
in their mad rushes their horns struck together Frank and Alec declared
that they saw fire flash from them; others, however, said it was only
auroral reflection as they turned at certain angles.  Mustagan beckoned
the two boys who were to have the honour of the first fire, and placing
them side by side he quietly said:

"Wait until in their fighting they turn their sides to you, then aim to
strike them behind the foreshoulders."

They had not long to wait ere the double report rang out on the midnight
air, and as an echo to it another one was heard not far away.  That the
balls struck was evident, for the thud of the bullets was heard
distinctly by all, so close were they to their game.  The effect of the
firing on one of the bulls was seen to be immediate, for, although his
huge horns seemed almost locked in those of his antagonist, he slowly
sank to the ground.  The other moose, although badly wounded, gave a
last vicious plunge at his opponent.  Then proudly lifting up his head,
and seeing for the first time his new antagonists, and being still mad
with the excitement of battle, he, without any hesitancy, rushed to the
attack.

"Fire straight at the centre of his head," were Mustagan's words.
Hardly were they uttered ere from the guns of Mr Ross and Sam the
death-dealing bullets flew on their mission and the great, fierce animal
stumbled forward a few more yards and fell dead, pierced to the brain by
both of the balls.  In a few minutes they were joined by Big Tom, who
quickly said:

"Moose cow shot, and little calves run into woods; catch um next day, if
wolves not too quick."

It was the report of his unerring shot that rang out so quickly after
Frank and Alec had fired.

The reaction after the complete silence and the long-strung-up tension,
together with the fierce battle witnessed and the decisive victory, was
very great.  No need of silence now, but the boys were so excited they
hardly knew whether to laugh or cry.  Frank said he wanted to howl.
Alec said he wanted to dance.  Sam said he wanted to swing a shillalah.
And they all said, "What would not the boys at home give to be here?"

A fire was quickly kindled, and a couple of Indians remained as watchers
while the rest returned to the not very distant camp.  The Indian in
charge had supper ready for them, which was much enjoyed, and then as
speedily as possible they were wrapped up in their blankets and doubly
wrapped in sweet, refreshing sleep.  Very few were their hours of
slumber.  Daylight comes early in the summer time in high latitudes, and
so when the boys heard the Indians moving about and preparing breakfast
they sprang up also, and after a hasty bath in the lake were ready for
their breakfast and eager to be off, not only to see where their bullets
had struck the moose bulls, but to find out how it was that while one
dropped so quickly the other was able to make that fierce charge upon
them.

When they reached the scene of last night's exciting adventures they
hardly recognised that locality, so different does a place look in
daylight from what it does when illumined by the ever-changing auroras.

However, here was the place sure enough, for some Indians had already
nearly skinned the great animals, and had traced the bullets that had
been fired.  Frank's bullet had pierced the heart of the one that had so
quickly dropped in the fight; Alec's had gone through the lungs, and,
though the wound was a mortal one, it did not so suddenly result in
death; hence his ability to make that fearful charge, which was so
promptly stopped by the balls of Mr Ross and Sam, both of which were
taken out of his brain.  This was very satisfactory to the boys, and so
they were bracketed with equal honours all round by Mr Ross, much to
their delight, for three nobler, more unselfish lads never chummed
together.  The success of one was the success of all, and when one
seemed to fail, or make a miss, the others were uneasy until he was at
the head in the next adventure.

But the question now was, "Where are those young moose calves?"  The
Indian watchers could give the boys but little information.  All they
knew was that after the auroras faded away in the dark hour just before
dawn they heard them moving about; but they did not frighten them, as
Mr Ross had left orders that they were not to be disturbed, unless some
prowling wolves should appear as though on their trail.  None, however,
were heard, and so the Indians had remained very quiet.

So the search for the young moose immediately began, and although it was
prosecuted with a good deal of vigour, still not a sign of the young
animals was discovered.  At length Mustagan, who had watched the younger
members of the party at work, said:

"You want to see those calves quick, just wait."

Quietly taking up one of the birch-bark horns, he began softly blowing
into it.  The sounds he made were like those of the mother cow when she
calls her young from its secluded retreat, where she has cunningly hid
it away from its many enemies while she is off feeding.

Now high, now low, now prolonged and in different tones, came out from
that great birch-bark horn those peculiar notes, some of which were not
unlike the sounds made by the domestic cow when separated from her calf.
For once in his life Mustagan was a complete failure.  For blow as much
as he would--and great were his exertions--no calf appeared in answer to
his calls.

Said Big Tom, who was a famous moose hunter, and who had listened to
Mustagan with a good deal of interest and some amusement: "Let me have
that horn, and I will show you how it ought to be done.  You boys watch
the woods and be ready to run."

Then putting the birch horn to his mouth he cooed out such a tender moo-
oo-o-o that the boys were fairly startled by the similarity of its sound
to the familiar notes in the barnyards at home; but soon other things
excited them, for hardly had the echoes of Big Tom's mooings died away
before there came rushing out from the forest the two moose calves.  On
they came directly toward the spot where Big Tom had uttered his call.
So sudden had been their appearance that all remained perfectly still to
watch their movements.  Certain that they had heard their mother, they
were now anxiously looking for her.  They were a pair of fine-looking
moose calves, about three months old, and so it was resolved, if
possible, to capture them alive and tame them.  It turned out not so
easy a matter as had been anticipated.  With as little display as
possible the boys and Indians tried to surround them before they become
alarmed.  So confident did the young creatures seem that they had heard
their mother that it was some time before they became suspicious of
danger, and then only when they were about encircled by the hunters.
Then the fun began.  Turning toward the point in the forest from which
they had emerged, they made a dash for liberty.  Frank and Alec threw
themselves on one, and getting their arms around its neck made a
desperate effort to hold it.  They were amazed at its strength, as it
easily carried them along, and not until they succeeded in tripping it
up and throwing it on the ground were they able to hold it.

Sam and a young Indian tackled the other one, and found him much more
pugnacious.  With a vicious kick he struck the Indian in the stomach,
who at once decided that he had had enough of that sport and quickly
retired, leaving Sam now to struggle with him alone.  Sam at first
seized him by his long ears, but was unable to bring force enough to
arrest his progress in that way.  Then he tried to seize him by the
neck, but a few strong blows with his fore feet made that a difficult
and dangerous task, and so Sam had to let go.  This seemed to interest
the calf, and so from being the one attacked he became the aggressor.
The pugnacity of the calf, and the lively way in which he butted his
opponent, caused great amusement to the onlookers.  Sam could not stand
this, and so he threw himself desperately on the animal, and hugging him
around his neck, held him so closely that he could neither use his hard
little head nor his fore feet, with which he had been fighting so
vigorously.  Sam was in an awkward predicament.  Gladly would a number
of Indians have rushed to his help, but Mr Ross wanted him to have the
honour of capturing the young moose alone, and so held them back; but
all watched the odd struggle, which was intensely amusing.

Sam still pluckily held on, but the calf evidently considered himself
the aggressor, for he tried hard to shake Sam loose from him, his object
evidently being to strike him with his head or feet.  This Sam
endeavoured to prevent, until at length he was afraid to let go his grip
for fear of the now vicious young animal, and so, in his desperation, he
called out most comically:

"Will somebody come and help me to let go of this calf?"  Help was soon
there, and strong arms quickly captured the spirited young creature.
It, as well as its companion, was securely tied and taken back with the
party when they returned to Sagasta-weekee.

So great was the quantity of meat and other things secured that a canoe
was hastily sent back to the home, and the next day a large boat,
similar to those used by the Hudson Bay Company in the fur trade,
arrived with a good crew.  Everything was placed on board, including the
two young moose, that already would eat the young branches gathered for
them by the boys.  A strong yard, inclosed with planks and logs, was
made for them, and they soon became quite tame and gentle.

Harnessed to a cariole, or dog-sled, they travelled with great speed,
and seemed to enjoy the fun.  But they drew the line at the saddle, and
no Texas bronco could more easily rid himself of a tenderfoot than these
lively animals with their enormous forequarters could send their would-
be riders into the snow or grass.

Our illustration gives us a good idea of how they looked when ready the
next spring to be shipped by the Hudson Bay ship to one of the big
zoological gardens in Great Britain.



CHAPTER TWENTY ONE.

EXCURSION TO SEA RIVER FALLS--THE CRANBERRY PICKING--THE CONTEST--"WHERE
ARE THE CHILDREN?"--WENONAH AND RODERICK LOST IN THE FOREST--FIRST
NIGHT'S UNSUCCESSFUL SEARCH--THE TRACKS IN THE SAND--MUSTAGAN'S
STARTLING DISCOVERY.

Thus pleasantly passed the bright weeks away at Sagasta-weekee.  Every
day had its duties and amusements.  Mr Ross, although the best of
masters, was almost a martinet in his affairs, both in the home circle
and among those in his employ.  This strict disciplinary method is
absolutely essential for comfort and success in such a land.  If there
is a lax method of living and conducting business, soon everything is in
confusion and wretchedness.

Yet while everything went on with almost military precision in the home
life, there was nothing about it to make it otherwise than pleasant and
enjoyable.  So the boys ever returned to this happy home with delight
from the excitements of their various hunting and fishing excursions.

One of the great deprivations of living in a land where the summer is so
short and the winter so long and cold is the lack of native fruit.  No
apples, pears, cherries, or peaches grow in that northern land.  These
fruits must be brought to it in a preserved or dried condition.

In some sections wild plums are to be found; in others, abundance of
cranberries grow most luxuriously.  A few wild strawberries spring up in
the clearings where great fires have destroyed the forests.  A sweet
bilberry also abounds in some parts of the country.  This fruit is much
prized by the Indians, and frequently used, mixed with dried meat, in
the manufacture of their finest pemmican.

The Indian women in the neighbourhood of white settlements or trading
posts bring in large quantities of the cranberries, which they gather in
the marshes and forests, and sell to those who are able and willing to
purchase.

Sometimes cranberry parties were organised, and nearly all the members
of the post and families interested would join together and go off on an
excursion of several days to places where the berries were abundant, and
thus secure large quantities, which were an acceptable addition to their
rather meagre bill of fare.

This year, as the berries were reported by the Indian women to be very
abundant, Mr and Mrs Ross, at the urgent request of their own
children, as well as to give the boys the unique experience, decided to
have a cranberry outing on quite an extended scale, and one that would
last for several days.  It turned out to be unique and memorable in
various ways.

It was decided that they should go into camp below Sea River Falls, on
the Nelson, and pick berries at their leisure in the great section of
country lying north-west from that point, as there they were to be found
in large quantities.

For the comfort and convenience of the family a couple of large tents
were sent on and pitched by some Indians.  The various utensils and
supplies necessary for a good time were also forwarded, so that when Mr
and Mrs Ross, with Minnehaha, Wenonah, Roderick, and our three lads,
arrived they found everything arranged for their comfort.

It was an ideal place for an outing.  Before them was the great river
with the music of its rushing, roaring rapids, down which it was so
exciting to run in the canoes under the skillful guidance of the
cautious, experienced Indians.  The great granite rocks in picturesque
beauty were everywhere to be seen.  Back of the sandy beach and grassy
sward, where stood the tents and camp fires, was the deep, dark,
unbroken forest, that stretched away and away for hundreds of miles.

So delightful were the surroundings, and so good the fishing, as well as
novel and interesting this running the rapids, that two or three days
were thus spent ere any definite arrangements about the cranberry
picking was thought of.

To aid in gathering a large quantity of berries Mrs Ross had engaged a
number of Indian women, who were famous as noted berry pickers.  These
women brought with them a large Indian vessel called a "rogan."  It is
made out of birch-bark, and is capable of holding about twenty quarts of
berries.

There are two kinds of cranberries in this land.  One is called the
high-bush variety, while the other is known as the moss cranberry, as it
is generally found where moss is abundant, and grows on a small vine on
the ground.  It was this latter kind that here abounded and that they
had come to gather.

As the outing was not merely for the purpose of gathering berries, they
did not pick very steadily.  Mrs Ross well knew that her faithful
Indian women would see that she had her full supply.  So the members of
the family picked berries, went fishing or hunting or canoeing, more or
less frequently, as their inclinations prompted them.  Several days thus
passed in varied sport and work.

One evening as the Indian women came in with their heavy loads they
reported finding, not very far distant, a splendid place, where the
berries were very plentiful, and the ground dry and mossy and free from
muskegs and rocks.  So it was decided that, with the exception of some
of the servants, who would remain and take care of the camp, all should
go and have a big day of it at berry picking, and then they would make
their arrangements for returning home.

The preparations necessary were soon made.  A number of large and small
rogans were made ready, and, in addition, the men took the precaution to
carry with them their guns and ammunition.

Minnehaha and Wenonah were very happy and proud of the honour of taking
charge of their little brother Roddy, as they loved to call him.  As the
children were anxious to do their share of picking berries they were
each supplied with a little birch-bark vessel, and with great delight
did they gather quite a number of the bright red berries that were so
abundant.

As they had left the camp early in the morning they were able to do a
capital forenoon's work.  At midday they all assembled at a designated
place, and much enjoyed the dinner that the servants had prepared for
them.  Then again they separated, and men, women, and children were once
more very busily employed in gathering in the fruit, while pleasant chat
and merry laugh would be heard from various parts.

To add a little zest and excitement to the pleasant work the whole
company had been divided into two parties, and between them there was a
lively contest as to which should succeed in gathering the greater
quantity of berries.

Little Roderick and Wenonah were placed on one side as being equal in
their picking abilities to their older sister, Minnehaha.  Very proud
were the little folks as they filled their dishes and came and emptied
them into the large vessels.  Thus the contest raged, and, as the two
parties were about equal in picking abilities, the excitement rose very
high, and all exerted themselves to the utmost that their side might be
victorious.

It had been previously arranged that the contest was to cease at
sundown, so as to give them plenty of time to return to the camp in the
beautiful gloaming.

Some able-bodied Indian men were employed to carry the large birch
rogans to the selected spots, where the berries were to be measured and
the victors announced.  Some time was spent in this work amid the
excitement of all, as the contest was very close.

"Where is Roderick?" said Mrs Ross.

"O, he is with Wenonah," said Minnehaha.

"And where is Wenonah?" was the question now.

No one seemed to know.  And so the cry of the sweet musical name rang
out on the air:

"Wenonah!  Wenonah!"

But to that call, and also to that for the little brother Roderick,
there was no response.

At once there was excitement and alarm.

"Who saw them last, and where were they?"

Many more such questions were uttered, while some persons ran one way
and some another.  Several young men seized their guns and fired several
shots in quick succession, but Mr Ross stopped them as quickly as
possible.

Mr Ross, although alarmed, was the first to get some order among them,
and on the closest questioning it came out that none were certain that
they had seen the children since about three o'clock, and that was when
they were emptying their little dishes of berries into the larger
receptacles.  Then, excited by the contest, they had rushed off for
more.

A rumbling of thunder in the west startled them, and so, prompt must be
their movements.  To the point where the little ones were last seen a
dozen or more had hurried, and ere they scattered in the forest to begin
the search they were told that the firing of the guns would be the
signal of success or failure.  One report meant they were not found; two
reports, close together, was the signal that they had been found, and
for the searchers to return.  Immediately all those who were able to act
as searchers, without themselves becoming lost, scattered to their work.
On account of the vastness of the forest Mr Ross positively refused to
allow Frank, Alec, or Sam to go any distance away on the search.  This
was a keen disappointment to the boys, but Mr Ross was wise in his
decision.  The searchers had very little to assist them in their work.
There were any number of signs where had walked the busy feet, but the
trouble was there had been so many pickers at work, and they had
travelled so far, that it was impossible to pick out the tracks of the
two lost children.

Only an hour or so were the searchers able to do anything that night;
for the thunderstorm was on them, and in spite of all they could do they
were all drenched through and through.  Mrs Ross, although stricken
with grief, kept firm control over herself, and, surrounded and
comforted by Minnehaha and the three boys, huddled under the slight
protection which some Indian women had hastily prepared against the
fierce storm.  Mr Ross had done all that was possible in directing the
watchers as they brought all their Indian experience to their aid.  Thus
the hours passed.  The storm spent its fury in the heavy downpour of
rain, and then was gone.  The stars came out from behind the flying
clouds, and the night again became one of beauty.  Still there were no
signs of the children.  Somewhere out in the forest, alone, were those
little ones whom none as yet had been able to find.  The heavy rain had
completely obliterated every vestige of a trail.  So the searchers, sad
and quiet, came in one after another, grieved and vexed at their
failure.

Mr Ross tried to induce Mrs Ross, with Minnehaha, to return to the
camp and obtain refreshment and rest, but she most positively refused.

"My children are out in the wild forest, exposed to many dangers.  I
cannot go to bed until they are found," she passionately exclaimed.

So a great fire was built out of dry logs, blankets were sent for from
the tents, and the saddest and longest night to those terrified ones
slowly passed away.  Mr Ross had not only sent for food and blankets
for all, but he had also dispatched swift runners to go by land and
water and cease not until they had found Mustagan and Big Tom and told
them of his loss and sorrow.

Soon after sunrise these grand old men walked into the camp.  A hasty
council was summoned, and these old men closely questioned the Indians
who had been present the previous day, and who had searched until the
storm and darkness stopped them.

When they were told that a number of guns had been fired off in quick
succession they were much annoyed, and said:

"Great mistake.  Lost children in the woods always hide when they hear
guns."

But no time must be lost.  The country was to be marked out, and a code
of signals explained, by which they could communicate with each other,
as soon as any trail was found.  Not in straight lines were they to go,
but in enlarging circles until they should cross the trail of the
children.  When it was found, they were to report as speedily as
possible, that there might be a concentration from that point and thus
no waste in fruitless search.

Not until about noon was the first sign struck; then it was a number of
miles away from the camp.  It is simply marvellous the distances that
lost persons, even little children, will travel.  The clue discovered by
Big Tom was where the children had left the dry, rocky lands, which left
no trail of the little feet, and had crossed a small, shallow stream.
Here the sands were clearly marked by the little footsteps, and Tom's
big heart gave a great thump of joy as he saw the signs so clearly
indicated before him.  At first he feared to fire the signal, lest he
should add to the terror of the lost children; but as soon as he
examined the footprints he saw that they had been made the evening
before, and by little ones who were hurrying on as rapidly as possible.

As quickly as he could he followed them up until they were lost again on
the dry rocks on the other side; then he fired his gun, and while
waiting the coming of others he kept diligently searching for some other
signs of the wanderers.

Not long had he to wait ere he was joined by Mr Ross, Mustagan, and
others.  They were all excited, and glad to see these footprints, but
judged by the hardness of the sand in the steps that the children had
passed over the creek some hours before dark the previous evening.  This
being the case, they might have travelled some miles farther before they
were stopped by the storm and darkness.  But no needless time was spent
in surmises and conjecturing.  A new starting point had been found, and
from it the search was again renewed with all the vigour possible.

If Wenonah and Roderick had been pure white children, brought up in a
civilised land with all the ignorance incident to such regions, they
would have been found long ere this; but their part Indian blood and
thorough training in that wild north land was now really to them a
misfortune--first, because they had the strength and training to push on
with such wonderful speed and endurance; again, it also made them wary
and cunning, and so fearful of being tracked by wild beasts or hostile
Indians that they carefully, but rapidly, moved along in a way that
children not brought up in such a land would never have dreamed of.

So, while the Indians were looking for traces of the children, the
wandering lost ones were doing all they could not to leave behind them
the vestige of a trail.  Thus hours passed on, the sun went down in
beauty, the shadows of night began to fall; still not another sign of
the wanderers had been found.

Discouraged and annoyed at failure, one after another of the searchers
returned to the spot where the footsteps had been discovered.  Here the
camp had been made, and here had come Mrs Ross, with the boys and
others.

The sight of the tiny footsteps of the hurrying feet of her little
darlings nearly broke her heart.  But she crushed down her great sorrow,
that nothing in her should divert anyone, even her husband, in the
search for those who were still exposed to so many dangers--lost in the
great forest of so many thousands of square miles.

The last to come in was Mustagan, and his face was that of a man who has
bad news but, by intense effort, shows it not in his countenance, but
keeps it locked up in his heart.  Few and yet searching were the words
uttered at the camp fire as each one had declared to Mustagan that there
had been no fresh signs.  He himself had not given any answer, and, by
asking questions of the others, had thus thrown off suspicion as
regarded himself.  But nevertheless he had seen signs, and what he had
seen had nearly driven him wild.  But darkness had come on him almost
suddenly from the arising up of a black cloud in the west, and so, in
spite of all his experience and anxiety, he had been compelled to return
shortly after making this startling discovery.  What he had seen had so
alarmed him that he dare not tell, even to Mr Ross.

Very sad, indeed, was that second night around the camp fire.  Mr and
Mrs Ross were nearly broken-hearted.  Frank, Alec, and Sam spent the
night in sleepless sorrow.  The Indians, who all dearly loved the lost
little ones, sat back in the gloom and were still and quiet.  A kind of
stupor seemed to be over them all, with one exception, and, strange to
say, that one was Mustagan.  Sharp eyes were on him, and some wondered
why he was so strangely agitated and was so restless and excited.

A little after midnight he abruptly sprang up, and speaking to Big Tom
and a couple of other Indians they all withdrew some distance back into
the darkness of the forest.  To them in quiet tones, so as not to be
heard by the sorrowing ones at the camp fire, Mustagan told what he had
seen just as the darkness had set in.  When they heard his story they
were as much excited as was he.

His story was this: he had pushed on in the direction he had selected in
the hunt for the children, and toward evening he had reached a part of
the country where the berries were very plentiful.  Here he had found
traces that bears were numerous, and as they are fond of these berries
they had been feasting on them.  This, of course, alarmed him, and so he
cautiously began making a circle around this place, and at length, in a
depression in the forest, he found the dried-up channel of a creek.  He
cautiously hurried along on the dry sands, and, after going on only a
few hundred yards, he found a number of fresh tracks, not only of bears
that had recently crossed but also among them the footsteps of the lost
children!

Three Boys in the Wild North Land--by Egerton Ryerson Young



CHAPTER TWENTY TWO.

CHILDREN'S FOOTSTEPS AND BEARS' TRACKS--CHILDREN IN THE CUSTODY OF THE
BEARS--THE PLAN OF RESCUE--THE BOYS' PART--THE BIRD CALL--SUCCESS.

This was terrible news; and only Indians that have such perfect control
over themselves could have heard it without making an outcry.  As it
was, Mustagan had to utter some warning words to maintain the perfect
silence that was desired.  In a few sentences he quietly stated that the
children were not then running, and, judging by their footsteps, and the
broken branches of berry-bushes, from which they had been picking the
fruit, they were not frightened.  He judged, also, from the tracks that
there were four bears, two large ones and two that were quite small.
What astonished him most of all was that the tracks were so numerous,
and seemed to say to him that both the bears and the children had
crossed and recrossed the place several times.  When he made this
discovery he hid himself at once, for fear his presence might anger the
bears and cause them to destroy the children; he listened, but could
hear no sound.

After waiting quietly for a time he returned to the trail and followed
it until it entered among the dense bushes and great rocks.  If the
light had not so quickly faded he could have easily followed them; as it
was, he was perplexed to know what to do.  If he should come up to them
in such company, he was not sure how he would be received.  So he
thought the best thing he could do was not to anger the bears, who were
evidently not disposed to hurt the children, and so he quietly withdrew
and came back to the camp.

Old hunters as they were, here was a new experience to almost every one
of them.  Big Tom was the first to speak.

"My words are," said he, "that we go and tell the master and mistress at
once.  It will comfort them to know the little ones are alive, even if
they are in such company.  We shall yet get the children.  As the bears
did not kill them at first, and there are plenty of berries, they will
not kill them soon."

To this suggestion of Big Tom's they all agreed, and immediately after
returned to the camp fire, where Mustagan, in his simple yet picturesque
way, told the story of his discovery.

The poor mother could only say:

"Thank God!  He will yet restore to me my children."

Mr Ross's lips quivered, but crushing down his own fears he said, as he
comforted his sorrow-stricken wife:

"Yes, thank God!  Perhaps he has made even the wild animals of the
forest to be their guardian angels."

Frank, Alec, and Sam had listened to Mustagan with bated breath.  As
Alec said afterward:

"My heart seemed to stop beating while I listened."

When it came out that the bears were friendly, and not disposed to
injure the children, the lads could hardly restrain the hearty cheers
that somehow, in spite of themselves, would try to burst out.

There was no more sleep that night.  As it was at least five miles to
the spot where the tracks had been discovered, the strict orders of
silence were cancelled, and soon there were noise and activity.  Food
was prepared and eaten with an appetite unknown since Wenonah and
Roderick were of the happy party.

The absorbing question with Mr and Mrs Ross, in consultation with
Mustagan and Big Tom, was how they were to proceed when the morning
came.

To follow them up and rush in upon them might anger the bears, and the
children might suffer.  To stalk them so quietly as to be able to get
within range and shoot the bears might terrify the children, or they
might be wounded by the bullets.  There was much talking and many
suggestions.  A remark from Mustagan gave Mrs Ross a hint, and so a
woman's quick intuition solved the perplexing question.

Mustagan had said that, as he carefully examined the tracks, he found
where the children had evidently filled their birch dishes with berries
and fed them to the little bears, whose many tracks had shown that, like
young dogs, they had gambolled and played around them.

Said Mrs Ross as she heard this:

"Those bears seem well disposed toward children, so the brave boys will
go on ahead with similar dishes of berries, and they will find that the
animals will rather eat the fruit than do the lads any harm."

This suggestion so delighted the boys that, without a moment's thought
of the risks they would run, they gladly consented, and were eager to
carry out the suggestion.

Mr Ross and the Indians were old bear hunters, and they could not at
first think that any such plan would be at all possible.  However, think
or plan as much as they would, they found it utterly impossible to
settle on any other scheme that appeared to them either safe or
suitable.  The result was that daylight found them still in perplexity,
and altogether undecided as to the correct method to adopt in this novel
expedition, so unique in all of their experiences.

Mrs Ross, however, and the boys, stuck to her suggestion, and pleaded
that it be attempted.  As nothing else was suggested the Indians and Mr
Ross at length consented.  However, they took many precautions to save
the lads and prevent disaster, either to them or to the children.

The preparations were soon made, even to the rogans of berries, and
heavily armed with their guns the party set out under the guidance of
Mustagan.  Mrs Ross went with them, as her anxieties were so great for
the rescue of her darlings.

When within a half mile or so of the spot where the tracks had been seen
they halted, and, after some final consultation, Mustagan and Big Tom
decided to go on and see if there were any further developments.  Very
cautiously and yet rapidly did they advance from covert to covert, until
they were so close to the sand of the dried-up stream that it was quite
visible to them, although they themselves were well hid from
observation.

Here for a time they waited, for they shrewdly conjectured from
Mustagan's description of the numerous tracks, crossing and recrossing,
that for the present, at least, the bears were abiding in that vicinity.

Not long had they to wait ere they were convinced of the correctness of
these conjectures, for coming out of the forest on the other side of the
dried-up stream were to be seen four bears and the two lost children.

Crouching down low on the ground, and peering through the dense bushes
behind which they were hidden, did our two Indians watch them for a
time, that they might decide on the best method of rescuing the little
ones.  The wind was blowing from the bears toward the Indians, and so
there was little fear of the animals scenting danger at that distance,
which was still a good quarter of a mile away.

Why the children had remained so long with the bears was perplexing to
these hunters until the mystery was solved by the fact that was now
evident to their eyes, that the children were really prisoners and the
bears would not let them escape.  As the men watched they saw Wenonah
seize Roderick's hand in hers, and, starting on a run, she tried to go
up the channel on the sands.  This movement was stopped by one of the
large bears as speedily as possible by putting himself in the children's
way.  Then children, still hand in hand, turned to the opposite
direction, and when trying there to escape were stopped by the other
large bear.  In the meantime the little ones played around them like
lively young dogs.

Foiled in their efforts to go either up or down in the dried-up channel
of the stream, after some time spent on the sands the children and bears
came up, and, entering among the berry-bushes, began to eat of the
abundant fruit.

They were now much nearer to the Indians, and it was evident that the
young bears were looking to the children to help them in picking their
breakfast of berries.

When convinced of this the Indians' eyes brightened, and they said:

"The mistress is right; the boys will feed the young bears, and we will
shoot the old ones."

Noiselessly they withdrew from their hiding place and rejoined the rest
of the party, who had with almost feverish impatience awaited their
return.  Quietly and rapidly they reported what they had seen, and then
the final preparations were made.

Quickly they all moved on, and soon were at the brow of the last hill,
from the top of which the whole of the great plain, densely covered with
the berry-bushes, could be seen, with the thread of shining sand in the
distance, already referred to.

Here on the hilltop Mr and Mrs Ross were seated behind some dense
bushes, through which they could look without creating suspicion.  Then
the Indians, taking the boys along with them, started on their dangerous
course.  Like panthers they moved quietly along, keeping as close to the
ground as possible, until they reached a ledge of rocks.  Here the
Indians, with their guns loaded with ball, were placed, while the boys,
with nothing but their baskets of berries, in company with Mustagan went
on a little farther.  Then Mustagan, giving the boys their final
instructions and charging them to keep cool and be brave, no matter what
might occur, withdrew with his gun, and hid himself behind a rock, a
little way in the rear of them.

It was an exciting time for the boys, but they had learned to have such
confidence in these grand old red men that such a thing as fear was now
about unknown in any of them, even at the most trying moments.

While there sitting they were startled by a shrill bird call from not
far behind them.  They could hardly believe their ears when they found
it came from the lips of Mustagan.  In a minute or two it was repeated,
and then again and again, with short intervals between.

To their surprise another bird call some hundreds of yards ahead of them
was heard, and after a time it was repeated.  Then the blackbird's notes
rang out from behind, and then another note came from the front.  Ere
the voice behind could again reply a solemn "Hoot-a-hoot-a-hoo" came
from the front.

For a time all was still, and then the song of the robin was heard in
front, and only a chirp was heard in the rear.

Sharp and quick was the ending.

Soon after this chirp the boys heard the bushes rustling in front of
them not fifty yards away.  Then they saw in the opening the two
children, closely followed by two young bears.  As the children slowly
moved along they kept plucking the berries and feeding them to the
greedy young animals.  The children were ragged and sadly changed as,
from their still hidden position, the boys watched them; they could see
that Wenonah, at least, seemed to know that they must act cautiously,
and they observed that frequently she spoke to the little fellow at her
side.

It was her bird notes that had answered Mustagan.  Little did they
realise, a year or so before, as he taught Wenonah these calls of the
birds and what they meant, that her very life would so soon depend upon
her knowledge of them.

Still cautiously advancing with little Roderick at her side, and both of
them feeding the little bears, she at length reached a spot where she
caught a glimpse of the boys.  Without at all raising her voice she
said:

"Crouch down as well as you can and bring the berries."

This they quickly did.

"Feed these greedy young ones while I give a basket to the old ones, so
that while they are eating them we can get away."

Poor girl!  She knew not of the number of guns that were now within
range of anything that would dare to harm her, and the boys were warned
not to speak.

Taking one of the baskets of berries, she quickly disappeared among the
dense bushes, while the boys, with the other full baskets, had made
friends with the young bears.  When Wenonah returned, she found the
young bears were filling themselves with the fruit.  So thoroughly
terrified had the children become, through fear of the bears, that
although the boys by expressive signs urged them at once to hurry in the
direction of safety and deliverance, they hesitated, and even when they
started kept fearfully looking back.

The instant they reached Mustagan he shouted to the boys to return, and
not a moment too soon, for crashing through the bushes came the two old
bears, fierce and savage, and showing that in some way they had become
suspicious of danger.

Coolly picking up the two baskets which the two young bears had upset,
the boys, keeping their faces to the fierce, savage brutes, slowly
retreated.  The bears, at first only seeing the boys, came rushing
toward them, but when they reached their young ones they stopped for a
time, and then came on to attack the boys.

To the ledge of rocks Mustagan had carried the now happy children.  They
had nearly smothered "dear old Mustagan," as they loved to call him,
with their kisses.  Wild, indeed, were they with joy as father and
mother rushed forward and received them as from the dead.  They could
only lie clinging to them while they wept out their bliss.

From it they were startled, as out rang a volley from the guns, and two
great, fierce bears rolled over each other, each shot through more than
one vital spot.

"Capture the little fellows alive!" was the cry.

And soon, after a lively chase and some sharp struggling, two four
months' old cubs were so tied up as to be unable to do any injury either
with teeth or claws.

Very anxious had the boys been during the search for the lost children.
Their only regret was that they were so powerless as to be unable to
join in the search.  Very proud, however, were they to have had some
share in the exciting events of the last hours of their strange
deliverance.  Tears were in their eyes and dimmed their vision as they
first saw them in the company of the wild beasts, showing by their
appearance what they must have suffered during the long days and nights
of such hardships.

The story of the children's account of their adventures and hardships
will be given in another chapter.  Suffice here to say that very quickly
was the march taken up, after the half-famished little ones had been
fed, for they had had nothing but berries to eat, and, as Roderick put
it:

"Naughty bears, they kept me all the time picking berries for them."

The return to the camp on the banks at Sea River Falls, and then to
Sagasta-weekee, was soon made.

Great were the rejoicings there as well as at the mission, and at the
Hudson's Bay Company's fort, when the news of the finding of the lost
ones reached them.  A special thanksgiving service was held the next
Sabbath at the mission church, at which whites and Indians from near and
far gathered, and entered heartily into the spirit of the service.

Three Boys in the Wild North Land--by Egerton Ryerson Young



CHAPTER TWENTY THREE.

WENONAH'S STORY OF THEIR MARVELLOUS ADVENTURES WITH AND DELIVERANCE FROM
THE BEARS--RODERICK'S COMMENTS.

It was wisely decided that, as the children were so exhausted, at least
a couple of days should be allowed to pass before they were asked to
give anything like a full account of their marvellous adventures.

Wenonah, of course, was the principal speaker, but Roderick often put in
some quaint remark, which gave additional interest to the story.  Seated
in her father's arms, while Roderick monopolised those of his mother,
while Minnehaha and the boys, with some friends from the Fort and
mission, gathered round, Wenonah told in her own way the story of their
strange adventures:

"Roderick and I were to try and gather as many berries as Minnehaha; so
we took our rogans, and we went to where the berries were thickest, and
once we came back and emptied our dishes, and then we hurried away where
we had seen a good many.  But we did not find as many there as we hoped,
and so we went on and on, and it took us a long time to fill our rogans,
and when we did we started to come back, but we did not find the way,
and so we hurried on and on.  Then after a while we called, and called,
and nobody answered us.  So Roddy and I said we would not cry.  So we
hurried on and on, to try and get back.  Then we came to some high
rocks, and we climbed up as high as we could, and when we called again
we thought we heard voices answering us from some other rocks, and so we
hurried over there, but there was nobody, and no voice.  Then we pushed
on, and on, and soon we heard the thunder, but we never stopped, but
just tried to get back before the rain.

"Soon we left the rocky land, and went down a long hill where we saw a
little stream.  This we crossed where the water was not deep.

"We wanted to get home, so we tried not to feel tired or to cry; but,
although we tried ever so hard, we could not find the way.  We had held
on to our dishes, but now they were not half full, and so we stopped and
ate some of the berries.  Soon after, it began to thunder very hard, and
there was lightning, and so we hurried up to some big trees, and while
we were standing under the branches, to be out of the rain, we saw one
old tree that was all hollow on one side, and as the rain was coming
down through the branches we went and got into this hollow tree.  I had
Roderick go in first so that I could keep him dry, and I stood at the
outside."

Here Roderick spoke up and said:

"I wanted to stand on the outside because I was the boy, but Wenonah
said she had better because she was the biggest."

"Then," continued Wenonah, "as it soon got very dark, and none of you
came for us, we began to cry, and we could not help it, for there we
were all alone in that hollow tree in the dark.

"After a while a big owl in one of the trees began to call.  I knew what
it was for Mustagan had taught me.  At first Roddy said it was somebody
calling him."

Again Roddy, who was now nestling in his mother's arms, spoke up and
said:

"I thought it was somebody saying to me, `Who, who, who!' and I said,
`We are Roddy and Wenonah Ross, and we are lost.'

"Then, when it called again, it only said:--

"`Oo! oo! oo!'  So then we knew what it was, as we had often heard it at
night here at home."

"We were glad to hear it," said Wenonah, "for all was now so dark and
lonely.  We could not lie down; we just had to stand up there all night.
I held Roddy up as well as I could.  Once we heard the cry of the wild
cat, and that made us keep very still.  I must have nodded some, as I
leaned against the inside of that old tree, but it was an awful long
night, and we were glad when it was light enough to see.  Then we left
that old hollow tree, and took up our dishes, and as we were very hungry
we went out among the berry-bushes and ate some of the berries.  We were
careful to leave no tracks, because of that wild cat.  We ate a lot of
berries, but we did miss our good breakfast at home.  We filled our
dishes, and then started for home; but we could not find it.  While we
were going on among the bushes we came out into a little opening, and
there were the two little bears.  We thought at first they were two
little black dogs.  They came right up to us, and when they sat up so
funnily on their little hind legs we saw they were bears, and of course
we were afraid.

"Then they came and smelled our baskets of berries, and as we held them
out to them they seemed very hungry, and at once began eating."

"But they were so greedy; they were worse than little piggies," said
little Roderick; "they made such funny little noises all the time they
were eating."

"But," continued Wenonah, "that sound of theirs seemed to call the old
bears, that we had not yet seen.  They came rushing through the bushes,
and we were so frightened we could not even cry out or let go of our
baskets.

"When they rushed at us the little bears, that were between them and us,
seemed to think that all the old bears wanted to do was to get at the
berries too, and so they kept so funnily twisting their little bodies
between the old bears and us, while all the time they were eating the
berries.  When the old bears saw this they stopped looking so fierce and
savage, and just sat down on their hind legs and looked at us feeding
their young ones.

"Then we began to wonder what would happen when the little bears had
eaten all the berries that were in our baskets.

"Little Roddy seemed to know just what to do; for as there were some
berries growing close to him, while he held his basket in one hand he
picked some more berries and fed them to the little bear.  Then I did
the same to the one that had been eating out of my dish.  Soon we began
moving slowly among the bushes for more berries, to find plenty for the
greedy little fellows, but we kept them as well as we could between the
old bears and us.

"As the old bears kept moving around we could not keep their little ones
between them and us very long, and so by and by they came close up to
us, but they did not now seem to be very angry.  One of them got close
up to Roddy, and there he stood up and looked so big beside my little
brother that I almost screamed out, I was so frightened.  But I did not
do it for fear he might hurt him.  He only moved a little, and then he
came down again on all his four legs, and as he put his big mouth close
to him Roddy just put in it a handful of berries.  After that there was
no more trouble with him except to get berries enough."

"Yes," said Roderick, "I just thought that if big bears like berries as
well as little bears perhaps they would rather have them than eat us
little children; so I just chucked that handful in his mouth, and he
just did like them."

"I was slower in making such good friends with the other bear,"
continued Wenonah, "because the little one I was feeding was such a
greedy little pig.  He would not, for a long time, let me gather a
handful and give to the big bear that, once or twice, got so close to me
as to put its cold nose against my face.  My! it made me shiver.  But I
said in my heart, `I will be brave, for I want to save Roddy,'" and the
child's voice broke.  "I did want to see my father, and my mother, and
Minnehaha again."

"But we did not cry here, did we?" said Roderick.

But the memory of that event was too great for them now, and throwing
themselves in each other's arms they burst out in a passionate fit of
weeping, that was so contagious no eyes remained dry in that group of
loved ones there gathered to hear their pathetic story.

When calm again Wenonah went on with the story:

"After a while the little ones had enough, and then they began wrestling
and playing with each other.  They acted as if they wanted Roddy to play
with them, and I told him to do so, but not to hurt them, and perhaps
the old father and mother bears would not hurt us before we could run
away."

"Yes," said Roddy, "I had great times with them, but they always wanted
to wrestle with me more than any other kind of sport."

"I kept gathering berries," said Wenonah, "while Roddy played with the
young bears.  The old ones kept me busy now and were just about as
greedy as the young ones had been.

"After a while I said to Roddy, `We must try and get away from here,'
for we did want to come home and see you all.

"We did not talk very much to each other, for our voices seemed to make
the bears angry.  But we found that when we tried to get away they got
right in front of us and stopped us with their big bodies.  This made me
feel very bad, but I did not tell Roddy.  Some time early in the day I
heard some one calling, and I tried to answer, but one of the bears
struck me such a blow with one of his paws, and showed his dreadful
teeth in such a way, that I was so frightened that I dare not call
again."

Said little Roddy, once again: "When I saw that naughty bear hit my
sister with his paw I wanted to hit him with a stick."

"This voice of whatever it was seemed to frighten the bears, and so off
they started," said Wenonah, "and they made us go along with them.  We
had to go; for if we stopped, or tried to go some other way, they
growled at us, and pushed us with their noses, and so we had to go with
them.  Soon they came out of the bushes and crossed over the sand, and
went up on the other side into the dark woods.  We were very much
afraid, but we whispered that we would not cry, but just be brave, for
we knew you would soon come and fight those great big bears.

"The way the bears made us go was this.  One big bear went on before,
then the little ones followed next, then they made Roddy and me follow
next.  We had to do it, for just behind us was the other big bear, and
he would growl at us if we did not just walk right along.

"Then, after we had travelled some time, we came out of the dark forest
among some, O, such big rocks, bigger than houses.  Among them we had to
go, until we came to a dark opening like a big door, and into this we
had to go.  It must have been the home of the bears.

"Roddy cried out, with fear, but the bears growled again and showed
their great teeth, and so we had to go in."

"I didn't want to go in," said the poor boy, as he put his arms around
the neck of his mother; "it was worse than a cellar, it looked so dark.
But the old bear behind just kept pushing me along with his nose, so I
had to go."

"It was not such a bad place after all," said Wenonah, "when we once got
into it.  It seemed dark at first as we went in out of the sunshine; but
when we were in it, and looked back, there was a good deal of light.  In
it were big piles of leaves and dry grass, and on them the bears soon
lay down.  One of the big bears lay down between us and the door, so we
could not get out.  We sat down by the little bears, and I whispered to
Roddy to be brave, for God would take care of us and our friends would
surely find us.  Then we lay down on the dry grass and, being very
weary, soon went to sleep, with our arms around each other.

"How long we slept we knew not, but were suddenly roused up by the
little bears playing and tumbling over and around us.  So we got up, and
the bears made us go back again across the sands into the berry-bushes,
and there we all ate berries, as there was nothing else to eat.  The
little ones kept poking their noses into our hands, and thus begged us
to pick berries for them."

"The lazy little fellows," said Roderick, now smiling as he thought of
them; "little greedy piggies that never had enough."

"There we stayed in the bushes," said Wenonah, "until nearly night, and
then they made us go back again with them in the same way to the same
place.  It seemed so dreadful to have to spend the night in that place
with those wild bears; but we whispered, `We will be brave,' and so we
lay down between the little bears, for in some way or other we felt the
little ones were our best friends, and it was because of them the old
ones did not kill us.

"I thought we could never spend the night in such a place, but we did.
We just whispered our prayers as there we lay, and ended with, `Now I
lay me down to sleep.'  And sleep we did until the little bears woke us
up again the next morning.

"The old bears were now so friendly that they let us pat them, and so I
thought that perhaps they would let us go; and so, when we came to the
sand, I whispered to Roddy, `Let us try and get away.'  But those wicked
bears would not let us go; for when we tried to go along the sand in one
direction one of the big bears got in our way and made us go back; then
we tried to go the other way, and they stopped us there.  I now felt
that we were like prisoners, and that we had to go with them.  They led
us again into the berry-bushes, and Roddy and I ate a good many, for we
were very hungry, and the little bears teased us so much we had to pick
a lot for them.  It was when I was feeling the worst, and fearing that
perhaps they would never let us leave them, that I heard the bird note.
O, how sweet it sounded!  For I knew it was from Mustagan, and that it
meant we would soon be free.  But I saw that the bears had heard it, and
were very uneasy, as they had been at all sounds.  For a time they
stopped eating berries and stood up and listened.  However, when it came
again and again, so bird-like, they lost their fear and again began
eating the berries."

Said Wenonah: "I was afraid to answer, for the bears had always been so
angry at us when we made any noise; but I knew that sweet call meant
rescue and home, and must be answered, and so, while putting a big
handful of berries in the mouth of the fiercest old bear, I gave the
answering call.  Then came the reply.

"I must have been trembling, for in my reply I shook in my voice, and
the bears were angry and growled at me.  How ever, I knew I could
correctly give the owl call which Mustagan knew was our signal of
danger.  So when I passed behind a tree I gave it as loud as I could, as
though from an owl in the tree above me.  When all was right again I
gave the robin song, and you all know the rest."



CHAPTER TWENTY FOUR.

CONGRATULATIONS--OTHER INCIDENTS OF LOST CHILDREN--LONG EXCURSION BY THE
BOYS--INDIAN LEGEND--"WHY IS THE BEAR TAILLESS?"--OXFORD LAKE--BLACK
BEARS AS FISHERMEN--THE LOOKOUT FROM THE TREES--FISH-STEALING BEARS--THE
CONFLICT--BEARS VERSUS BOYS AND INDIANS--SAM'S SUCCESSFUL THRUST--PLENTY
OF BEAR MEAT.

The thrilling adventures and escape of Wenonah and Roderick were, of
course, the great sensations that were most talked about for many a day.
Children have wonderful recuperative powers, and so the two little ones
recovered from the effects of their strange mishaps long before Mr and
Mrs Ross or even Minnehaha did.  But time is a great healer, and soon
all were well and in good spirits again.

The event produced a deep impression upon Frank, Sam, and Alec, and drew
out from the older servants at the home and some of the Indians some
very interesting stories.  It is simply amazing what a difference there
is in people in respect to their ability to find their way out of a
forest when once the trail is lost.  Some people invariably get lost in
as small an area as a hundred-acre forest, and are almost sure to come
out on the opposite side to the one desired.  Indians, perhaps on
account of their living so much in the woods, are not so liable to get
bewildered and lost as white people.  Still some of them are as easily
perplexed as other people.

One of this class went out hunting and lost himself so completely that
his friends became alarmed and went searching for him.  When they
fortunately found him, one, chaffing him, said:

"Hello, are you lost?"

To this he indignantly replied:

"No, Indian not lost, Indian here; but Indian's wigwam lost!"

It would never do for him to admit that such a thing could possibly
happen as his being lost.

So popular and beloved were Mr Ross and his family that not only did
the congratulations on the recovery of the children come from the Hudson
Bay Company officials and other white people from far and wide, but
Indians of other tribes, who had known Mr Ross in the years gone by,
when he was in the company's service, came from great distances, and in
their quiet but expressive way indicated their great pleasure at the
restoration of the little ones to their parents.  Mustagan was, of
course, the hero of the hour, and as usual he received the
congratulations with his usual modesty and gave great credit to Big Tom.
He also had nothing but kind words for the brave white lads, who had so
coolly and unflinchingly played their part in the closing scene of the
rescue.  His only regret was that he had not had them take their guns
with them when they went to the front with the berries, so that they
might have had a share in the grand fusillade that stopped so suddenly
the rush of the furious bears.  The actions of the bears in thus sparing
the children's lives brought out from the Indians several remarkable
stories of similar conduct known to have occurred elsewhere.

One Indian told of an old mother bear that boldly attacked an Indian
woman who, with her young babe, had gone out into the forest to gather
wood.  The mother fought for her child until unconscious.  When she came
to herself both the bear and the papoose were gone.  She returned to her
wigwam and gave the alarm, but as the men were away hunting several days
passed ere they could begin the search.

When at length they discovered the bear's den they found the child was
there alive.  In killing the bear they had to take the greatest care
lest they hurt the child, as the bear seemed in its ferocity to think
more of defending the child from them than of saving its own life.  The
child when rescued was perfectly naked, yet was fat and healthy, and
cried bitterly when taken away from the warm den and the body of the
dead bear that it had suckled with evident satisfaction.

To this and other wonderful stories the boys listened with the greatest
delight.  The fact is, while the children were lost they were as
miserable a trio as could be found, and now the reaction had come, and
they were just bubbling over with delight and ready for any story that
had, even in the remotest degree, anything similar to what had so
excited them.

Indians love good companions, and they found them in the boys; so it was
not long before some of those who had come from Oxford Lake invited them
to return with them, and they promised them some rare sport.  At first
Mr Ross was a bit fearful about letting them go so far, but as Big Tom
and Martin Papanekis offered to go in charge of the two canoes he at
length yielded.  So, in company with the Indians from that place, they
started off in great spirits, well supplied with guns and ammunition,
and all the necessary camping outfit for a ten days' or two weeks'
excursion.

It was with very great delight that the boys set off with their fresh,
dusky, red companions on this trip.  It was principally down the rapid
lakes and rivers up which the boatmen gallantly rowed on their journey
from York Factory.  The running of the rapids, especially a wild,
dangerous one through Hell's Gate, very much excited the boys.

On one of the beautiful islands in Oxford Lake they pitched their tents,
and had some capital sport in fishing for the gamy trout which there
abound.  The only drawback to the fishing in such a land as this, where
the fish are so abundant, is that the sportsmen soon get weary with
drawing up the fish so rapidly.  The finest whitefish in the world are
to be found in Oxford Lake.  They, however, will not take the hook, and
so are caught only in gill nets.

Black bears are quite numerous in this part of the country.  They are
very fond of fishing, and so it was proposed to try and get a shot at
one or two, as the Indians well knew their favourite resorts.  Indeed,
the Indian tradition of why the bear has such a short tail is the result
of his preference for fish diet.  They say that originally the bear had
a beautiful tail, so long that with it he could easily whisk the flies
off his ears.  One winter a greedy bear, not content to stay in his den
and sleep as bears ought to do, wandered out on a great frozen lake.
There he met a fox hurrying along with a fine fish in his mouth.  The
bear being the larger and stronger animal, he rushed at him to capture
the fish.  The fox, seeing him coming, quietly dropped it on the ice,
and, putting his forepaw upon it, said to the bear:

"Why bother yourself with such an insignificant fish as this, when, if
you hurry, you can get any number of fine large ones."

"Where are they to be found?" asked the bear.

"Why," said the fox, "did you not hear the thunder of the cracking ice
on the lake?"

"Yes, I heard it, and trembled," said the bear.

"Well, you need not fear," said the fox, "for it was only the Frost King
splitting the ice, and there is a great crack, and the fish are there in
great numbers.  All you have to do is to go and sit across the crack and
drop your long, splendid tail in the water, and you will be delighted to
see with what pleasure the fish will seize hold of it.  Then all you
will have to do will be to just whisk them out on the ice, and then you
will have them."

The silly bear swallowed this story, and away he rushed to a crack in
the ice.  These cracks are very frequently found in these northern lakes
in bitter cold weather.  They are caused by the ice contracting and thus
bursting.

Down squatted the bear on his haunches, and, dropping his beautiful tail
in the water, he patiently waited for the bite.  But the water in these
cracks soon freezes again, especially when it is fifty or sixty degrees
below zero, and so it was not long before in this crack it was solid
again.  And so when the bear got tired waiting for a bite, or even a
nibble, he tried to leave the place, but found it was impossible without
leaving his tail behind him.  This he had to do, or freeze or starve to
death, and so he broke loose, and ever after has been tailless.

This is one of the many traditions that abound among the Indians.  They
have traditions to account for almost everything in nature.  Some of
them are interesting, ingenious; others are ridiculous and senseless.
It is well-known, however, no matter how the bear lost his beautiful
tail, if he ever had one, he is still very fond of fish, and often
displays a great deal of ingenuity in capturing them.

So it was decided that, if possible, the boys should have a chance to
see him at his work, and, if possible, get a shot or two, as this was
the favourable time of the year, as certain kinds of fish were spawning
in the shallows of the streams, and for them he would be on the lookout.
As these regions were the hunting grounds of the Oxford Indians, whom
they had accompanied from Mr Ross's, they knew every place likely to be
frequented by the bears; and so three canoes were fitted out, with one
of our boys in each, and away they started, full of pleasurable
anticipation, not so much just now to shoot or kill, as to find the
place where they could see bruin at what was at this season his
favourite occupation, namely, that of catching fish.

Oxford Lake, when no storms are howling over it, is one of the most
beautiful in the world.  As the weather was now simply perfect, the boys
enjoyed very much the canoe excursions, and, in addition, a fair amount
of shooting.  Ducks, partridges and other birds were shot on the wing,
or at the points where they stopped to rest and eat.

They were rewarded in their search by finding several places where the
bears had undoubtedly been at work at their favourite pastime.  The
shrewd Indians were also able to tell as to the success or ill luck of
the bears in their fishing efforts.

At places where only a few bones or fins were to be seen scattered
about, the Indians said:

"Poor fishing here; only catch a few, eat them all up."

However, they found other places where only part of the fish had been
eaten, and here the Indians said:

"This looks better.  When fish plenty, bear eat only the best part."

At length, however, they reached a place that made even the eyes of the
generally imperturbable Indians flash with excitement.  It was on the
north-eastern part of the lake, where the river that flows from Rat Lake
enters into Oxford Lake.  Here, not far from the mouth of the stream,
were some gravelly shallows which were evidently favourite resorts for
the fish during the spawning season.  Just a little way out from the
shore were several broad, flat granite rocks that rose but a little
above the surface of the water.  Between these rocks and the shore was
quite a current of water that ran over a gravelly bed.

On the mainland opposite this flat ridge of granite rocks were to be
seen a large number of fish, each ranging in weight from eight to ten
pounds.  What most excited and pleased the Indians was that while the
numerous tracks indicated that several bears had been there fishing only
the night before, yet each fish had only had one piece bitten out of it,
and that was on the back just a little behind the head.  Bears are very
dainty when they have abundance to choose from, and so, when fish are
very plentiful, especially the whitefish, they are content with only
biting out that portion containing some dainty fat, which is, as we have
said, on the swell of the back just behind the head.

When this discovery was made the men in the other canoes were notified,
and quietly and quickly, plans were made to not only see the bears at
work that night, when they would return, but to have some shots at them;
for the Indians said:

"Bears not such fools as to leave such a place while food so plenty."

The impression among those who knew their habits was that even now the
bears were sleeping not very far away in the dense forests.  So the
place was carefully looked over, and the best spots for observation were
selected.  An important consideration was to form some idea, as to the
direction, from which the bears would come, if they returned that night
to this spot.  Indian cleverness, sharpened by experience in such
matters, enabled them to solve this very important question by studying
the trail along which they had been cautiously coming and going very
recently.  This they found to be almost a straight line running directly
back into the depths of the dense forest.

To climb trees as points of observation from which to view bears is, as
a general thing, a dangerous experiment, as bears themselves are such
capital climbers.  But there are times when it is the only possible
course available for those who would observe their action, on account of
the flatness of the country thereabout.  So, speedily as possible, the
trees were selected that were considered most suitable.  These were
situated a little north and south of the spot where the bears had thrown
their fish on the shore.  They were a little distant from the trail
along which it was likely the bears would come.  Three trees were thus
selected, and it was decided that Sam, Alec, and Frank should each have
one Indian in his tree with him in case of attack.  The other Indians
were to remain out from the shore in their canoes, sheltered from view
by some rocks that were not far distant.  They were not so far away as
to be beyond call, if they should be needed.

All these matters having been decided upon, they entered their canoes
again and quietly paddled out to one of the rocky isles, not far
distant, and on the side opposite to the mainland they gathered some dry
wood and had a good dinner, for which they had capital appetites.  Then
the Indians lit their pipes and curled down on the rocks for a smoke and
rest, and urged the boys also to try and get some sleep.  They at first
thought they were too excited, in view of the coming night's adventures,
to sleep, but as the Indians so desired they lay down near the shore,
and the rippling waves were such a soothing lullaby that, strange to
say, they were soon in dreamless slumber.

A couple of hours was all that could be allowed them, for, as the
Indians said:

"Sometimes bears move around early, and we must be all there in the
trees before they come."

All the preparations were soon made.  The guns were freshly loaded with
ball, and some extra ammunition was taken in the pockets of each one.
Their hunting knives were given a few rubs on the stones to see that
they were keen and sharp.  In addition, much to the boys' surprise,
there was given to each one of them a good solid birch club, about
eighteen inches in length and an inch and a half thick.  As an extra
precaution against their being dropped, the Indians, who had prepared
them while the boys slept, had bored a hole through one end, and
inserted a deerskin thong to slip over the wrist.  How they were to be
used, and the wisdom of preparing them, we shall see later on.  The
Indians were similarly armed, but, in addition, they stuck their hunting
hatchets in their belts.

A few final instructions were given and the signals decided upon, and
then the boys and their Indian comrades were noiselessly paddled to the
shore.  They were landed as closely as possible to the trees into which
they were to be ensconced, so as to leave but little scent of their
footsteps on the ground.

In the two trees selected on the north side were Frank and Alec, each
with an Indian hunter, while Sam and his comrade took up their assigned
station in a fine large tree on the south side.  It was about an hour
before sundown ere they were all quietly stowed away in these peculiar
resting places.  The other Indians quietly paddled back to the places
designated beyond the rocks.

For a couple of hours they had to sit there in silence, broken only by
the singing of some birds around them, or the call or cry of some wild
animal in the forest.  They were first aroused by hearing the crunching
of bones where they had noticed the fish lying.  On peering out from
their hiding places they saw an old black fox, with a litter of half-
grown ones, making a hasty meal out of the fish.  The Indians would have
loved to have captured them, as the skin of the black fox is very
valuable.  However, it was not foxes they were now after, but bears;
and, besides this, the skin of the fox is only prime in the cold, wintry
months.  So they had to be content with watching them as there they
greedily devoured the fish.  Suddenly they were disturbed in their
repast, and dashed away, each with a piece of fish in its mouth, and the
watchers observed that what had caused their sudden retreat was a large
wolverine that had quite unexpectedly appeared upon the scene.  He, too,
seemed to be fond of fish, and at once began to feast upon them.

Not long, however, was he permitted to thus enjoy himself, for out in
the beautiful gloaming a great black bear was seen emerging from the now
dark forest upon the shore.  At his coming the thievish wolverine at
once slunk away.  The bear did not attempt to eat any of the fish that
were still remaining; but, after a short survey of the coast up and down
to see that all was clear, he boldly plunged into the water and crossed
over to one of the shallow rocks only a few yards away.  Hardly had he
reached it ere another, and then another, bear came out from the forest
along the central trail which the men had earlier in the day discovered.

They were not long in joining their comrade on the smooth, wide rocks
which we have described.  After they had spent a little time in
inspection they lay down on the rocks facing the shore, as close to the
water as they could without really touching it.  These movements could
be distinctly seen by the boys, as they were looking out toward the
west, where the sky was still bright and the few clouds golden.

For a few minutes the bears were very still, then there was a quick
movement on the part of one of them as he shot out one of his handlike
paws into the water under a passing fish, and threw it from him across
the stream, high and dry, up on the shore.  Soon the other bears were
similarly employed, and the fish were rapidly being captured.  The boys
excitedly watched these sturdy fishermen, and were astonished at the
cleverness and quickness with which they were able to throw out the fish
upon the shore.  Although they had to throw them quite a number of
yards, they very seldom miscalculated and allowed any to fall short and
thus drop back into the water.

But before the pile of fish had become very large there happened
something else to divert the attention of the spectators from the three
four-footed fishermen out on the flat rocks.  Suddenly they heard the
sounds of tearing flesh and breaking bones.  On looking down to see who
were these new intruders, they were able to see not many yards below
them a couple of other bears that, in their prowling around and looking
for their supper, had found their way to this capital supply of fish.
As the watchers peered down at them it was evident by the greedy way in
which they attacked the fish that they were so hungry as not to be at
all particular.

Their sudden appearance and attack on the fish were not at all
appreciated by the industrious trio that had been so skillfully catching
these fish for their own supper.  They had no disposition to be
fishermen for others, and so with growls of rage they suddenly dashed
into and across the water, and sprang upon the intruders.  It was a
fierce battle, and but little of it could be distinctly seen, especially
when under the shadows of the trees.  When, however, in their struggles
they came out on the bright, sandy shore, there was still enough of the
western twilight in which to witness a good deal of terrific fighting.
Bears have thick fur and tough hides, and so their battles are generally
carried on until one side is shaken into exhaustion or knocked into
submission.  But so stubborn was the fight here that it continued with
but few intermissions until the moon, which was nearly full, had so
risen up that everything was made about as bright as in the daytime.

It was evident that the two intruding bears were so hungry that,
although they had been well shaken, they were loath to consider
themselves beaten or to leave so sumptuous a supper, and so they again
returned to the conflict.  The battle was renewed in all its fury, and
when the three were again victorious the vanquished ones, instead of
again retreating into the forest, each shaking off his opponent rushed
to the nearest tree and began its ascent, one followed by two bears and
the other by one.

These two trees, up which the five bears were now climbing, happened to
be the ones in which Frank and Alec and their two Indian companions were
hid.

Bears are capital climbers, and these two fellows, stimulated by the
cuffs and bites of their antagonists behind them, made good time in the
ascent.  Now, for the first time, the boys saw for what purpose they had
been armed with those handy birch clubs.  A bear's tenderest spot is his
nose.  This the Indians well know, and so, when they are chased by a
bear, always defend themselves by there striking him.  A bear that will
stand heavy blows with a club on his skull, or shoulders, or even paws,
gives up the fight at once when rapped over the nose.

Secrecy was now no longer possible, and so the quiet command of the
Indians to the boys was:

"Hit them on the nose whenever you can."

The two angry bears were so taken up with the attack of their own
species behind them that they little imagined that there were enemies
above, and so about the first suspicions they had of the presence of the
boys and Indians were the smart raps they received on their noses.

Whack! whack! whack! fell the blows upon their snouts, and down they
dropped suddenly to the ground, each of them carrying with him an
assailant that happened to be just below him.  The sudden discomfiture
of the bears brought a cheer from the boys.  This, of course, startled
and excited the other bears, that were in a very pugnacious mood.

The two were additionally angry at the ugly blows that had met them, and
the other three fishermen seemed to imagine that fresh assailants were
there in the trees ready to come down and rob them of their supper of
fish.  This they resolved to resist, and so the fight was on in good
earnest.

The Indians declare the bears know how to talk with each other; anyway,
these five seemed for the present to proclaim a truce among themselves,
that together they might attack their common foes, who were ensconced up
there above them in the trees.

Fortunate was it for our friends that the moon was now so high in the
heavens that they could see every movement of the bears as distinctly as
though it had been daylight.  For a time the bears moved about excitedly
below them, and occasionally made a feint, as though they were about to
climb the trees and again attack them.  They hesitated, however, and
kept moving angrily about from tree to tree.  Sam and his comrade in the
third tree were soon discovered, and two or three of the bears made a
pretence of climbing it, but soon desisted and dropped back to the
ground.

In the meantime the rest of the Indians out in the canoes had heard the
growlings and fightings among the bears, and had paddled in much nearer
to the shore.  By their expressive calls the Indians in the trees had
given to those in the canoes some idea of how the conflict stood, and
that they were still able to defend themselves.

The bears at length seemed to have come to some arrangement among
themselves, for they so divided that they began attacking the three
trees at once.  The two that had come last attacked the tree in which
Sam and his comrade were ensconced; two of the other three began
climbing the tree in which were Alec and his comrade; while Frank and
his companion had only to face the remaining one.

"Strike them on the nose," was still the cry of the Indians.  And
although the bears made the most desperate efforts to defend their
tender nostrils while they still advanced, they eventually had to give
up the attempt, one after another, and drop back to the ground fairly
howling with rage and pain.  Angry bears have a great deal of
perseverance, and so this phase of the fight was not over until each
bear had tried every one of the three trees in succession ere he seemed
discouraged.  After moving round and round, and growling out their
indignation, they tried the plan of as many as possible of them climbing
up the same tree together.  However, as the trees were not very large
this scheme did not succeed any better, and they were again repelled.

"What trick will they try next, I wonder?" said Frank.

"Get your guns handy," was the answer, "for you may soon need them."

And sure enough the bears, after talking in their whining, growling way
to each other again, rushed to the attack; and while three of them began
each to climb one of the trees, in which were our friends; the other two
began climbing a couple of other trees, whose great branches interlaced
with those of the trees in which were two of the boys.

The Indians were quick to notice this ruse, and said:

"The bears must never be allowed to get up those trees above us, for if
they do it may go hard with us."

Very cunning were the bears, for they tried as much as possible to climb
up the trees on the sides opposite the places where were hidden Frank
and Alec and their Indians.  However, they could not keep entirely hid,
and so, at the command of one of the Indians, there rang out the
simultaneous discharge of the four guns.  One of the bears suddenly
dropped to the ground, but the other one continued his climbing, until
he reached a position quite close to Frank, on the branch of the tree,
in which he had ascended.  The boys and men had not time to load their
guns, as they were single-barrelled muzzle-loaders.  In addition to
watching this attack on the two bears, they had to vigorously use their
clubs on the noses of those attacking three.  As before, these three
were speedily defeated, and now the excitement was to see how Frank and
his comrade would deal with the big fellow that had succeeded in
reaching a position on a branch that was in a line with them.  They
could observe him cautiously working his way on a great branch of the
tree which he had ascended, and was endeavouring to get into the
branches of the tree, in which they were located.

After some clever balancing he managed to get hold of a long branch that
reached out horizontally toward him, and steadying himself on it, and
holding on to a much smaller one above, he gradually began making his
way toward them.  The Indian at once saw his opportunity, and told
Frank, who was on this upper branch to which the bear with his forepaws
was clinging, to bravely crawl out on it as far as he safely could, and
keep up a vigorous attack with his club on the bear's nose.  This Frank
gallantly did, and, while thus employed, the Indian drew his axe, and
began vigorously chopping the large limb of the tree, on which the bear
was standing.  Assailed by Frank's blows he made but little headway, and
so, before he knew what was up, the branch suddenly gave way under him
and he fell to the ground, a badly stunned and discouraged bear.  This
gave time for the guns to be carefully reloaded, and then the besieged,
thinking they had had excitement enough for one night, became the
assailants, and so began firing down upon the bears below them.

Sam, in his excitement, had put too much powder in his gun, and when he
fired the kick of the weapon caused him to lose his balance and he
tumbled to the ground.  It was fortunate for him that he fell in a soft
place, and was not in the least hurt or stunned, for the only unwounded
bear soon made a rush for him, but was not quick enough to find him
unprepared.

Sam now knew more about bears than he did when he rushed into the camp
with one not far behind him.  So here there was no desire to even try
and regain his position in the tree, from the branches of which he had
so suddenly descended.  Springing up from the spot where he had fallen,
he drew his keen-bladed knife, and placing his back against the tree he
awaited the attack.  He had not long to wait.  The bear, maddened by the
battle that had been going on, and doubly excited by the smell of blood
from his wounded comrades, rushed at him with the intention of making
short work of him by hugging him to death.  But he little knew what was
before him.  With all the nerve and coolness of an old Indian hunter,
Sam waited until the big fore paws, like great, sinewy arms, were almost
around him.  Then with a sudden lunge he drove the knife firm and true
into the very heart of the fierce brute.  There was one great convulsive
shiver, and then the bear fell over dead.

The next instant there was a great shout from those who had landed from
the canoes in time to witness this brave act.  The shout was caught up
by the others, who, when they saw Sam's unceremonious descent from the
tree, began to descend more slowly, and were in good time to see him
give the deadly thrust.

Sam had indeed redeemed himself, and was the hero for many a day.  Alec
and Frank were very proud of him, and hearty indeed were their
congratulations.  Sam cheerfully accepted their congratulations, but had
his own opinion of himself, first, for putting too much powder into his
gun, and secondly, for so ignominiously tumbling out of the tree.

On looking over the ground they found four dead bears.  One, badly
wounded, had managed to crawl away into the forest.

They had had enough excitement for that night, so they gathered up some
dry wood, made a fire, and cooked some fine whitefish in thorough Indian
style.  They had good appetites for a good supper, and after it were
soon sound asleep.  As usual the boys were the last to wake up the next
morning, and found that the Indians had already tracked and killed the
wounded bear that had escaped in the night.

Some time was spent in skinning them, and then, loaded with the robes
and meat, they returned in high spirits where they had left Big Tom and
Martin Papanekis and the other Indians.

There were great rejoicings at their success, and even quiet Big Tom had
some cheery congratulatory words to say to Sam, which Sam prized very
much indeed.



CHAPTER TWENTY FIVE.

A SUCCESSFUL MISSION--PECULIAR ADDRESS--THE VISIT TO THE BEAVERS--
COMMODIOUS HOUSES--WELL-CONSTRUCTED DAMS--THE MOONLIGHT SIGHT--STRANGE
INTERRUPTION--STEALTHY WOLVERINE--CROUCHING WOLVES--MORE CUNNING MEN--A
MIXED-UP BATTLE--DELIGHTED BOYS--RETURN TO SAGASTA-WEEKEE.

They rested that day, and then, the next being Saturday, they decided to
go to the upper end of the lake and there camp, so as to be near the
newly formed mission, established by a Reverend Mr Brooking, and thus
be able to attend the service on the Sabbath.

They met with a cordial welcome from Mr and Mrs Brooking, who, living
in such a lovely place, were delighted to welcome them, especially the
boys, who were all to give them a great deal of information about
friends in the old land, which they had not visited for many years.

The boys were very much interested in the mission and the school.  As
they remained camped in the vicinity a few days, they saw and heard a
good deal of the genuineness of the work done, and always, in after
years, were they strong advocates for foreign missions.  And yet there
were some amusing things, which showed how wise and patient a missionary
has to be in leading a people up from the darkness and ignorance of
paganism.

The missionary told them many amusing stories.  Here is a simple one:
One of his converts was anxious to preach to his fellow-countrymen, and
in this laudable desire he was encouraged by the missionary.  As long as
he stuck to his subject, and talked about the Gospel, he did very well
indeed.  But soon his ambitions led him to tackle subjects about which
he was not very well informed.

One day, in addressing a company of his countrymen, he exclaimed:

"My friends, the missionary says the world is round, but he is mistaken;
it is flat, yes, as flat as the top of that stove," he said, pointing to
the great iron stove in the centre of the room.

When the missionary heard this of course he had to give Metassis a
lecture in geography.  He showed him a map of the hemispheres, and, as
he thought, so fully explained the matter that there could be no further
mistake.

The next time Metassis stood up to speak he said:

"Friends, I made a mistake.  The world is round, but it is flat one way
for sure."

This he said from having seen the flat maps on the wall.  It was thus
evident that another lesson in geography was necessary, and a school
globe had to be brought into requisition before he could be convinced
that it was round.  His apology did not much mend matters.  Here it is:

"My friends, I made another mistake.  The world is round, but then it
stands on three legs."

This he said owing to the fact he had had his last lesson in geography
from a globe that worked in a frame that was supported by a tripod
stand.

To see the industrious beavers at work was one of the sights that long
had been desired by the boys.  At many a camp fire they had heard the
Indians talk about these most industrious of all animals, and tell such
wonderful stories of their cleverness; and so now, as the moon was still
bright, it was decided to accept of the very kind invitations of some
friendly Indians, and go and visit a large beaver dam that they had
discovered was being constructed by a large colony of these animals.
Nothing could have given greater pleasure to the boys than this
invitation, and so it was gladly accepted.

In view of the fact that the moon was already waning, it was decided to
set off that very afternoon in order to reach that place by sundown, so
as to be in good positions to see, ere the beavers began the night's
varied occupations.

Of the many wonderful things which have been written and told about the
beavers we need not here repeat; suffice to say that those Indians who
most hunt them, and thus have the best opportunity of studying their
ways and doings, are the ones who speak most strongly and
enthusiastically about them.

Of the size of the trees they can cut down with their teeth, and of the
length and strength of the dams they can construct, as well as the
reason and instinct they seem to exercise in giving the right curve to
these dams at the dangerous places, so that they will be most able to
resist the force of the current, even when swollen by heavy floods, we
need not here describe in detail.  It is enough to say that stumps of
trees over two feet in diameter are still to be found with the marks of
the teeth of the beaver, that had so cleverly and accurately felled the
great trees that had stood there defying every storm, proud monarchs of
the forests, until these industrious animals laid them low.

Dams hundreds of yards long, and wide enough and strong enough for great
wagons to easily travel over and pass each other, can still be traced
out in regions where the beavers have long been destroyed.

Vast beaver meadows are still prized by the farmers for the hundreds of
acres of richest hay land that have been formed by the gradual filling
up of the rich lands, brought down in times of freshets from the high
regions beyond, and year after year deposited in these beaver ponds,
until at length they were so filled up that what was once like a great
inland lake has become a prairie or meadow of rich waving grass.

Their houses were in some instances not only larger, but in every case
much more cleverly and thoroughly built than were the habitations of the
pagan Indians.

Their forethought in cutting and depositing upon the bottoms of the
waters and ingeniously fastening there vast quantities of the birch or
willow, the bark of which was to serve as food during the long winter
months, was far ahead of the habits of the improvident people, who
literally took "no thought for the morrow," and so were often at
starvation point, while the industrious beavers in their warm, cozy
homes had enough and to spare.

As soon as it was decided to go the preparations were soon made, and,
bidding farewell to the noble missionary and his heroic wife, from whom
they parted with regret, the canoes were pointed to the east again, and
after some hours of hard paddling they reached a fairly large river, up
which they were to go to a large creek which entered into it, and upon
which the beaver dam now being constructed was to be found.

At the mouth of the river they went ashore for a rest and supper.  Here
the whole program of the night was talked over and all arrangements
made.  It was necessary that everything should be thoroughly understood
and carried out, as beavers are very watchful and timid animals; the
least alarm sends them to their retreat, and it is a long time ere they
resume their work.  As a precaution against surprise from bears or
wolves, or even wolverines, who are very fond of beaver flesh, it was
decided to take their guns along.

The creek, which was more like a small river, ran through a beautiful
valley, and on either side were hills, some of which rose up so
precipitously from the water that they formed admirable positions from
which the cautious sightseers could watch the operations of the busy
toilers when they were at work in the waters below.

The wind was everything that could be desired, and so our three boys
were able to be together; but they had to wait quite a time in the most
complete silence for the appearance of the industrious but timid
workers.

It is amazing how all animals seem to be acquainted with the natural
sounds that come from the woods or prairies, and are but little
disturbed by them, while a sound that is unnatural is at once detected.
For example, Big Tom was more than once heard to say in his quiet way
that, when hunting moose, he noticed that a storm might be raging, and
the great branches of the trees snapping and breaking in the gale, yet
the moose seemed to pay no attention to any of these sounds; but just
let the hunter be careless enough to let a dry stick snap under his
moccasined foot, and the moose was alarmed and off like a shot.  So it
is with the beaver.  The ordinary night sounds disturb them not, but the
report of a gun, it may be a mile away, sends them instantly to their
retreats, while the slightest evidence of hunters so disturbs them that
perhaps for twenty-four hours they will keep under cover without making
the slightest movement.

The moon was quite high up in the heavens ere the first rippling sounds
were heard upon the waters.  The first arrivals seemed to be the
watchers, who had come to report.  They appeared to swim almost from end
to end of the great pond that had already been made by the strong dam,
which seemed about finished.

As soon as they had in some way reported that the coast was clear,
others appeared upon the scene, until between twenty and thirty were at
the same time visible.  Some were industriously employed in carrying
additional stones and mud to the dam, and carefully filling up every
crack and crevice.  Others were guiding great logs down the current, and
fastening them in position where they would strengthen the dam against
possible floods and freshets.  The majority, and they were principally
the smaller ones, were employed in cutting down small birch and willows,
which they dragged by their teeth to the edge of the pond, and there
they suddenly dived with them to the bottom.  The pieces that they could
not firmly stick in the mud they fastened down in the bottom by piling
stones upon them to keep them from floating.

The boys were too far away to see by the moon's light the beavers
actually at work among a clump of large trees that stood on the shore
some way up the stream, but the crashing down of a couple of trees into
the water told very clearly that some were there industriously at work.
Thus for a couple of hours the boys and Indians watched with great
interest these clever animals, and then there was an abrupt ending.  It
was not caused by any of our party, as the Indians, having abundance of
food, had no desire to now kill the beaver.  Then, in addition, the
skins, so valuable in winter, were now of but little worth.

As we have stated, the beavers have many enemies.  Their flesh is very
much prized as food by all the carnivorous animals of that country.  And
so, while our party was watching with such pleasure the varied movements
of the beaver, there were other eyes upon them, full of evil purposes,
and, strange to say, they were not very far away from where our boys and
Indians were hid.

As before mentioned, our party was on the top of a hill that abruptly
rose up from the pond, caused by the backing up of the waters by the
beaver dam.  From this point of observation they looked out toward the
west.  On the left side were some hills much smaller and less abrupt.
Just about the time they were thinking of retiring, the sharp eyes of
one of the Indians noticed a dark object on the small hill nearest to
them.  Giving a whispered word of caution, they all lay as low as
possible and watched.  On and on, and at length out from the shadows of
some bushes into the clear moonlight, came the creature, and now the
sharp eyes of the Indians saw that it was a wolverine.  The fact of our
party being so high above it was the only reason they had not been
detected.

It was evident from its actions that it was on a beaver hunt.  At every
extra noise the busy animals made in the water, as logs were rolled in
or the beavers plunged in with birch or willow saplings in their mouths,
the wolverine stopped and listened.  There was but little wind, and so
it was evident that even when the cruel beast had nearly reached the
shore, and there crouched behind a small rock, the beavers were still
unconscious of his presence.  There was only a little strip of land
about a yard between this rock and the water; but along this narrow
strip of land the beavers had been coming and going while at their
varied duties.  This, in some way or other, the cunning wolverine seemed
to have discovered.

But while the boys and some of the Indians were intently watching his
movements, others of them, as the result of long experience, had
occasionally cast a searching glance in every direction around them.

"Hist!" in a quiet whisper arrested the attention of all.  Without a
word, but by a gesture scarcely perceptible, they were directed to look
along the very trail the wolverine had made, and there stealthily moving
along, now in the light and now in the shadow, were two large grey
wolves.

This was complicating matters, and making things interesting indeed.
The Indians, leaving the boys their guns loaded with ball, and enjoining
perfect silence upon them, took up their own weapons and noiselessly
withdrew.  So gloriously bright was the night in that land where fogs
and mists are almost unknown, and where the rays of the moon cast a
clear and distinct shadow, that everything passing was distinctly seen.

There out in the waters, and around the shore and on the dam, were
perhaps thirty beavers hard at work.  Here to the left below them lay
crouching, like a ball of black wool, the savage, alert wolverine,
patiently waiting until an unsuspecting beaver, loaded with wood,
stones, or gravel, should pass along that trail within reach of his
deadly spring.

A couple of hundred yards behind the wolverine, and yet high enough up
on the hillside to observe his every movements, and yet not be observed
by him, were the two wolves, now crouching down flat upon the ground.
As they remained so quiet, the boys were surprised and wondered, if they
were after the wolverine, why they did not attack him.  But, while they
watched the wolverine, it was not wolverine meat they were after, but
beaver.  But their wish and hope was that the wolverine might obtain it
for them.  How far their expectations were realised we shall soon see.

"Hush!" said Alec, "look!"  And sure enough there were the Indians, some
hundreds of yards behind the wolves, and spread out like a third of a
circle, cautiously moving on toward the two wolves, which were intently
watching the wolverine, which was watching the beavers.  It was to the
hunters an interesting sight, and so fascinated the boys that they could
hardly keep still.  Soon the tension was broken and there was a sudden
change.

A couple of fine large beavers came in sight along the trail on the
shore with a large stone, which they were evidently wishing to take to
the dam.  So intent were they upon their work that they knew not of
danger until with a great spring the wolverine had fastened his sharp
teeth and claws in the back of one of them, which uttered a cry of pain
as he was dashed to the ground.  The other beaver instantly sprang into
the water, as did all the other beavers within sound of that death-cry.

In a few seconds the wolves, with great bounding leaps, had cleared the
space between them and the wolverine.  They fiercely attacked him and
endeavoured to at once secure the beaver.  But the wolverine is a plucky
animal when thus assailed, and he made a good fight for his hard-earned
supper.  In the meantime, the instant the wolves started, the Indians,
who from their higher ground had seen the movements, also began to
advance; and so, ere the wolves and wolverine had settled the matter as
to the ownership of the dead beaver, a volley of bullets killed the
wolves, while the wolverine turned and began climbing up the steep place
of the hill where the boys were hid.

"Shoot him!" shouted the Indians.  A volley rang out from the guns of
the boys, and a dead wolverine with three bullets in him went tumbling
back to the bottom of the hill.

No need of silence now, and so the long-continued hush was broken with a
will, and there were many shouts and congratulations.  The boys speedily
and safely descended the side of the hill, that sloped downward in the
direction of the men, and joined them at the spot where they were
examining the dead wolves and beaver.  The wolverine had not had much
time to kill the latter ere the wolves were upon him, and so he was not
very much torn.  The splendid broad tail was uninjured, and was eagerly
examined by the boys.  The dead wolverine was dragged in by the men, and
it was decided, as dry wood was abundant, for some of them to make a
fire, while others went for kettles, food, and blankets, and there spent
the rest of the night.

They had two objects in view.  One was to be on hand to skin the animals
early in the morning, and the other was to have the opportunity of
inspecting the beaver dam, and seeing the size of some of the stumps
where those wonderful animals, with their teeth alone, had cut down some
great trees.

A tired, sleepy trio of boys were they even ere their midnight meal was
eaten, and so very quickly after they were rolled up in their blankets
and stretched out on the smooth rock fast asleep.

As there are many wild animals in this part of the country, the Indians,
ere they lay down to sleep, took the precaution of rolling some of the
logs cut down by the beavers on the fire.  These would keep up a blaze
until at least sunrise, after which there would be no danger.

Refreshing and invigorating is the sleep which comes to those who have
the courage and enterprise to visit these lands, and in this way live
out a great deal in the open air.  The night was never close and sultry.
The air seems full of ozone, and scented with the balm of the great
forest.  So it was here as in many similar experiences with these
hearty, healthy lads.  So soundly did they sleep that it was after eight
o'clock ere they opened their eyes.  As they sprang up, half ashamed of
themselves, the Indians chided them not, but one, in broken English,
comforted them when he said:

"Plenty sleep, strong men, clear eye, firm grip; good medicine."

So they were comforted by this, and ever after when they overslept
themselves they called it "good medicine."

The wolves and wolverine were already skinned, and so as soon as the
boys had had their breakfasts, which had long been waiting them, they
set off to visit the beaver dam.  When they reached it the boys could
hardly realise how it was possible that animals not heavier than an
ordinary retriever dog could build such a structure.  It was in shape
like a crescent, with the outer curve up stream.  It was thus able to
meet and best resist the force of the great currents in times of
freshets and floods.

Many of the logs used in its construction would have been prized as
valuable for timber in saw mills.  Then, in addition to the large logs,
there were great numbers that were smaller.  The stones, gravel, and mud
used would require many men, with horses and carts, for many days to
transport.  Yet here visible to the eye were gathered all of this
material by these animals, that have no tools but their teeth and paws,
and all piled up and arranged in a manner so scientific and accurate
that the finest engineer in the land would not have lost anything in his
reputation to have claimed the work as his most careful planning.

The beaver house was also visited.  It was apparently all built on the
land, but it so overhung the lake at one side that the water ever found
access, and there was abundance of room for the beavers to swim out or
in whenever they desired.  No attempt was made to break it, nor in any
way to disturb it, neither would there be in the winter months, when the
Indians would make the attack upon them.  A more clever and successful
way for their capture is well known, and this would be put in practice.
But we must not anticipate an interesting adventure at this very spot.

The return to Sagasta-weekee was made in a few days.  With the exception
of an upset of a canoe in one of the rapids, where they were trying to
work up stream instead of making a portage, nothing of a very startling
nature occurred.  Alec was the boy who was in this canoe, and he was
quite carried under by the rapid current, and only reappeared above the
surface a couple of hundred feet lower down.  Fortunately there were
some canoes near at hand, and he was quickly rescued.  But the accident
gave them all a great fright.  They lost everything in the canoe that
would not float.  They most regretted the loss of three reliable guns.
After this they were much more cautious, and the boys were taught the
admonitory lesson that these sports and adventures were not to be
enjoyed without many risks, and that there was at all times as great [a]
demand for caution and watchfulness as there was on certain occasions
for daring and courage.

Three Boys in the Wild North Land--by Egerton Ryerson Young



CHAPTER TWENTY SIX.

THE EXCURSION IN THE REINDEER COUNTRY--NUMEROUS HERDS--THE BATTLE
BETWEEN REINDEER AND WOLVES IN THE LAKE--REACHING THE HERDS--THE LONG
STALK FOR THE LEADER--ALEC'S SUCCESSFUL SHOT--CONSTERNATION OF THE
HERD--ABUNDANCE OF VENISON.

To see and, if possible, to hunt a herd of reindeer, both on land and in
the water, was one of the ambitions of the boys.  They had frequently
heard some remarkable stories of these animals from northern hunters
whose homes were in regions where they occasionally visited in their
migrations, and so they were much pleased when Mr Ross, returning one
day from the Hudson Bay Company's Fort, informed them that a number of
the Indians from that land were there trading, and that he had obtained
the permission of the Hudson Bay Company's officials for them to return
with these Indians for some sport in that land.  He also added that the
Indians themselves had stated that the herds of reindeer this year were
numerous, and that it would be a very great pleasure to take charge of
the young "palefaces," who were so highly spoken of by the red men, and
do all they could to assist them in their sports in their country.

This was glorious news, and, as the weeks were now rapidly going by, no
time was to be lost.

Alec deeply regretted the loss of his favourite gun, but Mr Ross
speedily replaced it with another; and so, well supplied, and with a
couple of Mr Ross's Indians as servants to look after the camp and be
on hand in any emergency, the journey was commenced under the happiest
auspices.

We need not repeat the description of the trip down or up the river and
across the portages.  There were several nights when they slept as usual
at the camp fires on the rocks.  There was a good deal of sunshine and a
few storms.

They passed through some lakes of rarest beauty, that simply fascinated
the boys, and drew from them the warmest expressions of admiration, of
which they were capable.  Even Sam at some glimpses on these lovely
sheets, where the water was so transparent that at times it seemed as
though they were paddling through the air, lost his powers of speech for
a time, and then when the spell was broken he exclaimed, in almost
sorrowful tones, "That beats Killarney!"  How glorious must have been
the sight when even a loyal Irish boy would make such an admission!

The Dominion of Canada has in it more fresh-water lakes than any other
country in the world.  Some of them are equal, if not superior, in the
clearness and purity of their waters, in the distinctness of the
reflections cast upon their limpid surface by surrounding hill or
forest, and in the wild, weird beauty of their environments, to any of
the world's old favourite ones that have been long praised in song and
story.  They are slowly being discovered and prized, for some of them
are as a poet's dream and a painter's vision.

They saw various wild animals, but as they were in charge of the trading
outfit for the Hudson Bay Company's post in that region of country they
were under obligations to push on as rapidly as possible.  The only time
they did make a stop of any length was in Split Lake, where, as they
were rowing their boats along, they saw a great commotion in the water a
long way ahead of them.  When they drew near to it they saw it was a
battle between a couple of splendidly antlered reindeer and four wolves.

It was evident that the wolves were being badly worsted in the fight, as
the reindeer were now the aggressors.  From the Indians' idea of it, it
looked as if the wolves had either chased the deer into the lake or,
seeing them in there swimming, had plunged in after them.  The deer, at
first much alarmed, had boldly struck out into the lake, and were
followed by the wolves.  Of course, it was impossible to say whether the
wolves had been able to reach them and make the attack, or whether the
reindeer, when they had drawn them a long way out, had not then turned
upon them.

The reindeer has large lungs, and so swims high on the water.  He is not
only able to use his antlers, but can turn while swimming and kick most
viciously.  A wolf can only swim like a dog, and as his head is so low
he cannot make much of a fight.  And so here the boys had the rare sight
of seeing a couple of deer chasing with great delight four of their most
dreaded foes on land.

They passed across the bows of the boat near enough for them to see
quite distinctly the deer suddenly give a spurt and then strike the
wolves with their great horns.  Every effort of the wolves to attack
seemed to meet with complete failure, until at length their only
ambition seemed to be to reach the shore, and in this way two were
successful.  The deer succeeded in drowning the other two.

The victory of the deer over their cruel and relentless foes gave very
much delight to the Indians as well as to Frank, Alec, and Sam, and it
was decided not to fire at the beautiful creatures, but to leave them to
enjoy their victory.

After several days more of travel and varied adventure they reached the
trading post and Burntwood River, and shortly after started off to Lake
Wollaston, as the hunters had reported the reindeer were there in great
herds.  To that place they now travelled in birch canoes, and in them
the boys were much happier, than in the big boats in which, with the
company's goods, they had travelled from Norway House.

They saw traces of bears, beavers, wild cats, and other animals; but
they were after reindeer, and just now cared but little for any other
kinds of game.  At a camp fire, where they were having supper, the old
Indian who had been appointed captain on account of his experience in
this kind of hunting gave the boys some instructions how to act should
they discover a large herd.  He told them it would not be very difficult
to get within range of one or more of them, but they were to crawl up as
close to the herd as possible on the leeward side, and there, from their
hidden places, watch them until they saw the great one that was the
leader of the herd.  They would not have any trouble to pick him out.
They would soon see how he bossed the rest, and was always at the head
when the herd moved.

What they were to do was to keep moving along with the herd, skulking
from one rock to the shelter of another, and, taking advantage of every
inequality in the ground, to get within range of the leader, "but never
let him once get sight of you."  It was not so very particular about the
others, as they would not run until the leader started, unless very much
frightened.  They were told to take, in addition to the gun and
ammunition, some food, a small axe in their belt, as well as their
trusty knife.  They were not to be discouraged if hours passed before
they got a shot at the leader.  They were to be patient and they would
succeed.  The boys were amazed when the old Indian told them that
sometimes he had followed a great herd for three days before he got at
the leader.  "But," he added, "it well paid me, as I shot twelve deer
ere they had a new leader."

How this could happen was a mystery to the boys until he explained to
them that when these herds come down fresh from the great barren lands
under the guidance of the leader they have such confidence in him, or
are in such fear of him, that when he is shot down the whole herd is
thrown into confusion, and they run here and there and jump about in
such a foolish manner, waiting for their leader to show them the way,
that a quick, clever Indian, hid behind a rock or standing in some dense
bushes, can keep loading and firing until he shoots from six to a dozen
of them.  Then another great deer gives a snort and dashes off, and they
all follow him as the new leader.  They are now so frightened that,
under his leadership, they will generally run a great many miles ere
they stop.

Early one morning, shortly after this information had been imparted by
the experienced old Indian to the boys, some scouts who had been on the
lookout came in with the information that two herds of deer were
visible.  They were in different parts, and could be hunted at the same
time without any difficulty.

At once all preparations were made.  As but one boy and one Indian could
go together, it was decided that Frank and Alec should make the first
attempt to show their skill in this kind of hunting.  The old captain
took Alec with him, while another almost equally experienced hunter
accompanied Frank.

Sam was left boss of the camp, but he determined to do a little hunting
on his own account while the rest were off after the reindeer.

The clothing of the boys was inspected by the Indians, and everything of
a bright nature was discarded.  They were all dressed in smoked leather
suits, with caps to match.  This made them almost the colour of the
rocks and dried ferns, or bracken, among which they would have to do a
good deal of crawling.  The deer hunters left the camp about six o'clock
in the morning, Alec and the captain going in a north-easterly
direction, and Frank and his companion about due west.  The
understanding was to be back, if possible, not later than midnight.
Each Indian, however, took the precaution of strapping on his back a
grey blanket in case of delay.

The adventures of Alec and the captain we will have.

They started off in a north-easterly direction, and had to travel
several miles ere, from an eminence far away, the herd was sighted.
They were feeding as they leisurely moved along, and seemed to have no
suspicion of danger.  It was in our hunters' favour that the country was
very much broken with a succession of hills and dales, rocky ridges and
ravines, clumps of spruce forests, and long stretches of marshy lands,
in which the dried ferns and bracken were very abundant.  The first
thing after the discovery of the herd in the distance, was to find out
from them, the direction in which they seemed to be moving, and then to
notice the direction of the wind, as it is always best to be on the lee
side on account of the scent.

All arrangements being made, the two started off quite rapidly, as it
was possible to push on for quite a time without much precaution, owing
to the character of the country.  Alec's trips to the Highlands of his
beloved Scotland, and his excursions with the experienced gillie there,
stood him in good service here.  After about an hour's swift travelling
the Indian said:

"We are not far from them; stay here a few minutes while I go to that
large rock and see how they are moving, and, if I can, make out the
leader.  Keep where you can see me when I come down a little from the
side of the rock, and if I stretch out my arms for a sign come on and
join me there."

Alec was not kept long in waiting, for soon after his companion had
crawled to the summit of the rock that rose up before them he speedily
drew back a little, so as to be out of sight of the deer, and, gave the
signal to advance.  It did not take Alec long to join him.  The Indian
informed him that the herd was a large one, and that some of the deer
were so close that they could easily be shot from the top of the rock.

Very cautiously did Alec with his companion climb to the point of
observation, and there, carelessly moving before them, was a magnificent
herd of several hundred splendid deer.  As their food was abundant they
were in splendid condition and were a beautiful sight.  Numbers of them
were very heavily antlered, and as Alec tried to count the numerous
points he saw many pass muster as "royals" in his beloved Highlands.  It
was evident the leader was not to be distinguished from that position,
and so the keen-eyed Indian watched for a few minutes the gradually
receding herd until he was perfectly satisfied of the direction they
intended to keep, and then he indicated to Alec their probable route,
and stated that in all probability several hours would pass ere they
would get a shot.

So, carefully retreating, they began their careful march in a line
parallel with the herd, but generally from two to four hundred yards
distant, according to the cover the country afforded to screen them from
observation.  Several times did the Indian leave Alec carefully hid from
observation while he, as we have once described, took advantage of some
high rock, or steep declivity, to crawl forward and observe the position
of the herd.  On one of these tours of inspection the Indian observed
that before them was now a long valley, and the appearance of the
country was as though two hills were quite close together with only a
narrow passage between them.  Almost as by intuition--perhaps it was the
result of long experience--the Indian reasoned, "If we can reach that
spot ahead of the herd we are almost sure to be successful.  But can we
do it? is the question."

Rapidly returning to Alec, he told him what he had seen, and what he
thought might be accomplished.

"Let us try," excitedly said Alec, and off they started.

The Indian was amazed at the endurance of this Scotch lad, who so
generally kept close to him in his rapid march.  When well sheltered
behind great rocky ridges or in ravines they ran without fear of being
discovered, but when it was on a barren plain, with scores of deer in
plain sight, it was a different matter.  There they had to crawl
snakelike along the ground.  Thus on it went, the Indian repeatedly
uttering a cheery word of encouragement to Alec, who had so won his
admiration by his pluck and endurance.

"What is that?" they both said, as they crowded as low as possible.

"Wait till I see," said the Indian, as he crawled forward to discover.

Soon he came back with the word that it was all right; only a big buck
crowded up too near the front, and the leader turned on him and they had
a battle, in which the intruder was soon conquered and driven back.

This delay stopped the herd for a time, and so Alec and his companion
were now about in a line with the front of the herd.

Only about a mile more had they to make ere they reached the desired
position, and so about half an hour before the deer arrived they were
well hidden and ready for action.  They had taken the precaution to get
out, ready for use, their ammunition, so that, if they threw the herd
into confusion, they might have several shots ere the herd dashed away.

Soon the deer were so close to them that they could hear them very
distinctly.  Cautiously the Indian watched them, and then, as arranged,
he signalled to Alec, who was stretched out behind a rock that had a
narrow cleft in it.  This break was just large enough for a lookout, and
it would also serve as a good rest for the gun.  As Alec cautiously
peeped through this narrow opening his heart gave a great thump, for
there within fifty yards of him were the most magnificent deer he had
ever seen.  There was no difficulty now in picking out the leader.

So, pulling himself together, he waited until his heart stopped
thumping, and then, carefully and coolly aiming, so as to strike the
game immediately behind the fore shoulder, he fired.  The deer gave one
great bound and dropped dead.  Instantly there rang out another report,
as Alec's comrade fired, and another great deer fell dead.  Now there
was one of those panics that occur among these reindeer when the leader
is suddenly shot down.  They made no attempt to escape.  They ran up to
where lay the fallen leader, and then they retreated a hundred yards or
so.  Some ran one way and some another, and then veered around and
returned again.

In the meantime Alec and the Indian were carefully loading and firing,
until perhaps between them a dozen deer had been killed.  Then the
Indian gave the signal to stop firing; but they continued to watch them
for several minutes more while panic-stricken and bewildered they
aimlessly ran from point to point.

"Look," said the Indian, "quick, see the new leader!"

And sure enough there was a great, handsome fellow snorting out his
notes of authority and defiance.  None now disputed his guidance, and so
off he started, and in a few seconds not a deer, with the exception of
those that were shot, was visible.  No hunters could get within range
now, nor for many a day to come.

"Why did you give the word to stop firing?" said Alec.

"Because," answered the Indian, "we have killed as many as our people
can eat before the meat will spoil, and we must not kill the deer if we
do not need the meat.  The Great Spirit gives us these things for food.
We must not make him angry by killing more than we need of such
animals."

Well done, red man!  Would that some white hunters, when bent on the
wholesale destruction of valuable animals just for the mad ambition to
kill, had some of his wisdom and religion!

The deer were bled, and, when the entrails were removed, they were
placed where they could be found next day by those who would come for
them.  The Indian cut out a splendid haunch, which he strapped on his
back, then the return trip was begun, and the camp was reached in the
small hours of the next morning.  Very tired but very proud was Alec as
he strode with his Indian companion into the camp.  The fire was burning
low, for all the rest of the party were sound asleep, and it looked as
though they had been so for hours.  Alec, who had been so successful,
was anxious to hear how it had fared with Frank, who had started off
with another Indian after the other herd that had been sighted.

However, he was too tired and sleepy to say much then, and so Alec did
not trouble him.  Alec enjoyed the hastily prepared supper, for which he
had a glorious appetite, after such a long, heavy day's exciting sport.
Then he rolled his blanket around him and cuddled between Sam and Frank,
and was soon wrapped in dreamless slumber.

The chief and favourite part of the breakfast the next morning was the
broiled steaks of that famous haunch of venison which Alec's comrade had
brought back to the camp.

Three Boys in the Wild North Land--by Egerton Ryerson Young



CHAPTER TWENTY SEVEN.

FRANK'S ADVENTURES--THE REINDEER FOLLOWED--UNWELCOME INTERLOPERS--
COWARDLY WOLVES STALKING THE FAWNS--REPELLED BY THE GALLANT BUCKS--CLOSE
QUARTERS--SUCCESSFUL SHOTS--DIFFERENT GAME THAN REINDEER--VISIONS OF
SPLENDOUR.

Frank's experience was a very different one from that of Alec.  He and
his companion had started out in a westerly direction until they sighted
the herd of deer a few miles away.  They followed them up until they
came so near as to have been able to have shot some, but, like other
hunters, they were anxious to kill the leader, so as to throw the herd
in confusion.  With this object in view they carefully skulked along,
hiding behind the clumps of bushes and rocky ridges that were quite
numerous.

All at once they heard a snorting and a sound of rushing hither and
thither among the deer, and so they carefully climbed up some rocks and
cautiously looked over to try and find out what was the cause of the
commotion.  At first they could not make out what was the matter, but
after a while they saw that the herd had other hunters than themselves
after them.  These were a pack of wolves.

They were at the front of the herd, and so Frank and the Indian quickly
drew back from the rock, and hurried on to see the battle.  Fortunately
for them, the reindeer were so excited by the presence of the wolves
that our two hunters were able to get among some large jagged rocks that
rose up fifty or sixty feet, not very distant from them.  Here they had
a capital view of the valley in which were the deer and the wolves.
There seemed to be about a dozen wolves in the pack, and perhaps two
hundred reindeer in the herd, including about thirty young ones that
seemed about five or six months old.

The object of the wolves seemed to be to evade the great antlers of the
bucks and to capture those very pretty young fawns.  It was very
interesting to watch the skill and courage, with which the great
antlered bucks would close up, like a company of cavalry, and charge the
wolves when they ventured too close to the herd.  The wolves never
waited to receive the charge, but ignominiously turned tail and ran for
their lives.  They, however, soon returned when no longer pursued.
There seemed to be a thorough understanding among the deer as to the
position each should take while menaced by the wolves.  The large
antlered ones formed the outside circle.  Next inside were the hornless
males and the does, while in a compact body in the centre were the
fawns.

Thus on they slowly moved, while the wolves attempted at various parts
to break through, but always quickly retreated when a company of the
bucks gallantly charged them.

This strange conflict was watched by Frank and his companion for some
time with intense interest, until it had an abrupt ending.  It came
about this way.  In one of the determined charges made upon the wolves
by, perhaps, thirty reindeer, they drove their cowardly enemies right up
among the rocks just beyond where Frank and his companion had hid
themselves.  The close proximity of the wolves so excited Frank that he
whispered to the Indian:

"Let us fire at the wolves and never mind the deer."

The fact was that Frank's sympathies had so gone out for the deer, as he
watched the incessant schemings of the wolves to get at the beautiful
fawns and the gallant efforts of the older ones to defend them, that he
had no heart to fire into the herd.  He could well see that their firing
into the herd would so terrify and disorganise them that the wolves
would easily destroy the little ones.

From where they were hid the two hunters noticed that the wolves, now no
longer chased by the reindeer, were again clustering near the rocks,
utterly unconscious of the fact that between them and the herd were some
more dreaded foes than even the antlered deer.

"All right," said the Indian, in answer to Frank's request, "but be sure
and kill two with your bullet."

Simultaneously there rang out the double report, and four wolves fell
dead, while the others, terrified by this attack, so unexpected and so
close, fled away toward the distant forest.

After seeing that the wolves did not stop in their flight, it did not
take Frank and his Indian companion long to reach a position where the
herd of deer could again be seen.  Frank was delighted to observe that,
although they seemed to be somewhat startled by the distant report of
the guns, they had not broken their formation, but were more quickly
hurrying away.  To skin the four wolves and return with their pelts to
the camp was all the sport they had, or wanted, for that day.

At first Alec was inclined to boast of a more successful day in reindeer
hunting, but when he heard the whole story he was willing to admit that
perhaps, after all, Frank's had been the nobler experience.

Sam's characteristic comments were:

"Man, but I would have liked to have had a crack at that great leader!
But, after all, I think I would have preferred to have had the
satisfaction of knocking over a couple more of those dirty, thievish,
murdering wolves."

One more great excursion was arranged ere they returned, and that was to
a large lake to which watchers had been sent some days before.

A couple of days after Frank and Alec had had the adventures with
reindeer, these watchers returned with word that the deer were numerous
on the shores of the lake, and were often seen swimming out in its
water.  The two days' rest in the camp had been much needed and enjoyed.
Now all were fresh and eager to be off again.

Very little time is lost in breaking up a camp when once it is decided
to move, and so in a short time the canoes, propelled by the paddles in
the hands of the stalwart Indians, were dancing over the sunlit waves to
their next destination, some twenty miles away.  Here they found the
Indians who had been sent as scouts or watchers had already returned and
prepared a cozy camp for their reception.  A dinner of venison, bear's
meat, and ducks was ready for them, and after the score of miles of
paddling--for the boys always insisted on each doing his share--they
were all, with good appetites, ready to do ample justice to the hunter's
fare.

As the anticipated sport would be exciting, and was generally considered
to be more successful in the forenoons, it was decided to keep quiet
that afternoon and evening.  So the guns were all cleaned and oiled and
many pipes of tobacco were smoked by the Indians, while the boys
wandered along the shores and enjoyed the sights of that picturesque
land.  Just a little before sunset they had a display of colour such as
is seldom given to mortals to see upon this earth of ours.  In the west
there floated a cloud that seemed to hang in the sky like a great prism.
Beyond it the sun in his splendour was slowly settling down toward the
horizon.  Through this prism-like cloud there were reflected and settled
upon the waters all the colours of the rainbow.  Every dancing wave
seemed at times to be of the deepest crimson, then they all seemed like
molten gold, then they were quickly transformed into some other gorgeous
hue, until the whole lake seemed literally ablaze with dazzling colours.

The boys were awed and silenced amid these glories, and sat down on a
rock entranced and almost overwhelmed.  By-and-by the prism-like cloud
that had hung for perhaps half an hour in that position slowly drifted
away, and the sun again shone out in undimmed splendour and the glorious
vision ended.

Then the spell that had so long entranced the boys was broken, and in
silence for a time they looked at each other.  Frank was the first to
speak, and his quiet words were:

"I have seen the `sea of glass mingled with fire' that John saw in
Patmos."

"And I," said Alec, "thought of the city of mansions where the streets
are of gold, and the walls jasper, and the gates pearl."

"And I," said Sam, "thought, `If that is a glimpse of heaven I can
understand why one has said, "Eye hath not seen, nor ear heard, neither
have entered into the heart of man, the things which God hath prepared
for them that love him."'"

With quiet actions, and yet with happy hearts, they returned to the camp
from the long stroll.

Three Boys in the Wild North Land--by Egerton Ryerson Young



CHAPTER TWENTY EIGHT.

BOYS' ADVENTURE WITH REINDEER IN THE LAKE--GADFLIES AND OTHER DEER
PESTS--PECULIAR WEAPONS--DANGEROUS ANTAGONISTS--HOOFS AND HORNS--FRANK'S
SUCCESS--ATTACK ON THE LEADER--CANOE SMASHED--ALEC AND THE INDIANS IN
THE WATER--SAM'S STRATAGEM--SUCCESS AT LAST--THE RETURN TRIP--
SIGNIFICANT SIGNS--DUCKS AND GEESE HEADING SOUTHWARD--INDIANS UNEASY--
JOURNEY HASTENED--SAGASTA-WEEKEE REACHED--SUMMER ENDED--WINTER BEGUN.

Refreshed and invigorated by the much needed rest, the boys with their
appointed Indian companions started off early the next morning for the
lake, which seemed to have become the reindeer's favourite bathing
resort.

So early did they arrive at the lake that they had to wait for some
hours ere a deer was to be seen.  The principal reason why the deer
spend so much time in the water seems to be to get rid of a number of
troublesome flies that very much annoy them.  Some species of gadfly
have the power not only to sting them, but to insert their eggs under
the skin, which soon develops into a large grub.  Some of the skins of
the reindeer are so perforated by these pests that they are absolutely
worthless to the Indians.

Another reason why the deer were late in coming out into the lake was
the fact that, as the summer was nearly gone, the nights were now long
and cool; and the gadflies being only troublesome in the warm hours of
bright sunshine, it was nearly noon ere they came out from their forest
retreats and plunged into the lake.

A herd of reindeer swimming in the water is a very pretty sight.  Having
large lungs, and thus being very buoyant, they swim high in the water,
and being good swimmers they make, when a number of them are disporting
themselves undisturbed, a very beautiful picture.

While our party of hunters were waiting in their shady retreat, secluded
from observation, the Indians with as little noise as possible cut down
and smoothly trimmed for use some poles.  When fully prepared they were
between ten and twelve feet long and from one to two inches in diameter.
To the larger ends of each were securely lashed with deerskin thongs
long, sharp, double-edged knives.

It was about eleven o'clock ere the Indian scouts, sent out to watch the
movements of the deer, returned with the report that the greater portion
of the herd had taken to the water.  In order to be sure of success in
the hunt it was decided to carefully carry the canoes through the woods,
and embark as near as possible to the spot where the deer had plunged
into the lake.  This would place the hunters in the rear of their game,
and thus give them a very decided advantage.

As the Indians were anxious to get as many reindeer as possible for the
sake of the meat, a large portion of which they decided to make into
pemmican, they decided to send out six canoes on this day's expedition.

Our three boys were each assigned a canoe with some Indian hunters who
were supposed to be well versed in this exciting sport.  Each canoe was
furnished with one of these newly improvised spears, while each boy and
hunter had his gun and axe.

The whole six canoes were very noiselessly placed in the water at a spot
where some great overhanging branches reached down to the water's edge.
All were thus enabled to embark without attracting attention, or in the
slightest degree alarming the deer that were now swimming about in the
lake.  Pushing aside the bushes, they all shot out as nearly as possible
together, and, vigorously plying their paddles, began the attack.

The deer, startled and alarmed by the suddenness of the appearance of
the canoes, at first attempted to escape by returning to the shore.
Finding, however, that their retreat was cut off, all there was left for
them to do was to boldly strike out from the land and get, if possible,
beyond the reach of their pursuers.  As the lake was, however, a very
large one there was no possibility of their being able to swim across.
The Indians well knew they would not attempt it; but after endeavouring
to shake off pursuit by swimming out from land, if unsuccessful they
would return and give battle in the water, if there was no other course
open to them.

The three canoes, in each of which was one of the boys, started out side
by side, and there was a good deal of excitement and rivalry, as to whom
should fall the honour of bagging the first reindeer.

Fast as the reindeer can swim, Indian canoemen can paddle their canoes
much faster, and so it was not long ere the deer were overtaken.

"Kill none but those in prime condition," were the orders received by
all; "and let no canoe kill more than four."

As on some former occasions in similar hunting adventures, the boys were
each assigned the post of honour, which was the position in the very
front of the canoe, so that they could be the first to attack the deer
when they came within striking distance.

As they drew near to the deer, and saw how they swam, the boys were able
to see what effective weapons the ones formed by the binding of the
knives to the poles really were.  Of course the terrified deer made the
most desperate efforts to escape; but in spite of all they could do
their pursuers steadily gained upon them.

"Do not be in a hurry," said one of the Indians in Frank's canoe to him
when he seemed so eager to throw his newly formed spear, as though it
were a javelin, at a great antlered fellow they were approaching, but
who, as though conscious of their desires to reach his head, very
cleverly and rapidly kept them off.

The Indians well know, some by bitter experience, the ability of the
reindeer to kick out so viciously and effectively behind, even when
swimming, as to smash the canoe that has been paddled up close to them
by the over-eager, excited hunters.  Hence experienced Indians give that
end of a swimming reindeer a wide berth, and endeavour to get within
striking distance of his head.

"Ready now!" the man quickly spoke again, as this time by a quick
movement they succeeded in getting beyond his heels, and came rapidly
alongside of him.

"Strike him just behind the head, and strike hard," were the next words
Frank heard, and with all his strength he plunged his spear into the
neck of the great animal.  He did not, however, as he should have done,
strike across the spine so as to sever the spinal cord, and so he only
inflicted an ugly flesh wound which irritated the great animal and
caused him to turn round and give battle to the canoe and all its
occupants.  But, rapidly, as he turned, he was not quicker than were the
sharp Indians, who, watching every movement and seeing the failure of
Frank, suddenly began to paddle back from him.  Rendered furious by the
wound, and seeing his enemies retreating, he came on as resolutely and
rapidly as possible.

"Try the gun," said one of the Indians, and Frank, mortified by his
failure with the spear, was not slow to respond.  Carefully aiming for
the curl on the forehead, between the eyes, he pulled the trigger, and
as the report rang out the great deer suddenly turned over dead in the
water.  A cheer rang out, proclaiming the first one thus obtained.  Alec
and his men struck out for one of great size that they supposed was the
leader of the herd.  He not only had a most magnificent set of antlers,
but by the way in which he swam in the water he seemed to possess not
only magnificent lungs, but to be still trying to have some control over
the frightened deer.  When he saw that he was himself being attacked he
immediately, as became the leader of the herd, turned to meet the
advancing canoe and give battle.

It was unfortunate for Alec that his Indian canoemen, while clever
hunters, were inexperienced in the tactics of our old, wily reindeer.
It would have been wise on their part if, when they saw him swing round
and boldly come on to the attack, they had quickly used their guns; but
that is considered the last resort in this kind of sport--the great
ambition is to kill the deer with their spears.

So here Alec and his comrades wished to carry off honours in this
contest; and so, when the great fellow came within reaching distance,
they tried, with a couple of spears, to kill him; but a clever, rapid
twist of his horns seemed to parry their spear thrusts, and before they
knew how it happened the side of the canoe was crushed in as an
eggshell, and they were all struggling in the water.

It was well for them that they were good swimmers; and so they struck
out for the other canoes, the occupants of which, seeing the disaster,
at once began paddling to their rescue.  The greatest danger to be
feared was that the infuriated deer would take after one or more of
them, in which case they would have a poor chance indeed, as a man
swimming is no match for a deer in the water.  With horns and sharp,
chisel-like hoofs, he is able to make a gallant fight, as we have
already seen in the case of the deer and wolves.

However, it was soon seen, in this instance, that no danger was to be
feared.  The deer kept venting his displeasure on the canoe, so that he
paid not the slightest notice to those who had so suddenly sprung out of
it on the opposite side from him, and were rapidly swimming away.  The
poor canoe, however, had to be the butt of his ire--as well as of his
horns--and soon all there was left of it were a few pieces of splinters
floating on the water.  The guns, axes, spears, and other heavy articles
were at the bottom of the lake.

The swimmers were helped into the other canoes, and the sport was
resumed.  When several deer had been killed they were fastened by long
deerskin thongs, like lariats, to the stern of a couple of canoes and
towed through the water to the shore.  Alec and his wet comrades went
with them, and at a great fire built up on the beach soon dried
themselves, and were none the worse for their involuntary swim.

For a time the great deer that had come off so victorious was left
swimming around in his glory, none seeming to care to get into close
quarters with him.  Sam, however, was of a different mind, and was eager
for a round with him.  Of course it would not have been difficult to
shoot him, but, as has been stated, the Indians think there is no honour
or skill in shooting a deer in the water, where he cannot swim as fast
as they can paddle their canoes.  So they were just holding back in each
canoe and waiting for some one else to tackle the big fellow.

When Sam told the Indians in his canoe that he wished they would attack
him they admired his courage and grit, and one of them, with a bit of a
twinkle in his eye, asked:

"You able to swim as well as Alec?"

"Yes, indeed," he replied; "but there will be no need for my trying."

"How you want to kill him?" asked another Indian.

Sam's quick rejoinder was: "I want to spear him, of course."

His enthusiasm was contagious, and the Indians said:

"All right; we will try."

So word was signalled to the other boats that the one in which Sam was
would try the gallant old fellow.  The Indians in the other canoes heard
this with pleasure, and ceased for a time from their pursuits to see the
struggle.

The Indians in charge of Sam's canoe wisely explained to him how, if
they were possibly able to get him alongside of the deer, to try to
spear him across the spinal column as near the head as possible.  They
also took the precaution to have a couple of guns and axes handy where,
in case of emergency, they could be instantly utilised.

When the great reindeer saw them coming down so boldly toward him he at
once accepted the situation, and leaving a number of deer that with him
had been keeping together for some time he gallantly turned to face
them.

When within twenty or thirty yards, as decided upon by the Indian, they
suddenly veered to the right, and kept paddling in eccentric circles
around him, keeping him as nearly as possible about the same distance in
the centre.  That he could not reach the canoe and annihilate it as
easily as he did the other one seemed to very much irritate him, and for
a time he was furious with rage.  Yet in spite of his fury they quietly,
yet warily, watched him, and kept up their circular movements about him.
After a time, seeing it to be an utter impossibility to catch them, he
turned and endeavoured to swim to the shore.

Now the attacked became the aggressors, and so, rapidly, the canoe
followed in his wake.  Several times they tried to draw up alongside to
spear him, but a sudden turn of that well-antlered head was enough to
cause them to draw back in a hurry.  But something must be done, or he
would speedily be at the land.  So another canoe was signalled to make a
feint to attack him from the other side.  The one in which Frank was
paddling with his Indians soon came up, and when told what was desired
of them quickly responded.

The deer, thus worried by the two, had hardly a fair chance, but he
gallantly kept up the unequal struggle for quite a time.  Sam's canoemen
at length saw an unguarded place and so dashed in alongside the big
fellow, and at the right minute the Indian steering called out to Sam:

"Now give it to him in the neck, close up to his head."

Sam, however, was not quick enough, and therefore his spear, which he
plunged with all the force he was capable of into the deer, while it did
not instantly kill, so cut down the side of the neck as to sever some
large veins.  Unfortunately for Sam, he could not withdraw the spear
from the deer, and he was in no humour to lose it, so he hung on to it;
but before he knew where he was a great bound of the deer jerked him out
of the canoe.  However, he fell fairly and squarely on the back of the
great deer, and he was not such a fool as not to avail himself of such
an opportunity for a ride.  So speedily righting himself on this odd
steed, amid the laughter of Frank and the Indians, he was evidently in
for a good time.

It might have fared badly with him if the deer had been able to have
used his horns freely, or have moved with his usual speed in the water;
but the additional weight on his back so sank him down that he was
powerless to do harm.  All he could do, after a few desperate efforts to
get rid of his burden, was to start for the shore, and so he speedily
continued swimming toward it as though this was his usual employment.

Sam hung on without much trouble, but as they neared the shore he began
to wonder what might happen next.  But when his antlered steed reached
the shallow waters his strength gave way from the excessive loss of
blood from the severed veins in his neck, and soon he dropped dead.  The
great carcass was dragged ashore, while the bodies of the others killed
were towed in by the canoes.  They killed altogether ten animals, but
the reindeer hunt in the water that day, considering the loss of a fine
canoe and all its contents, was not voted an unqualified success.

All the Indians present at the camp, which they made near the spot from
which they had embarked in the morning, went to work at the venison
there landed, and in a few hours they had it all cut into strips and
broad flakes and hung up on stagings of poles speedily erected.  A
smokeless fire under [it], and the bright sun above it, in a few days
made the meat so hard and dry that, by using the backs of their axes for
hammers and pounding this meat on the smooth wooden logs, they
thoroughly pulverised it.  Then packing it in bags made of the green
hides of the deer, and saturating the whole mass with the melted fat
taken from around the kidneys of the reindeer, they had prepared a most
palatable kind of pemmican.  If well prepared in this way it was
considered fully equal to that made from the buffalo on the great
plains.

Leaving the majority of the Indians of that country to continue their
capturing of the reindeer and the manufacturing of pemmican while they
remained in that section of the land, Frank, Alec, and Sam, with their
travelling companions, returned to Oxford House.  There they made a
visit of a few days at the home of the missionary.  It was a great joy
to meet with this devoted, heroic man and his equally brave and noble
wife, who for the sake of Christianisation and civilisation of the
Indians of this section of the country had willingly sacrificed the
comforts and blessings of civilisation and come to this land.  Only
twice a year did they hear from the outer world, and only once every
year had they any opportunity of receiving any of the so-called
"necessaries of life" at this remote station.  Yet they said and showed
that they were very happy in their work, and rejoiced at the success
which, not only to themselves but to any unbiased observer, was so
visibly manifested in the greatly improved lives and habits of the
natives.  Missions to such people are not failures.

They would have been delighted to have lingered longer in this home, and
with this delightful missionary and his good wife, who so reminded each
of the boys of his own dear mother.  But the Indians who were to take
them back to Sagasta-weekee were uneasy at the appearances in the
heavens and of the birds in the air, and so it was decided that they
must return.

Four days of rapid paddling were sufficient to make the return journey.
At the close of each day the boys remarked, as they cuddled up close to
the splendid camp fire, that they seemed to have an additional liking
for its glow and warmth; and for the first time they preferred to sleep
as close together as possible, and were thankful that the thoughtful
Indians had in reserve for them an additional blanket apiece.  The last
day of the home journey was quite a cold one, but the vigorous exercise
of paddling saved them from any discomfort.  They could not but help
noticing the large numbers of geese and ducks that were flying over
them, and all were going south.  The boys would have liked, where they
were specially numerous, to have stopped and had a few hours' shooting,
but the Indians said:

"Perhaps to-morrow you will see it was best for us to get home."

So "forward" was the word, and on they went and reached home after an
exceedingly rapid journey from Oxford Lake.

They met with a right royal welcome at Sagasta-weekee.  Mr and Mrs
Ross and the children were all delighted to have them back again with
them.  The faithful canoemen were well paid and given a capital supper
in the kitchen, and then dismissed to their several homes.

Frank, Alec, and Sam had each to give some account of their adventures
to the household as they were gathered that evening around the roaring
fire, which was much enjoyed.  Then prayers were offered, and away the
boys went to their rooms.  They could not but remark to each other how
much warmer were their beds than when they last slept in them.  However,
they found them none too warm as they cuddled down in their downy depths
and were soon fast asleep.

When they awoke the next morning the sleet and snow were beating with
fury against the window panes, and all nature was white with snow.

Shortly after the wind went down, and then the ice covered over all the
open waters, and they saw that that most delightful summer in the Wild
North Land was ended, and the winter, with its cold and brightness and
possibilities for other kinds of sports and adventures, had begun.